JP6133385B2 - Information processing apparatus and information processing program - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to an information processing apparatus, an information processing system, a startup program, and a storage medium storing the program. More specifically, the present invention relates to a configuration capable of providing a shooting function and / or a sound acquisition function.

  As a portable information processing apparatus having a preceding photographing function, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) discloses a cellular phone. This cellular phone employs a folding configuration and has one display screen on each of the inner surfaces of the two housings. In this cellular phone, one camera as an imaging unit is provided on each of the outer surface and the inner surface of the upper housing.

  A portable device described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2) includes a camera and a microphone, and has a configuration in which screens are provided on two surfaces of a housing (housing).

  Furthermore, as a portable information processing apparatus that adopts a foldable configuration, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-195830 (Patent Document 3) discloses an information processing apparatus in which two housings are foldably connected. Has been. This information processing apparatus has one (two in total) display screens on the inner side surface (the inner surface when folded) of each housing.

  Furthermore, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4) discloses an information device with a built-in camera. This information device has a configuration in which a main unit and a display unit are rotatably connected by a hinge block. In this information device, a camera is disposed in the hinge block.

  In addition, prior arts listed below are known.

JP 2006-31224 A JP 2004-274304 A JP 2007-195830 A JP 2001-142564 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 04-156791 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 06-276478 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 01-297986 JP 2002-125176 A JP 2004-320091 A JP 2003-333149 A JP 2005-184060 A JP 2007-201727 A JP 09-247634 A JP-A-10-341388 JP 2000-56756 A

"Short Shot Instruction Manual", Sony Computer Entertainment Inc., November 2, 2006

  However, the first and second applications that can be executed in the information processing apparatus described in the above "" Slightly shot instruction manual ", Sony Computer Entertainment Inc., November 2, 2006" (Non-Patent Document 1). The programs have different functions (although there are common functions), so in the situation where the user is shooting by executing one of the application programs, only the other application program is In this case, in order to use a desired function, the user first ends the execution of the one application program, and then uses the desired function. , The other application pro Select the ram, further, that activates the other application program, it had to perform a troublesome operation.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made to solve at least one of these problems. An object of the present invention is to provide a startup program and an information processing apparatus that can execute a plurality of types of photographing functions with a simple operation and are easy for a user to use.

  The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems. Note that reference numerals in parentheses, step numbers, supplementary explanations, and the like in this column indicate correspondence with embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and limit the present invention in any way. It is not a thing.

  According to an aspect of the present invention, the image capturing unit (cameras 23 and 25) is provided, a plurality of application programs (53 to 56) can be stored, and the image capturing unit performs photographing as the application program. A startup program (61) that is executed in the computer (CPU 31) of the information processing apparatus (10) in which the predetermined photographing application program (53) is stored in advance is provided. This starting program is a program for selectively starting an application program desired by the user from among the plurality of application programs. The activation program includes first activation operation accepting means (CPU 31 that executes steps SA6 and SA11; hereinafter, only the step number is shown), first activation means (SA12), imaging processing means (SA10), and imaging. The computer is caused to function as possible operation receiving means (SA6, SA9) and photographing operation receiving means (SA24, SA25). The first activation operation accepting unit accepts a first activation operation that selectively activates a plurality of application programs. When the first activation operation is performed, the first activation unit activates the application program selected by the first activation operation among the plurality of application programs. The imaging processing means executes an imaging process for saving the image captured by the imaging means in the storage means of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined imaging operation, and automatically cancels the imaging enabled state in response to the saving.

According to this aspect, in the activation acceptance state, the user can activate the selected application program by the first activation operation, and can execute the imaging process by the imaging processing unit by the imaging enable operation. Therefore, the user can easily and quickly activate the function of the imaging processing means even in the activation acceptance state for activating the application program. Further, in the photographing enabled state, the photographing application program can be activated by the second activation operation. Therefore, the user can easily and quickly start the shooting application program by the second startup operation even during the shooting process by the shooting processing means. That is, according to the present embodiment, even when the user wants to use a function (of the shooting application program) that the shooting processing unit does not have while using the shooting function of the shooting processing unit, the user can 2. The function can be used easily and quickly by the activation operation. As described above, according to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing apparatus that can execute both the imaging function of the imaging processing unit and the function of the imaging application program with a simple operation and is easy for the user to use. be able to.

  Further, according to this aspect, the photographing application program can be directly started during execution of the photographing function by the photographing processing means. That is, since the other shooting function (shooting function by the shooting application program) can be easily activated from one shooting function (shooting function by the shooting processing means), the other function can be obtained through the use of the one function. The user can be guided to use.

  According to another aspect of the present invention, the image capturing unit (cameras 23 and 25) is provided, a plurality of application programs (53 to 56) can be stored, and the image capturing unit performs photographing as the application program. A startup program (61) is provided that is executed by the computer (CPU 31) of the information processing apparatus (10) in which a predetermined shooting application program (53) is stored in advance. This starting program is a program for selectively starting an application program desired by the user from among the plurality of application programs. The activation program includes first activation operation accepting means (CPU 31 that executes steps SA6 and SA11; hereinafter, only the step number is shown), first activation means (SA12), imaging processing means (SA10), and imaging. The computer is caused to function as possible operation receiving means (SA6, SA9) and photographing operation receiving means (SA24, SA25). The first activation operation accepting unit accepts a first activation operation that selectively activates a plurality of application programs. When the first activation operation is performed, the first activation unit activates the application program selected by the first activation operation among the plurality of application programs. The photographing processing unit executes a photographing process for storing a captured image by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined photographing operation, and cancels the photographing possible state for each photographing according to the photographing operation.

  According to a preferred aspect, the photographing enabled operation may be different in operation method from the first activation operation.

  According to this aspect, the photographing function by the photographing processing means can be easily executed by an operation different from the first activation operation for activating the selected application program.

  According to a preferred aspect, the activation program includes an activation function program that activates an application program, and an imaging function program that causes a computer to function as imaging processing means. The data size of the shooting function program may be smaller than the data size of the shooting application program.

  According to a preferred aspect, the first activation operation accepting unit may not accept the first activation operation in the photographing enabled state.

  According to a preferred aspect, the first activation operation accepting unit displays a plurality of icons corresponding to the plurality of application programs, accepts a selection operation for the icon as the first activation operation, and is stored in the storage unit by the imaging processing unit. The captured image may be displayed together with the plurality of icons.

  According to a preferred aspect, the photographing application program stores a captured image photographed by the program in a storage unit. The first activation operation accepting unit displays a plurality of icons corresponding to the plurality of application programs, accepts a selection operation for the icon as the first activation operation, and displays the captured image stored in the storage unit together with the plurality of icons. You may make it do.

  According to a preferred aspect, the activation program includes an activation function program that activates an application program, and an imaging function program that causes a computer to function as imaging processing means. When the information processing apparatus is activated, the photographing function program may be read together with the activation function program.

  According to a preferred aspect, the shooting operation is the same as the shooting operation in the shooting application program.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, the image capturing unit is provided, a plurality of application programs can be stored, and a predetermined image capturing application program for performing image capturing by the image capturing unit is stored in advance as the application program. An activation program for selectively starting an application program desired by the user from among the plurality of application programs is provided. The activation program includes: a first activation operation accepting unit that accepts a first activation operation that selectively activates a plurality of application programs including a photographing application program; and when the first activation operation is performed, First activation means for activating the application program selected by the first activation operation, and photographing for storing a captured image by the imaging means in a storage means of the information processing apparatus in accordance with a predetermined photographing operation in a predetermined photographing enabled state The computer is made to function as a photographing processing means for executing the processing and automatically canceling the photographing enabled state.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, an imaging program that is executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus having imaging means is provided. The imaging program executes a shooting process for storing an image captured by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined shooting operation, and causes the computer to function as a shooting processing unit that automatically releases the shooting enabled state. .

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, an imaging program that is executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus having imaging means is provided. The imaging program executes an imaging process for storing an image captured by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing apparatus in accordance with a predetermined imaging operation, and automatically releases the imaging enabled state in accordance with the storage. As a computer to function.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, an imaging program that is executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus having imaging means is provided. The imaging program executes an imaging process for saving an image captured by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing apparatus in accordance with a predetermined imaging operation, and automatically cancels an imaging enabled state in accordance with the imaging operation. As a computer to function.

According to still another aspect of the present invention, an imaging program that is executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus having imaging means is provided. The imaging program executes a shooting process for storing an image captured by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined shooting operation, and a computer as a shooting processing unit that automatically cancels the shooting enabled state for each shooting. To work.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, an imaging program that is executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus having imaging means is provided. The imaging program executes a shooting process for storing the image captured by the imaging unit in the storage unit of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined shooting operation, and automatically releases the shooting enabled state for each shooting according to the shooting operation. The computer is caused to function as a photographing processing means.

  According to an alternative aspect of the present invention, it may be provided as an information processing apparatus including each means in each aspect described above.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a startup program and an information processing apparatus that can execute a plurality of types of photographing functions with a simple operation and are easy for the user to use.

It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the imaging device according to this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the lighting operation of LED of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating operation of the volume button of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a side view in the open state (open state) of the game device according to the present embodiment. It is a side view in the closed state (closed state) of the game device according to the present embodiment. It is A-A 'sectional drawing of the lower housing shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a B-B ′ sectional view of the upper housing shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows a mode that the user hold | gripped the game device according to this embodiment with both hands. It is a figure which shows a mode that the user hold | gripped the game device according to this embodiment with one hand. It is a figure which shows a mode that the user hold | maintained the game device according to this embodiment vertically. It is a figure which shows a mode that the user hold | maintained the game device according to this embodiment vertically. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game device according to this embodiment is gripped and used. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game device according to this embodiment is mounted and used. It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the imaging device according to the modification of this embodiment. It is a side view in the open state (open state) of the game device according to the modification of this embodiment. It is a side view in the closed state (closed state) of the game device according to the modification of the present embodiment. The block diagram which shows the internal structure of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting method of each application program in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main data memorize | stored in the main memory of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a main flowchart which shows the flow of the launcher process of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the simple imaging | photography process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu screen in the launcher process of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the imaging | photography possible state in the launcher process of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed after execution of the imaging operation of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed after execution of the simple imaging | photography process of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the imaging | photography guidance process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the process at the time of opening and closing of the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the change method in the display image change process of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the multi-functional imaging | photography process according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the multi-functional imaging | photography process according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a flow of a photographic display mode process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 30. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the photograph display mode according to this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a flow of shooting mode processing shown in FIG. 32. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the imaging | photography mode according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the imaging | photography process (the 1) in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the imaging | photography process in the imaging device according to this embodiment shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the input image generation process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed at the time of the pen mode shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the display process of the preserve | saved image shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the imaging | photography process (the 2) in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the display process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the edit process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed at the time of the pen mode of the edit process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed at the time of the seal | sticker mode of the edit process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the calendar process according to this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the system with which the game device according to this embodiment is connected. It is a figure which shows the example (1) of a screen display displayed in the step before determining whether it is a transmission side or a receiving side in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example (1) of a screen display displayed in the step before determining whether it is a transmission side or a receiving side in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 1st step respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 2nd step respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the 3rd step respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 4th step respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 5th step respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display at the time of the communication disconnection respectively displayed on the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission side, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving side. It is a figure which shows an example of the various data memorize | stored in a main memory according to execution of the image communication program according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example in which the game device according to this embodiment performs an image communication process. 58 is a flowchart showing a subroutine showing detailed operations of the image transmission processing shown in FIG. 57. 58 is a flowchart showing a subroutine showing detailed operations of the image reception processing shown in FIG. 57. It is a figure which shows an example of the signal transmitted / received between the game device according to this embodiment of a transmission origin, and the game device according to this embodiment of a receiving destination. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound selection screen 400 in the sound function in the game device according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the music reproduction folder list selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining another music reproduction folder list selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the music file selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the reproduction | regeneration operation | movement selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process which concerns on the function selection in the game device according to this embodiment. 67 is a flowchart for describing a subroutine process of a selection function mode transition process in FIG. 66. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process in music reproduction mode. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of the folder search process in an SD card. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of folder list generation. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of a folder name determination process. It is a figure explaining an example of the specific example explaining a folder search process. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of a music file selection process. It is a figure explaining the subroutine process of a music file reproduction | regeneration process. It is the figure which expanded the volume setting icon. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of the volume setting process according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of a volume setting icon. It is a figure explaining the function which changes reproduction speed and a pitch by selecting a speed pitch adjustment icon. It is a figure explaining the function which changes the frequency of a reproduction signal by selecting a timbre adjustment icon, or performs a filtering process etc., and changes into another timbre. It is a figure explaining the case where the sound effect output from a speaker etc. is changed when a user operates R button and L button by selecting a sound effect selection icon. It is a figure explaining the visualizer display process according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of a visualizer display process. It is a figure explaining another visualizer display screen. It is a figure explaining another visualizer display screen. It is a figure explaining the flow when the headphones according to this embodiment are detected. It is a flowchart explaining the sleep process at the time of folding the game device 10 in a folding position. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine processing of sleep music reproduction mode. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic recording mode according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of the recording process according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of a recording data preservation | save process. It is a flowchart of automatic reproduction mode according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process of the setting process according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the setting screen according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process in microphone recording / reproducing mode. It is a figure explaining the recording data file list selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a recording data reproduction operation selection screen. It is a figure explaining the subroutine process of a sound recording data file reproduction process. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process (the 1) of a recording data file creation process. It is a figure explaining the recording start screen according to this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the subroutine process (the 2) of a recording data file creation process. It is a figure explaining the recording data file color designation screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the favorite folder selection screen according to this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the storage medium which the game device according to this embodiment can utilize.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, about the same or equivalent part in a figure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is not repeated.

[1. Overview]
Hereinafter, a portable game apparatus 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment has an imaging means (camera), and also functions as an imaging apparatus. Typically, the game apparatus 10 captures an image of a subject by the imaging unit, displays the image on an image screen obtained by imaging, stores data of the captured image, and captures an image with another apparatus. It is possible to send and receive image data.

  In addition, the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment is typically provided as a computer including a calculation unit such as a CPU and a memory, and can execute various application programs related to image processing and information processing. By executing such a program, the game apparatus 10 also functions as an image processing apparatus or an information processing apparatus. As a matter of course, the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment can also execute various game programs.

  That is, the program according to the present invention can be executed by an arbitrary computer system, but in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the program according to the present invention is executed by the game apparatus 10 will be exemplified. A part or all of the functions provided by the program according to the present invention may be realized by a hardware circuit.

[2. Definition of terms]
In this specification, acquiring image data from an imaging means (camera) is referred to as “imaging”, and storing captured image data is referred to as “imaging”.

[3. Appearance configuration]
<Overall appearance>
FIG. 1 is a plan view showing the appearance of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the back side of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, game device 10 according to the present embodiment is typically a foldable portable game device. FIG. 1 shows a state in which the game apparatus 10 is opened (open state). The user normally uses the game apparatus 10 in the open state, and stores the game apparatus 10 in the closed state when the game apparatus 10 is not used. Therefore, it is preferable that the game apparatus 10 is configured to have a size that allows the user to hold it with both hands or one hand even in an open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game apparatus 10 has two housings, a lower housing 11 and an upper housing 21. The lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 are connected so as to be openable and closable (foldable). That is, the shaft portion 11A shown in FIG. 1 is provided at both ends with respect to the left and right direction (the y direction in the drawing) of the upper side (the side on the positive x-axis side in the drawing) of the lower housing 11 (the shaft portion 11A is connected to the lower housing 11). Structurally integrated). Further, a shaft portion 21A shown in FIG. 1 is provided at the center of the lower side of the upper housing 21 (the side on the negative side of the x axis in the drawing) in the left-right direction (the y direction in the drawing). United). The shaft portion 11A and the shaft portion 21A are connected so as to be rotatable about the left-right direction as an axis by a hinge provided inside. Thereby, the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 are connected so as to be rotatable about the left-right direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the housings 11 and 21 have a horizontally long shape (that is, each housing has a lateral dimension longer than a longitudinal dimension), and typically has a rectangular shape. Each of the housings 11 and 21 has a flat plate shape (that is, the thickness direction is shorter than the vertical and horizontal directions). Moreover, the upper housing 21 and the lower housing 11 are thin flat plate shapes. Further, the thickness of the upper housing 21 is preferably smaller than the thickness of the lower housing 11. The lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 are rotatably connected to each other at their long sides.

In an alternative embodiment, the game apparatus 10 may be configured with a single housing instead of the folding type.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game apparatus 10 includes two display devices, an upper LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 22 and a lower LCD 12. The upper LCD 22 is attached to the inner surface of the upper housing 21 (the inner surface when the game apparatus 10 is closed), and the lower LCD 12 is attached to the inner surface of the lower housing 11.

  In the present embodiment, an LCD is used as the display device, but other arbitrary display devices such as a display device using EL (Electro Luminescence) may be used. Further, the game apparatus 10 can use a display device having an arbitrary resolution. In the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 is described as an example having two display devices. However, in an alternative embodiment, the number of display devices included in the game apparatus is not particularly limited.

<Lower housing>
Next, a configuration provided in the lower housing 11 of the game apparatus 10 will be described.

  As described above, the game apparatus 10 includes the lower LCD 12. The lower LCD 12 has a horizontally long shape, and is arranged such that the long side direction coincides with the long side direction of the lower housing 11. The lower LCD 12 is housed in the lower housing 11. The lower LCD 12 is provided on the inner surface of the lower housing 11. Therefore, when the game apparatus 10 is not used, it is possible to prevent the screen of the lower LCD 12 from becoming dirty or damaged by keeping the game apparatus 10 closed.

  The inner surface of the lower housing 11 is formed in a substantially flat shape. In the center of the inner side surface, an opening 11B for exposing the lower LCD 12 is formed. An opening 11C is formed on the left side of the opening 11B (the y-axis negative side in the drawing), and an opening 11D is formed on the right side of the opening 11B. The openings 11C and 11D are for exposing the key tops (the upper surfaces of the buttons 14A to 14E). As a result, the screen of the lower LCD 12 housed in the lower housing 11 is exposed from the opening 11B, and the key tops are exposed from the openings 11C and 11D.

  As described above, the inner surface of the lower housing 11 corresponds to the non-screen areas (dotted line areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the opening 11B for the lower LCD 12 provided in the center. Are provided with areas for arranging the respective buttons 14A to 14E (button arrangement areas). Each of the button arrangement areas is designed so that the dimension in the horizontal direction (the y direction in the drawing) is at least 15 mm or more (preferably 20 mm or more, more preferably about 30 mm to 40 mm).

  The lower housing 11 is provided with buttons 14A to 14K and a touch panel 13 as input devices. As shown in FIG. 1, among the buttons 14A to 14K, the direction input button 14A, the button 14B, the button 14C, the button 14D, the button 14E, the power button 14F, the start button 14G, and the select button 14H are provided on the lower housing. 11 is provided on the inner surface. The inner side surface means the inner side when the upper housing 21 and the lower housing 11 are folded.

The direction input button 14A is used for, for example, a selection operation, and the buttons 14B to 14E, the start button 14G, and the select button 14H are used for, for example, a determination operation or a cancel operation. The power button 14F is used for turning on / off the power of the game apparatus 10.

  In the present embodiment, the direction input button 14A and the power button 14F are provided on one side (left side in FIG. 1) with respect to the lower LCD 12 provided near the center of the lower housing 11, and the buttons 14B to 14E. Is provided on the other side (the right side in FIG. 1) with respect to the lower LCD 12. The power button 14F may be provided on the right side surface of the lower housing 11 as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17C.

  The direction input button 14A has a cross shape, and the length and width are both about 20 mm. The center of the direction input button 14 </ b> A is provided at a position about 20 mm from the left end of the lower housing 11 and about 40 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11.

  The power button 14 </ b> F has a circular shape, and the center thereof is provided at a position about 25 mm from the left end of the lower housing 11 and about 10 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11.

  Each of the buttons 14B to 14E has a circular shape, and each has a radius of about 5 mm. The center of the button 14 </ b> B is provided at a position about 10 mm from the right end of the lower housing 11 and about 40 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11. The center of the button 14 </ b> C is provided at a position about 20 mm from the right end of the lower housing 11 and about 40 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11. The center of the button 14 </ b> D is provided at a position about 20 mm from the right end of the lower housing 11 and about 50 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11. The center of the button 14 </ b> E is provided at a position about 25 mm from the right end of the lower housing 11 and about 45 mm from the lower end of the lower housing 11.

  The direction input button 14 </ b> A and the buttons 14 </ b> B to 14 </ b> E are used for performing various operations (described later) on the game apparatus 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the L button 14 </ b> I is provided at the left end portion of the upper side surface of the lower housing 11, and the R button 14 </ b> J is provided at the right end portion of the upper side surface of the lower housing 11. The L button 14I and the R button 14J are used, for example, for performing a shooting instruction operation (shutter operation).

  The volume button 14 </ b> K is provided on the left side surface of the lower housing 11. The volume button 14K is used to adjust the volume of a speaker provided in the game apparatus 10. Further, in the present embodiment, the volume button 14K is used to adjust the brightness of the upper LCD 22 and the lower LCD 12 by being operated together with the select button 14H. These operations will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game apparatus 10 further includes a touch panel 13 as an input device different from the operation buttons 14 </ b> A to 14 </ b> I. The touch panel 13 is mounted on the screen of the lower LCD 12. As the touch panel 13, an arbitrary system such as a resistive film system, an optical system (infrared system), and a capacitive coupling system can be used. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 13 having the same resolution (detection accuracy) as that of the lower LCD 12 is used. However, the resolution of the touch panel 13 and the resolution of the lower LCD 12 do not necessarily match. Moreover, the touch panel as used in the present embodiment may be detected by any principle as long as it is a device that can detect contact coordinates on the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, an insertion port 17 is provided on the right side surface of the lower housing 11. The insertion slot 17 can accommodate a touch pen 27 used for performing an operation on the touch panel 13. In addition, although the input with respect to the touch panel 13 is normally performed using the touch pen 27, it is also possible to operate the touch panel 13 not only with the touch pen 27 but with a user's finger.

  Further, an insertion slot for accommodating the memory card 28 is provided on the right side surface of the lower housing 11. A connector (not shown) for electrically connecting the game apparatus 10 and the memory card 28 is provided inside the insertion slot. The memory card 28 is detachably attached to this connector.

  The memory card 28 is based on a general-purpose standard whose specifications are defined by any standard organization, and is typically an SD (Secure Digital) memory card. The memory card 28 has a built-in nonvolatile rewritable memory. For example, the memory card 28 stores (saves) an image captured by the game device 10 or reads an image generated by another device into the game device 10. It is used to hang up. Alternatively, the memory card 28 stores a music file, which is music data, in advance, and the reproduction process can be executed by reading the music file into the game apparatus 10. Note that some program may be stored in the memory card 28 by a personal computer or the like, but such a program cannot be executed by the game apparatus 10.

  Further, an insertion slot (indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 1) for accommodating the memory card 29 is provided on the upper side surface of the lower housing 11. A connector (not shown) for electrically connecting the game apparatus 10 and the memory card 29 is also provided inside the insertion slot.

  The memory card 29 is preferably based on a dedicated standard for the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment. That is, the memory card 29 is designed to have a size different from that of the general-purpose standard memory card. The memory card 29 is a storage medium that stores an image communication program, a game program, and the like, and is detachably attached to an insertion port provided in the lower housing 11. The memory card 29 can also store a selected application program to be described later. The application program stored in the memory card 29 is read into the main memory 32 and executed by the CPU 31 when the execution is selected by a method described later with reference to FIG.

  The memory card 29 may have a built-in ROM and store a program in the ROM. However, the memory card 29 has a built-in rewritable non-volatile memory so that data can be written by the game apparatus 10. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 1, three LEDs 15 </ b> A to 15 </ b> C are attached to the left side portion (or the right side portion as shown in FIG. 15) of the shaft portion 11 </ b> A of the lower housing 11. The lighting operation of these LEDs 15A to 15C will be described later.

<Upper housing>
On the other hand, the upper housing 21 is provided with a configuration (camera) for capturing an image and a configuration (display device) for displaying the captured image. Hereinafter, the structure provided in the upper housing 21 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game apparatus 10 has an upper LCD 22. The upper LCD 22 is housed in the upper housing 21. The upper LCD 22 has a horizontally long shape and is arranged such that the long side direction coincides with the long side direction of the upper housing 21. The upper LCD 22 is provided on the inner surface of the upper housing 21 (the surface that becomes the inner side when the game apparatus 10 is closed). Therefore, when the game apparatus 10 is not used, the screen of the upper LCD 22 can be prevented from becoming dirty or damaged by keeping the game apparatus 10 closed. As in the case of the lower LCD 12, instead of the upper LCD 22, a display device having any other method and any resolution may be used. Although details will be described later, the upper LCD 22 mainly displays an image related to the imaging operation such as an image explaining how to operate the user. In an alternative embodiment, a touch panel may also be provided on the upper LCD 22.

  The game apparatus 10 has two cameras 23 and 25 as imaging means. Both cameras 23 and 25 are housed in the upper housing 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the inner camera 23 is attached to the inner surface of the upper housing 21. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, the outer camera 25 is the surface opposite to the surface to which the inner camera 23 is attached, that is, the outer surface of the upper housing 21 (outside when the game apparatus 10 is closed). Surface).

  In the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 including two cameras as imaging means will be described as an example. However, the game apparatus may include one camera or three or more cameras. Good. Further, the position where the camera is attached may be any position.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the fourth LED 26 is attached to the outer surface of the upper housing 21. The fourth LED 26 is attached to the periphery of the outer camera 25 (in this embodiment, the right side of the outer camera 25. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, the upper side of the outer camera 25 in the open state). The fourth LED 26 is turned on at the time when photographing is performed by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25 (the shutter button is pressed). Further, it is lit while a moving image is shot by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25.

  By such operation of the fourth LED 26, it is possible to notify the subject of photographing that photographing by the game apparatus 10 has been performed (performed).

  Further, on the lower side surface of the lower housing 11, an audio external output terminal 19 for inserting a plug provided in a device (for example, a headphone, an earphone, a bone conduction headphone, etc.) that outputs audio externally (see FIG. 1 is indicated by a broken line). Inside the audio external output terminal 19, a jack 62 is provided for electrically connecting the game apparatus 1 and a device for external audio output. The device that outputs audio externally may be for both ears such as headphones, or it may be for one ear such as earphones, and the plug of the device that externally outputs audio is detachable from the jack. It is attached to. In the following, a case of a headphone will be described as a representative example of a device that performs external output of sound, but a device such as an earphone can also be used.

  The game apparatus 10 includes a microphone (a microphone 43 shown in FIG. 18) as a voice input device. The microphone 43 is housed inside the upper housing 21. In the present embodiment, the microphone 43 is disposed in the shaft portion 21 </ b> A of the upper housing 21. More specifically, it is attached to the periphery of the inner camera 23 (the side of the y axis in the figure), and more specifically, the side that is 10 mm away from the inner camera 23 (the side of the positive side of the y axis in the figure). ).

  A microphone hole 21 </ b> C is provided on the inner side surface of the upper housing 21 so that the microphone can detect sound outside the game apparatus 10. The microphone hole 21 </ b> C is provided in the shaft portion 21 </ b> A of the upper housing 21. When the microphone hole 21 </ b> C is provided in the connecting portion between the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21, it is preferably provided at a position offset from the center by a predetermined distance.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the microphone may be housed in the lower housing 11. In FIG. 15, the microphone hole 16 is provided on the inner side surface of the lower housing 11, specifically, the lower left portion of the inner side surface of the lower housing 11 (button arrangement region corresponding to the dotted line region A <b> 1). The microphone is arranged in the vicinity of the microphone hole 16 in the lower housing 11.

  The position where the microphone 43 is accommodated and the position of the microphone hole 16 do not necessarily have to be the connecting portion. For example, the microphone 43 is accommodated in the lower housing 11, and the lower housing corresponds to the accommodation position of the microphone 43. 11 may be provided with a microphone hole 16. Alternatively, the microphone hole 16 may be provided adjacent to the external output terminal 19 for inserting a plug provided in the headphones.

<Indicator display and operation example>
FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the lighting operation of the LEDs 15A to 15C of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 3A, the game apparatus 10 can perform wireless communication with other devices as will be described later, and the first LED 15A is lit when the wireless communication is established. To do. Specifically, the first LED 15A is always lit if it can communicate with other devices. The first LED 15A blinks during communication with other devices (or during data transmission).

Referring to FIG. 3B, the second LED 15B is lit while the game apparatus 10 is being charged.
Referring to FIG. 3C, the third LED 15C is lit when the power of the game apparatus 10 is on. Furthermore, the lighting state of the third LED 15 </ b> C changes according to the state of charge of a battery (battery pack) mounted on the game apparatus 10. Specifically, the third LED 15C lights in blue when the remaining battery level is relatively high, and lights in red when the remaining battery level is relatively low. Further, when the remaining battery level is low, the third LED 15C blinks red.

  As described above, the three LEDs 15 </ b> A to 15 </ b> C can notify the user of the communication state of the game apparatus 10, the charging state, the remaining battery level, the power on / off state, and the like.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the volume button 14K of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment. In the game apparatus 10, the volume can be set in a plurality of levels (for example, 5 levels). As shown in FIG. 4A, the volume is increased each time the “+” (plus) side of the volume button 14K is pressed. Increase by one step. On the other hand, each time the “−” (minus) side of the volume button 14K is pressed, the volume decreases by one level.

  Note that the sound effect (shutter sound) output from the speaker when the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25 is photographed (the shutter button is pressed) is constant regardless of the volume setting. It is preferable that the volume is reached.

  Further, when the game apparatus 100 is in a sleep state, which will be described later, it is preferable that only the volume is allowed to be reduced by operating the volume button 14K.

Referring to FIG. 4B, when the volume button 14K is operated with the select button 14H being pressed, the brightness of the upper LCD 22 and the lower LCD 12 is changed. That is, each time the “+” (plus) side of the volume button 14K is pressed while the select button 14H is pressed, the display on the upper LCD 22 and the lower LCD 12 becomes brighter by one level. On the other hand, each time the “−” (minus) side of the volume button 14K is pressed in a state where the select button 14H is pressed, the display on the upper LCD 22 and the lower LCD 12 becomes darker by one level.

[4. Detailed structure and mode of use]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14 in addition to FIGS. 1 and 2 described above, a more detailed structure of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment and a usage pattern of the game apparatus 10 by the user will be described.

  FIG. 5 shows a side view of the game apparatus 10 in an open state (open state), and FIG. 6 shows a four-side view of the game apparatus 10 in a closed state (closed state). 6A shows a left side view of the game apparatus 10 in the closed state, FIG. 6B shows a front view of the game apparatus 10, and FIG. 6C shows a right side of the game apparatus 10. FIG. 6D shows a rear view of the game apparatus 10.

    Game device 10 according to the present embodiment has a small size that can be held with both hands or one hand in an open state. The game apparatus 10 is, for example, a size in a closed state (vertical) 50 mm to 100 mm × (horizontal)) 100 mm to 200 mm × (thickness) 10 mm to 40 mm, while in an open state ( (Vertical) The size can be about 100 mm to 200 mm. The “vertical” direction corresponds to the x direction in the figure, the “lateral” direction corresponds to the y direction in the figure, and the “thickness” direction corresponds to the z direction in the figure.

  More preferably, in the closed state, the size is 60 mm to 90 mm × (width) 100 mm to 150 mm × (thickness) 15 mm to 30 mm, and in the opened state, the size is about 120 mm to 160 mm (vertical). Can do.

  More preferably, in the closed state, the size can be (vertical) 70 mm to 80 mm × (horizontal) 100 mm to 150 mm × (thickness) 15 mm to 25 mm, and in the opened state, (vertical) 135 mm to 155 mm.

  Note that the thickness of the lower housing 11 is preferably larger than the thickness of the upper housing 21. Further, the game apparatus 10 may be configured such that the vertical length and the horizontal length in the opened state are substantially the same. Further, it is desirable that the vertical dimension of the lower housing 11 be such that the second joint of the index finger is positioned near the upper corner when the lower corner of the lower housing 11 is supported at the center of the palm. .

  7 shows an A-A ′ cross-sectional view of the lower housing shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 8 shows a B-B ′ cross-sectional view of the upper housing shown in FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 7, on the inner side surface of the lower housing 11 (on the inner surface when the game apparatus 10 is closed), the lower housing 11 is provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the inner side surface. A shaft portion 11A is provided (typically, the shaft portion 11A is structurally integrated with the lower housing). 11 A of shaft parts are provided in the position of both ends regarding the left-right direction (illustration y direction) (refer FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 15, the shaft portion 11 </ b> A may be provided at a position slightly inside from both ends in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, a shaft portion 21 </ b> A provided to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface is provided on the lower surface of the upper housing 21 (the side surface on the x-axis negative side in the drawing) (the shaft portion 21 </ b> A). Is structurally integral with the upper housing). The shaft portion 21A is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the lower side surface, and also project in a direction perpendicular to the inner side surface of the upper housing 21 (the surface that becomes the inner side when the game apparatus 10 is closed). It is done. The shaft portion 21A is provided at the center of the lower end of the upper housing 21 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 1). The shaft portion 11A and the shaft portion 21A are rotatably connected by a hinge provided inside to form an integral protrusion. By being configured as described above, the protrusions protrude from the inner surfaces of the housings 11 and 21 (see FIG. 5).

  Further, since the shaft portion 11A is provided so as to protrude from the inner surface of the lower housing 11, and the shaft portion 21A is provided so as to protrude below the upper housing 21, the two housings 11 and 21 are connected. Then, there is a step between the outer surface of the lower housing 11 (the outer surface when the game apparatus 10 is closed) and the outer surface of the upper housing 21 by the thickness of the lower housing 11. (See FIG. 5).

  As described above, the upper housing 21 is rotatably supported by a part of the upper side of the lower housing 11. Thereby, the game apparatus 10 is in a closed state (a state where the angle between the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 is approximately 0 ° (see FIG. 5)) and an open state (the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 are separated). A state in which the angle formed is about 180 ° (see FIG. 1). Further, in the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, not only the closed state and the open state, but also the angle formed by the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 occurs at the hinge at an arbitrary angle between the closed state and the open state. The opening / closing angle can be maintained by the frictional force that is generated. That is, the upper housing 21 can be made stationary with respect to the lower housing 11 at an arbitrary angle.

  Further, the hinge may have a mechanism for temporarily fixing with a click feeling at a predetermined angle smaller than 180 °. That is, the upper housing 21 and the lower housing 11 may be temporarily fixed with a click feeling at the predetermined angle in a state where the upper housing 21 and the lower housing 11 are opened at a predetermined angle smaller than 180 °. Specifically, the predetermined angle is, for example, an angle in a range of 150 ° to 175 °, and is set to 160 ° in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the housings 11 and 21 can be opened up to 180 °. However, in alternative embodiments, the housings 11 and 21 may be opened only up to the predetermined angle. It may be opened more than °.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 6 (a), and 6 (c), the volume button 14 </ b> K is provided on the left side surface of the lower housing 11. The volume button 14K is used to adjust the volume of a speaker provided in the game apparatus 10. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 6D, the button 14 </ b> J is provided at the right end portion of the upper surface of the lower housing 11. The button 14I is provided at the left end portion of the upper surface of the lower housing 11. The right end of the button 14J preferably extends to the right end of the lower housing 11, but this need not be the case. In the former case, the right side surface of the button 14J and the right side surface of the lower housing 11 are preferably designed to be substantially flush with each other. Moreover, although it is preferable that the back end of the button 14J extends to the back end of the lower housing 11, it may not be so. In the former case, it is preferable to design the back surface of the button 14J and the back surface of the lower housing 11 to be substantially flush with each other. The same applies to the button 14I.

  Specifically, the buttons 14J and 14I have a length in the left-right direction of about 20 mm and a width (a length in the thickness direction, that is, a length in the z direction in the drawing) of about 10 mm. The buttons 14I and 14J are used to perform, for example, a shooting instruction operation (shutter operation) on the game apparatus 10. The widths of the buttons 14J and 14I are preferably 50% or more of the thickness of the lower housing 11.

  Both buttons 14I and 14H may function as shutter buttons. In this case, a right-handed user can use the button 14J, and a left-handed user can use the button 14I, which is convenient for any user.

  Note that the game apparatus 10 may always make each button 14I and 14J effective as a shutter button, or set right-handed or left-handed (by allowing the user to input settings through a menu program or the like) Data is stored), only the button 14J may be valid when the right-handed setting is set, and only the button 14I may be enabled when the left-handed setting is set. Furthermore, in an alternative embodiment, only one button for performing a shooting instruction operation may be provided on the upper surface of the lower housing 11.

  A cover portion that can be opened and closed is provided on the right side surface of the lower housing 11. Inside the cover portion, a connector (not shown) for connecting the memory card 28 is provided.

  As described above, the lower housing 11 is provided with the input device (touch panel 13 and buttons 14 </ b> A to 14 </ b> I) for performing operation input to the game apparatus 10. Therefore, when using the game apparatus 10, the user can hold the lower housing 11 and operate the game apparatus 10.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a state where the user holds the game apparatus 10 with both hands. As shown in FIG. 9, with the LCDs 12 and 22 facing the user, the user can use the palm and middle finger of both hands, the ring finger and the little finger on the side and outer surfaces of the lower housing 11 (on the opposite side of the inner surface). Grip the surface). By gripping in this way, the user can operate the buttons 14 </ b> A to 14 </ b> E with the thumb and grip the buttons 14 </ b> I and 14 </ b> J with the index finger while holding the lower housing 11.

  In the present embodiment, the lower housing 11 is configured to be horizontally long, and the buttons are provided on the left and right sides of the lower LCD 12, so that the image pickup apparatus can be easily held and operated. Further, as described above, since the horizontal dimension of the button arrangement area (dotted line area A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1) is at least 15 mm, the thumb is applied to the lower LCD 12 when the lower housing 11 is gripped. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a state where the user holds the game apparatus 10 with one hand. When inputting to the touch panel 13, as shown in FIG. 10, by releasing one hand holding the lower housing 11 and holding the lower housing 11 with only the other hand, Input to the touch panel 13 can be performed with one hand. Also in this case, the thumb holding the lower housing 11 can be prevented from being applied to the lower LCD 12.

  Alternatively, input to the touch panel 13 can be performed with the thumb of one hand (the right-handed user is the thumb of the right hand) while holding the lower housing 11 with both hands. Also in this case, the thumb of the other hand holding the lower housing 11 (a right-handed user's left thumb) can be prevented from being applied to the touch panel 13.

  As described above, the inner camera 23 is attached to the inner surface of the upper housing 21 (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the outer camera 25 is attached to the surface opposite to the surface to which the inner camera 23 is attached, that is, the outer surface of the upper housing 21 (the surface that becomes the outer side when the game apparatus 10 is closed) (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 6 (b)).

Thus, the inner camera 23 can capture an image in the direction in which the inner surface of the upper housing 21 faces, and the outer camera 25 can be in the opposite direction of the imaging direction of the inner camera 23, that is,
It is possible to image the direction in which the outer surface of the upper housing 21 faces.

  As described above, in the game device 100 according to the present embodiment, the two cameras 23 and 25 are provided so that the respective imaging directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, the user can image two different directions without changing the game apparatus 10. For example, the user can shoot a scene viewed from the game apparatus 10 with the inner camera 23 and shoot a scene viewed from the game apparatus 10 in the direction opposite to the user with the outer camera 25. Can do.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the shooting direction of the outer camera 25 and the direction of the display screen of the upper LCD 22 are opposite directions (directions different by 180 °), and the shooting direction of the inner camera 23 and the direction of the display screen of the upper LCD 22 are Are in the same direction. Therefore, when an image captured by the outer camera 25 is displayed on the upper LCD 22, the viewing direction of the user viewing the display screen of the upper LCD 22 and the photographing direction of the outer camera 25 are substantially the same direction. The shooting direction is easy to understand. Further, when an image photographed by the inner camera 23 is displayed on the upper LCD 22, the viewing direction of the user viewing the display screen of the upper LCD 22 and the photographing direction of the inner camera 23 are almost opposite to each other. The shooting direction is easy to understand.

  The inner camera 23 is attached to the center of a shaft portion 21 </ b> A that is formed at the lower center portion of the upper housing 21. That is, the inner camera 23 is attached to the center of the portion where the two housings 11 and 21 are connected.

  Accordingly, when the game apparatus 10 is opened, the inner camera 23 is disposed between the two LCDs 12 and 22 (see FIG. 1). In other words, the inner camera 23 is arranged near the center of the game apparatus 10. Here, “the center of the game device 10” means the center of the operation surface of the game device 10 (the surface formed by the inner surfaces of the housings 11 and 21 in the open state).

  Alternatively, it can be said that the inner camera 23 is disposed near the center in the horizontal direction of the LCDs 12 and 22.

  In the present embodiment, the shaft portion 21A is integrated with the upper housing 21, and the inner camera 23 is fixedly disposed inside the shaft portion 21A. The shooting direction of 23 is changed. This makes it possible to change the shooting direction without providing an additional mechanism for changing the shooting direction of the camera. Further, since the inner camera 23 is disposed on the inner surface of the second housing (the same side as the inner surface of the second housing in the shaft portion 21A), the inner camera 23 is moved to the lower side by the closing operation of the upper housing 21. The orientation is opposite to the housing 11. Therefore, the inner camera 23 can be automatically protected by closing the game apparatus 10.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inner camera 23 is provided on the shaft portion 21 </ b> A so as to be disposed near the center of the operation surface of the game apparatus 10. However, in an alternative embodiment, the inner camera 23 may be provided at a position other than the shaft portion of the lower housing 11 or the upper housing 21. For example, the inner camera 23 may be provided between the shaft portion 21 </ b> A and the upper LCD 22 on the inner surface of the upper housing 21. Note that if the inner camera 23 is provided approximately in the center in the left-right direction of the operation surface of the game apparatus 10, the user can easily adjust the position of the game apparatus 10 at least in the left-right direction, for example, in a situation where the user is photographed. Can do.

  Here, for example, consider a case where the inner camera 23 is disposed at the end of the operation surface of the game apparatus 10 (for example, the upper end of the inner surface of the upper housing 21). When operating a portable device such as the game apparatus 10, the user usually holds the game apparatus 10 at a position facing the game apparatus 10 so that the screen is easy to see.

  However, when the inner camera 23 is disposed at the end of the game apparatus 10, the imaging range of the inner camera 23 is determined with the game apparatus 10 held at a normal holding position (a position where the user faces the game apparatus 10). Users will not fit well. For example, when the inner camera 23 is disposed at the upper end of the operation surface, if the game apparatus 10 is held at the normal gripping position, the imaging range is slightly above the user, and the user's face does not fit well within the imaging range. .

  Therefore, when the inner camera 23 is disposed at the end of the operation surface of the game apparatus 10, the game apparatus 10 must be moved from the normal gripping position so that the user can be well within the imaging range.

  However, when shooting a scene viewed from the game device 10 by the user, the direction of the user's line of sight and the imaging direction of the camera are reversed, and the game device is at a position different from the position that is normally held. 10 has to be held, it is difficult for the user to arrange the game apparatus 10 so that the user is well within the imaging range.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game apparatus 10 is opened, the inner camera 23 is disposed near the center of the game apparatus 10, so that the user photographs the user himself / herself with the inner camera 23. The user only needs to hold the game apparatus 10 at a position facing the game apparatus 10. That is, if the imaging apparatus is gripped at the normal gripping position, the user is positioned near the center of the imaging range, and the user can easily be within the imaging range. As described above, by disposing the inner camera 23 at a position near the center of the game apparatus 10 when viewed from the user, it becomes easy for the user to photograph the user himself / herself so as to be well within the imaging range.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the outer camera 25 is located on the upper side of the upper housing 21 (away from the lower housing 11 (more than the center of the upper housing 21)) when the game apparatus 10 is opened. Part). This is because the user grips the lower housing 11 when using the game apparatus 10, so if the outer camera 25 is arranged on the side close to the lower housing 11, the user's hand enters the imaging range of the outer camera 25. This is because there is a risk of it.

  In the present embodiment, the outer camera 25 is provided at a position where the center is about 20 mm from the right end of the upper housing 21 and about 20 mm from the upper end of the upper housing 21 when the game apparatus 10 is opened. It should be noted that the outer camera 25 does not take a picture of the user who holds the game apparatus 10, so that it is less necessary to provide the camera in the center of the game apparatus 10. Further, since the user basically holds the lower housing 11, the lower housing 11 is easier to hold when the thickness is appropriate, whereas the lower housing 11 is more portable when the thickness is smaller when folded. 21 is preferably as thin as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper LCD 22 is arranged in the center of the upper housing 21 in consideration of visibility, and the outer camera 25 avoids the arrangement position of the upper LCD 22 (that is, the non-screen area shown in FIG. 1). It was decided to be placed on top of the upper housing 21 (in the area on the back side of B2).

Thereby, since arrangement | positioning of the upper LCD 22 and the outer camera 25 does not overlap, the upper housing 21 can be reduced in thickness. In addition, since the user basically holds the lower housing 11, the lower housing 1 is provided by providing the outer camera 25 on the upper housing 21 side.
1 can be prevented from entering the imaging range of the outer camera 25.

  Further, the inner side surface of the upper housing 21 is formed in a substantially flat shape. As shown in FIG. 1, an opening 21B for exposing the upper LCD 22 is formed in the center of the inner side surface. The screen of the upper LCD 22 housed in the upper housing 21 is exposed from the opening 21B. Further, one sound release hole 21D is formed on each of the left and right sides of the opening 21B. A speaker (not shown) is housed in the upper housing 21 behind the sound release hole 21D as sound output means. The sound release hole 21D is a hole for emitting sound from the speaker to the outside. These sound release holes 21 </ b> D are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper LCD 22.

  Thus, on the inner side surface of the upper housing 21, non-screen areas (dotted line areas B1 and B2 shown in FIG. 1; specifically, speakers are arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 21B for the upper LCD 22 provided in the center. Area for carrying out; a speaker arrangement area).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the length (width) of the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 in the left-right direction (the y direction in the drawing) is the same. Furthermore, the width of the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 in the left-right direction is the same, and is disposed at the same position in the left-right direction. For this reason, the speaker arrangement area is provided so that the position in the left-right direction coincides with the button arrangement area. Similar to the button arrangement area, the speaker arrangement area is designed so that the lateral dimension is at least 15 mm or more (preferably 20 mm or more, more preferably about 30 mm to 40 mm, in this embodiment, 32 mm).

  In the present embodiment, the two sound release holes 21D are arranged in the vicinity of the central portion in the left-right direction of each speaker arrangement region in the left-right direction. Moreover, about the up-down direction, it arrange | positions in the lower area | region (area | region near the lower housing 11) of each speaker arrangement | positioning area | region. As shown in FIG. 15, the speaker and the sound release hole 21 </ b> D may be arranged slightly above FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality (six in FIG. 15) of sound release holes 21D may be provided for one speaker.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 are each provided with the non-screen region at the same position in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the game apparatus 10 is not only held horizontally as shown in FIG. 9, but also held vertically (the game apparatus 10 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise or clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9). It is easy to hold even when gripped by the

  FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are diagrams showing a state where the user holds the game apparatus 10 while holding it vertically. 11 shows a state where the game apparatus 10 is held with the left hand, and FIG. 12 shows a state where the game apparatus 10 is held with the right hand. Note that the right-handed user may rotate the game apparatus 10 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9 and hold the game apparatus 10 with his left hand as shown in FIG. In addition, the left-handed user may rotate the game apparatus 10 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9 and hold the game apparatus 10 on the right as shown in FIG. In any case, the user can hold the game apparatus 10 by bringing the thumb into contact with the protrusions (the shaft portions 11A and 21A) and bringing the index finger into contact with the upper side surface of the lower housing 11. .

  As described above, there is a step between the outer surface of the lower housing 11 and the outer surface of the upper housing 21 (see FIG. 5), so that the game can be performed by bringing an index finger into contact with the step. The apparatus 10 can be gripped stably. Further, the shutter button (button 14I or 14J) can be easily pressed with a dominant hand that does not hold the game apparatus 10.

  As described above, since the non-screen areas are provided on both sides of the LCDs 12 and 22, a thumb may be put on the screen even when the game apparatus 10 is held vertically with any hand. Absent. That is, the game apparatus 10 is easy to hold even when held vertically, and the visibility of the screen and the operability of the touch panel are ensured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the protruding portion protrudes from the key top of each button 14 </ b> A to 14 </ b> E (direction input button 14 </ b> A in FIG. 7) with respect to the lower housing 11. As a result, even if the thumb holding the game apparatus 10 in a vertical position covers the button, the user is unlikely to accidentally press the button, and erroneous input can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the vertical dimension of the game apparatus 10 in the open state is 100 mm to 200 mm, even when the game apparatus 10 is held vertically, the game apparatus 10 has a sufficient width as the width of the game apparatus 10 when held horizontally and is difficult to hold. There is nothing.

  In the case of vertical holding, the opening / closing angle of the housing may be the predetermined angle smaller than 180 °. By setting the opening / closing angle of the housing to be slightly smaller than 180 °, the outer surfaces of the housings 11 and 21 are fitted to the shape of the hand, and the game apparatus 10 is more easily held.

  Further, as described above, in the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, the cameras 23 and 25 are provided in the upper housing 21. The live image captured by the camera 23 or 25 can be displayed on the lower LCD 12 provided in the lower housing 11. According to this configuration, even when the game apparatus 10 is gripped and used, or when the game apparatus 10 is placed on a desk or the like, an editing operation is performed on the live image while appropriately changing the shooting direction. It becomes very easy.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the game apparatus 10 is gripped and used. When the game apparatus 10 is gripped and used, the user grips the lower housing 11 with one hand (left hand in FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. Since the live image is displayed on the lower LCD 12, the user performs an editing operation on the live image using the touch pen 27 with the other hand. At this time, since the angle of the lower housing 11 and the angle of the upper housing 21 can be changed separately, the user touches the lower housing 11 with the touch panel while directing the camera 23 or 25 of the upper housing 21 toward the imaging target. The game apparatus 10 can be gripped at an angle at which the above operation can be easily performed.

  In addition, since the user holds the lower housing 11 with one hand, the user can stably perform editing operations using the touch panel 13. As described above, when the game apparatus 10 is gripped and used, an editing operation for a live image is very easy to perform.

  Further, the game apparatus 10 is suitable not only for taking a picture while being held by a user but also for taking a picture while being placed on a stand or the like.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the game apparatus 10 is placed and used. As shown in FIG. 14, even when the game apparatus 10 is held on a desk or the like and used, a live image is displayed on the lower LCD 12, so that the user can easily operate the touch panel 13.

In addition, the user places the lower housing 11 on the placement surface, and adjusts the opening / closing angles of the two housings 11 and 21 so that the upper housing 21 has a desired angle with respect to the lower housing 11. It is also possible. Thereby, even when the user places the game apparatus 10, the upper housing 21 (camera shooting direction) can be shot at an arbitrary angle. In this way, even when the game apparatus 10 is placed and used, editing operations on live images are very easy to perform.

  In addition, since the game apparatus 10 includes two cameras 23 and 25, by switching the camera that performs shooting between the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25, the game apparatus 10 placed on the table is not moved. Different directions can be taken. In either case of shooting with any camera, the shooting direction can be changed by adjusting the opening and closing angles of the two housings 11 and 21. In addition, the game apparatus 10 may have a self-timer function in which shooting is performed after a predetermined time from pressing the shutter button. When shooting using the self-timer function, since the user does not hold the game apparatus 10, it is particularly convenient to adjust the shooting direction of the camera in any direction as in this embodiment.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the two cameras 23 and 25 that capture images in different directions are both provided in the upper housing 21. Therefore, even when the game apparatus 10 is placed and shooting is performed, both the two cameras 23 and 25 can be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the lower housing 11 is configured horizontally, a sense of stability when the game apparatus 10 is placed is increased, and the game apparatus 10 can be prevented from falling down.

  In addition, the game apparatus 10 can switch the LCD that displays a real-time image (live image) captured by the camera 23 or 25 between the upper LCD 22 and the lower LCD 12 according to a user switching instruction, for example. May be. At this time, for example, when the game apparatus 10 is used in a state of being placed on a table, switching may be performed so that a real-time image is displayed on the lower LCD 12. When the game apparatus 10 is used in a state where it is placed on a table, it is necessary to change the angle of the upper housing 21 in order to adjust the shooting direction of the camera. This is because it is easier for the user to see the image when the real-time image is displayed on the side LCD 12.

  In an alternative embodiment, the captured image may be displayed on the upper LCD 22. Since the lower housing 11 is provided with an input device (touch panel 13 and buttons 14A to 14I) for performing an operation input to the game device 10, when using the game device 10, the user can enter the upper LCD 22 While viewing the displayed captured image (image captured by the camera), the input to the input device can be performed by holding the lower housing 11.

  According to the above configuration, since the game apparatus 10 includes both buttons and a touch panel as input devices, the game apparatus 10 determines the input device to be used for the input operation as the type (characteristics) of the input operation. ) Can be determined by selecting the appropriate one. For example, for the shutter operation, for example, it is preferable that the user actually feels that the operation has been performed, and it is preferable that the operation has a certain stroke, so that the shutter operation is performed using a button. Also good. Moreover, it is preferable to perform operation using the touch panel about operation in the edit process mentioned later.

  In the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 is configured to be foldable when the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 12 are rotatably connected (coupled). Here, in alternative embodiments, the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 12 may be coupled by other configurations and schemes.

  For example, it may be configured such that two flat housings are connected so that one housing can slide or rotate with respect to the other in a parallel state. This also allows the two housings to be in both the open state and the closed state, as in the above embodiment.

Moreover, in the said embodiment, you may comprise the upper housing 21 so that shaft part 21A and other parts can rotate centering | focusing on an up-down direction. According to this, only by providing one camera in the upper housing 21, the camera can be easily directed in the direction of the user's line of sight or in the opposite direction.
The imaging device 110 illustrated in FIGS. 15 to 17 is obtained by changing the arrangement, number, shape, or the like of some components of the game device 10 according to the present embodiment. The same.

[5. Internal configuration of game device]
Next, the internal configuration of the game apparatus 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, the game apparatus 10 includes a CPU 31, a main memory 32, a memory control circuit 33, a storage data memory 34, a preset data memory 35, and a memory card interface (memory card I / F). 36 and 37, a wireless communication module 38, a local communication module 39, a real-time clock (RTC) 40, a power supply circuit 41, an interface circuit (I / F circuit) 42, a folding position detection sensor 50, and the like. Equipped with electronic components. These electronic components are mounted on an electronic circuit board and housed in the lower housing 11 (or the upper housing 21).

  Various electronic circuits and batteries mounted on the game apparatus 10 may be housed in either the upper housing 21 or the lower housing 11, but the weight of the lower housing 11 is heavier than the weight of the upper housing 21. It is preferable to be designed. Specifically, the lower housing 11 is preferably 100 to 200 g, and the upper housing 21 is preferably 50 to 100 g. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the lower housing 11 is 130 to 150 g, and the upper housing 21 is 70 to 90 g.

  In this embodiment, the lower housing 11 is about 150 g, and the upper housing is about 75 g. The ratio of the weight of the lower housing 11 to the weight of the upper housing 21 is (weight of the lower housing 11) :( weight of the upper housing 21) = 1.5: 1 to 3: 1 (more preferably, 2: 1) is preferred. For example, a battery, a circuit board on which a CPU is mounted, a card connector, and the like are preferably housed in the lower housing 11.

  Further, it is preferable that the upper housing 21 accommodates minimum parts such as an LCD unit (upper LCD 22 and the like), an imaging unit (each camera 23 and 25 and the like), a speaker unit, and the like.

  By designing the lower housing 11 so that the weight of the lower housing 11 is heavier than that of the upper housing 21, the game apparatus 10 is less likely to fall when placed on a table or the like. Also, by making the lower housing 11 gripped by the user heavier than the upper housing 21, a sense of stability when the game apparatus 10 is gripped is increased, and camera shake during shooting can be prevented.

The CPU 31 is information processing means for executing various programs (including a startup program and a selected application program described later). In the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, various programs are recorded in a built-in memory (for example, the storage data memory 34) and the memory cards 28 and / or 29, and the CPU 31 reads and executes a necessary program. Thus, various processes to be described later are executed. Note that the program executed by the CPU 31 may be recorded in advance in a memory in the game apparatus 10, may be acquired from the memory card 28 and / or 29, or may be acquired by communication with other devices. It may be acquired from the device.

  Furthermore, the program according to the present invention may be supplied not only to the computer including the game apparatus 10 through an external storage medium such as the memory card 29 but also to the computer through a wired or wireless communication line. Alternatively, the program according to the present invention may be stored in advance in a nonvolatile storage device inside the computer. As a computer-readable storage medium for storing such a program, a CD-ROM, a DVD, or an optical disk medium similar to them may be used in addition to the nonvolatile storage device described above.

  A main memory 32, a memory control circuit 33, and a preset data memory 35 are connected to the CPU 31. A storage data memory 34 is connected to the memory control circuit 33.

  The main memory 32 is a storage means used as a work area or buffer area for the CPU 31. That is, the main memory 32 stores programs read from the outside (memory card 28, other devices, etc.), holds a work memory necessary for executing various processes in a nonvolatile manner, and is necessary for various information processing. Store various data. In the present embodiment, for example, a PSRAM (Pseudo-SRAM) is used as the main memory 32.

  The storage data memory 34 is a non-volatile storage means for storing a program executed by the CPU 31, data of an image taken by the camera 23 or 25, and the like. The storage data memory 34 is composed of, for example, a NAND flash memory.

  The memory control circuit 33 is a circuit that controls reading and writing of data with respect to the storage data memory 34 in accordance with instructions from the CPU 31. The preset data memory 35 is a storage means for storing data (preset data) such as various parameters set in advance in the game apparatus 10. As the preset data memory 35, a flash memory connected to the CPU 31 via an SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) bus can be used.

  Note that an image obtained by imaging by the camera 23 or 25 can be selectively stored in the storage data memory 34, the memory card 28, the memory card 29, or the like.

  The memory card I / F 36 is connected to the CPU 31. The memory card I / F 36 reads and writes data to and from the memory card 28 attached to the connector according to instructions from the CPU 31. In the present embodiment, image data captured by the cameras 23 and 25 is written to the memory card 28, or image data stored in the memory card 28 is read from the memory card 28 and stored in the storage data memory 34. Or Further, in the present embodiment, a music file that is music data stored in the memory card 28 is read from the memory card 28 and stored in the main memory 32 or the storage data memory 34.

The cartridge I / F 37 is connected to the CPU 31. The cartridge I / F 37 reads and writes data from and to the memory card 29 attached to the connector according to instructions from the CPU 31. In the present embodiment, an application program that can be executed by the game apparatus 10 is read from the memory card 29 and executed by the CPU 31, or data (for example, an application) related to the application program (including a selected application program described later). When the program is a game program, game save data or the like is written into the memory card 29.

  The wireless communication module 38 is, for example, IEEE 802.11. It has a function of connecting to a wireless LAN by a method compliant with the b / g standard. The local communication module 39 has a function of performing wireless communication with the same type of game apparatus 10 (or a computer or the like) by a predetermined communication method. The wireless communication module 38 and the local communication module 39 are connected to the CPU 31. The CPU 31 transmits / receives data (data of captured images, application programs, etc.) to / from other devices via the Internet using the wireless communication module 38, or other imaging devices of the same type using the local communication module 39. Data can be sent to and received from the.

  Further, the RTC 40 and the power supply circuit 41 are connected to the CPU 31. The RTC 40 counts the time and outputs it to the CPU 31. The CPU 31 calculates the current time (date) based on the time counted by the RTC 40. The power supply circuit 41 controls power from a power source (battery; housed in the lower housing 11) of the game apparatus 10 and supplies power to each component of the game apparatus 10.

  Further, a folding position detection sensor 50 is connected to the CPU 31. The folding position detection sensor 50 detects the angle formed by the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 and outputs a determination signal indicating whether the closed state or the open state to the CPU 31 based on the detection result. Specifically, if the angle formed by the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 is less than a predetermined threshold value, it is determined as a closed state and a determination signal indicating the closed state is output. On the other hand, if the angle formed by the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the open state is determined and a determination signal indicating the open state is output. The CPU 31 receives a determination signal indicating the closed state output from the folding position detection sensor 50. For example, when the game apparatus 1 is operating, that is, when music data reproduction processing is being performed, the CPU 31 performs predetermined processing. In response to detection of the connection with the external output device, the operation of the reproduction process is stopped, and a so-called sleep state is set in which the data of the operation state is stored. For example, display processing other than the reproduction processing is stopped and set to a sleep state regardless of detection of connection with a predetermined external output device. On the other hand, the CPU 31 receives a determination signal indicating an open state output from the folding position detection sensor 50 after the game apparatus 1 enters the sleep state, and then enters the sleep state based on the stored operation state data. Execute the process to return to the original state. With this processing, the function set in the sleep state can be directly set in the active state and operated.

  In the present embodiment, the folding position detection sensor 50 detects the angle between the lower housing 11 and the upper housing 21 and outputs a determination signal. However, the folding position detection sensor 50 detects the open / closed state by magnetic force. It is also possible. For example, the magnetic force generated from a speaker provided in the upper housing can be measured by a sensor for measuring the magnetic force provided in the lower housing, and the open / closed state can be detected by the strength of the magnetic force. Moreover, it is also possible to employ | adopt the system which detects an open / close state optically or electrically as a folding position detection sensor.

Furthermore, the game apparatus 10 includes a microphone 43 and amplifiers 44 and 46. The microphone 43 and the amplifiers 44 and 46 are connected to the I / F circuit 42, respectively. The microphone 43 detects the voice of the user uttered toward the game apparatus 10 and outputs a voice signal indicating the voice to the I / F circuit 42. The amplifier 44 amplifies the audio signal from the I / F circuit 42 and outputs it from the right speaker 45. The amplifier 46 amplifies the audio signal from the I / F circuit 42 and outputs it from the left speaker 47. The I / F circuit 42 is connected to the CPU 31. The game apparatus 10 also includes a headphone amplifier 48 and a jack 49. The headphone amplifier 48 and the jack 49 are connected to the I / F circuit 42, respectively. The headphone amplifier 48 amplifies the audio signal from the I / F circuit 42 and outputs it from the headphones via a plug of headphones (not shown) connected to the jack 49. For example, the I / F circuit 42 detects that a mechanical switch is turned on when a headphone plug is inserted into the jack 49, and detects that a headphone plug is inserted into the jack. Alternatively, it is detected that the headphone plug is inserted into the jack by detecting that the headphone plug is electrically connected to the jack 49 when the headphone plug is inserted.

  The I / F circuit 42 controls the output of the audio signal to the audio input control circuit 42 b that receives the input of the audio signal from the microphone 43, and the amplifiers 44 and 46 (the right speaker 45 and the left speaker 47) or the headphone amplifier 48. The audio output control circuit 42c to be performed, the touch panel control circuit 42a to control the touch panel 13, and the amplifiers 44 and 46 (the right speaker 45 and the left speaker 47) or the headphone amplifier 48 (headphone) by the audio output control circuit 42c. An output level detection circuit 42d for detecting the output level of the audio signal to be output and a headphone detection circuit 42e for detecting the wearing of the headphones are included.

  The audio input control circuit 42b detects the input level of the audio signal from the microphone 43, and performs A / D conversion on the audio signal or converts the audio signal into audio data of a predetermined format.

  The headphone detection circuit 42e is turned on when a headphone plug is inserted into the jack 49, or becomes electrically conductive when a headphone plug is inserted into the jack 49. This is detected, and it is detected that the headphone plug is inserted into the jack. Then, the detection result is output to the CPU 31, and the CPU 31 receives the signal indicating the detection result from the headphone detection circuit 42e and determines that the headphones are attached. Note that it is only necessary to detect the insertion of the plug of the headphones, and the detection method is not limited.

  When the headphone plug is inserted into the jack and the headphone detection circuit 42e detects the attachment of the headphone, the audio output control circuit 42c outputs an audio signal from the amplifiers 44 and 46 to the headphone amplifier 48 in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 31. While switching the output, the audio signal output to the headphone amplifier 48 is adjusted according to the stereo setting or monaural setting of the output signal. In the present embodiment, only one headphone amplifier 48 is shown in FIG. 18 in this embodiment, but since it is possible to listen to stereo settings with headphones for both ears, it corresponds to each ear. It is assumed that a headphone amplifier is provided.

  The touch panel 13 is connected to the I / F circuit 42. The touch panel control circuit 42 a generates touch position data in a predetermined format based on a signal from the touch panel 13 and outputs it to the CPU 31. The touch position data indicates the coordinates of the position where the input is performed on the input surface of the touch panel 13. The touch panel control circuit reads signals from the touch panel 13 and generates touch position data at a rate of once per predetermined time. The CPU 31 can know the position where the input has been performed on the touch panel 13 by acquiring the touch position data.

The operation button group 14 includes the operation buttons 14A to 14K and is connected to the CPU 31. From the operation button group 14 to the CPU 31, operation data indicating an input status (whether or not the button is pressed) for each of the operation buttons 14 </ b> A to 14 </ b> K is output. The CPU 31 executes the process according to the input to the operation button group 14 by acquiring operation data from the operation button group 14.

  The inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25 are each connected to the CPU 31. The inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25 capture an image in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 31 and output the captured image data to the CPU 31. For example, the CPU 31 issues an imaging instruction to one of the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25, and the camera that has received the imaging instruction captures an image and sends the image data to the CPU 31.

  Further, the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 are each connected to the CPU 31. The lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 display images according to instructions from the CPU 31, respectively. As an example, the CPU 31 displays an image acquired from either the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25 on one of the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22, and displays an operation explanation screen generated by a predetermined process on the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22. Is displayed on the other side.

  Although not shown, the game apparatus 10 may have a vibration function that vibrates itself. The vibration function is used for the purpose of, for example, notifying the user of some kind (for example, notifying the user of an operation error or a memory capacity over). In the present embodiment, since the user is assumed to use the lower housing 11, a device that realizes a vibration function (for example, a vibrator such as a vibration motor or a solenoid) is housed in the lower housing 11. Is preferred. Thereby, the vibration can be transmitted to the user's hand holding the game apparatus 10 (lower housing 11).

[6. Launcher processing and shooting functions]
<Overview>
The game apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of application programs as will be described later. The game device 100 has a launcher function so that the user can easily select such a plurality of application programs. In particular, the game apparatus 100 can provide a relatively simple shooting function on a screen that provides the launcher function.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 19, a process for supporting the selective activation of the application by the user will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining a method of starting each application program in the game apparatus 10. The game apparatus 10 selectively activates an application program desired by the user from among a plurality of application programs 53 to 57. Note that the application programs 53 to 57 that are selectively activated in the game apparatus 10 are also referred to as selected application programs.

  The plurality of selected application programs include a photographing application program 53. The shooting application program 53 is an application program for shooting with the camera 23 or 25. The photographing application program 53 is typically stored in advance (preinstalled) in the game apparatus 10.

In addition to the photographing application program 53, the plurality of selected application programs include application programs having various functions. 19, for example, a setting application program 54 for performing various settings of the game apparatus 10, a communication application program 55 for allowing the game apparatus 10 to communicate with an external device, and a game application program 56 for performing a predetermined game. , And a sound application program 57 for performing music reproduction, voice recording, and the like. In this embodiment, the photographing application program 53 and the communication application program 55 are configured as an integrated program.

  In addition to the five selected application programs 53 to 57 shown in FIG. 19, various selected application programs may be stored.

  Part or all of the selected application program may not be preinstalled in the game apparatus 10. When the selected application program is executed, the selected application program may be downloaded from another device via a network such as the Internet, or may be downloaded from the removable storage medium such as the memory card 28 or the memory card 29. It may be read into internal memory.

  In the present embodiment, the process of selectively starting these selected application programs 53 to 57 is executed by the start function program 51. The activation function program 51 is a program for selecting a selected application program to be activated from a plurality of selected application programs 53 to 57. That is, the activation function program 51 is a program called a so-called launcher. The activation function program 51 is one of the programs included in the activation program according to the present embodiment (the activation program 61 shown in FIG. 20).

  The selected application programs 53 to 57 are targets of a selection operation that can be performed by the user by executing the activation function program 51, and are executed by being selected by the selection operation.

  Note that the detailed contents of the processing of the photographing application program 53, the communication application program 55, and the sound application program 57 executed by the activation function program 51 in response to the user's selection operation will be described later.

<Control structure>
The game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment has, as control structures, (a) first activation operation accepting means, (b) first activation means, (c) photographing processing means, (d) photographable operation accepting means, (e) A photographing operation receiving means, (f) a second starting operation receiving means, and (g) a second starting means. In the present embodiment, these means are realized by causing a program (startup program 61) executed by the computer (CPU 31) of the game apparatus 10 to function as the means.

(A) First activation operation accepting means The first activation operation accepting means accepts a first activation operation for selectively activating the plurality of application programs (steps SA6 and SA11 described later). Thereby, the user can select and start a selected application program to be started (executed). Since the first activation operation is an operation for selectively activating the selected application program, the first activation operation is also referred to as “selective activation operation” below. The state in which the first activation operation is accepted (the first activation operation is possible) is also referred to as “activation acceptance state” (FIG. 19).

(B) First starting means When the first starting operation is performed, the first starting means starts the application program selected by the first starting operation among the plurality of application programs (step SA12 described later). ). That is, for example, when the photographing application program 53 is selected by the first activation operation, the photographing application program 53 is activated.

  In the present embodiment, the activation acceptance state corresponds to a state in which a so-called menu screen is displayed, and is activated first after the game apparatus 10 is activated (except when it is activated for the first time) (the power is turned on). It will be in the acceptance state. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a menu screen (FIG. 23) displaying icons representing the selected application programs 53 to 57 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 in the activation acceptance state. The user can activate the selected application program by performing an operation on the touch panel 13 to touch the position of the icon as the first activation operation.

(C) Imaging processing means The imaging processing means executes imaging processing (step SA10 described later). The imaging process is a process of saving an image captured by the camera 23 or 25 in a storage unit of the information processing apparatus in accordance with a predetermined imaging operation. In the present embodiment, the photographing operation is an operation of pressing a predetermined button (more specifically, the L button 14I or the R button 14J). The photographing processing means is means realized by the activation program 61 according to the present invention being executed by the CPU 31 of the game apparatus 10 and is different from the means realized by the photographing application program 53. Note that the photographing processing unit only needs to have at least a function of performing a photographing process (a function of saving an image captured by the camera 23 or 25 in the storage unit of the game apparatus 10), but other functions related to photographing (for example, , A function for displaying or editing a stored image).

  In the present embodiment, the activation program 61 according to the present invention includes the photographing function program 52 shown in FIG. The photographing processing means is realized by the photographing function program 52 being executed by the CPU 31 of the game apparatus 10. That is, the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment stores two types of programs for performing shooting processing, that is, the shooting function program 52 and the shooting application program 53.

  In this embodiment, the startup program 61 includes two types of programs, that is, a startup function program 51 and a shooting function program 52. However, the startup function program 51 and the shooting function program 52 are integrated programs. Also good. The startup program 61 (the startup function program 51 and the shooting function program 52) is preinstalled in the game apparatus 10.

  Here, it is assumed that the function by the photographing processing means is different from the function that is made possible by executing the photographing application program 53. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the photographing processing means has only a part of the functions of the photographing application program 53. In an alternative embodiment, the photographing processing unit may have a function that the photographing application program 53 does not have.

(D) Photographable operation accepting means The photographable operation accepting means accepts a photographable operation for setting the photographable state (the state of the game apparatus 10) in the activation acceptance state (steps SA6 and SA9 described later). The shootable state is a state in which a shooting process by the shooting processing unit according to the shooting operation is possible (a state in which a shooting enabled operation is accepted). That is, in the activation acceptance state, the user can activate the selected application programs 53 to 57 by the first activation operation, and can activate the photographing function by the photographing processing means by the photographing enable operation (FIG. 19). ). In the present embodiment, the photographing enabled operation is an operation of pressing a predetermined button (more specifically, the L button 14I or the R button 14J).

  In the present embodiment, the photographing enabled operation is an operation having a different operation method from the first activation operation. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first activation operation is an input operation on the touch panel 13, while the photographing enabled operation is a predetermined button (more specifically, the L button 14I or the R button 14J). Is an operation of pressing. Here, “the operation method is different” means not only that the input device to be operated is different but also the meaning that the operation performed on the same input device is different. In an alternative embodiment, the first activation operation and the shootable operation may be an operation of touching different positions on the touch panel 13 or an operation of inputting different trajectories to the touch panel 13. Alternatively, an operation of pressing a different button may be used. It should be noted that the shootable operation is simple, such as an operation of simply pressing a predetermined button, so that the shooting function (starting of the shooting function program 52) can be easily and quickly performed by the shooting processing means. It is preferable that the operation is simple.

(E) Shooting Operation Accepting Unit The shooting operation receiving unit receives a shooting operation when the above-described shooting-capable operation is performed (steps SA24 and SA25 described later). That is, when an operation capable of shooting is performed, the state of the game apparatus 10 becomes a shooting enabled state (FIG. 19). In this manner, the user can take a picture (perform the game apparatus 10 to perform a shooting process) by performing a shooting operation after performing a shooting enabled operation.

  In the present embodiment, the activation acceptance state and the photographing enabled state are in an exclusive relationship, and the game apparatus 10 alternatively takes one of the activation acceptance state and the photographing enabled state. To do. That is, in the activation accepting state, the photographing operation (in the photographing enabled state) is not accepted, and in the photographing capable state, the first activation operation (in the activation accepting state) is not accepted. However, in an alternative embodiment, the activation acceptance state and the photographing enabled state do not have to be exclusive, and the game apparatus 10 is in the activation acceptance state and is in the photographing enabled state. It may be possible to take For example, the game apparatus 10 may accept the first activation operation in the photographing enabled state.

(F) Second activation operation accepting means The second activation operation accepting means accepts a second activation operation for activating the imaging application program 53 in the above-described imaging enabled state (steps SA24 and SA29 described later). Therefore, in the photographing enabled state, the user can perform the second activation operation in addition to the photographing operation. Note that the second activation operation is an operation for directly activating the imaging application program 53 from the imaging enabled state without returning to the activation accepting state, and therefore the second activation operation is also referred to as a “shortcut activation operation” below.

  In the present embodiment, an image captured by the camera 23 or 24 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 and a button image for performing the second activation operation (button image 78 shown in FIG. 24) in the photographing enabled state. Is displayed on the lower LCD 12 (FIG. 24). The user can perform the second activation operation by touching the button image. The second activation operation is preferably a simple operation so that the imaging application program 53 can be activated easily and quickly.

(G) Second activation means The second activation means activates the photographing application program 53 when the second activation operation is performed (step SA30 described later). In this way, the user can start the shooting application program 53 both in the start accepting state and in the shooting enabled state. The imaging application program 53 is activated (executed) both by the first activation operation in the activation acceptance state and by the second activation operation in the imaging enabled state.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the activation accepting state, the user can activate the selected application programs 53 to 57 by the selective activation operation (first activation operation), and can also perform the imaging by the photographing enable operation. The photographing function by the processing means can be executed. Furthermore, in a state where photographing is possible with the photographing function, the photographing application program 53 can be activated by a shortcut activation operation (second activation operation). Therefore, the user can start the shooting application program 53 easily and quickly by a shortcut start operation even during shooting by the shooting processing means. That is, according to the present embodiment, even when the user wants to use a function (of the shooting application program 53) that is not provided in the shooting processing unit during shooting by the shooting processing unit, the user can activate the shortcut. The function can be used easily and quickly by operation.

<Data structure>
Next, data used for processing in the game apparatus 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing main data stored in the main memory 32 of the game apparatus 10. As shown in FIG. 20, the main memory 32 is provided with a program storage area 60 and a data storage area 64.

  In the program storage area 60, various programs (application programs) executed by the CPU 31 are stored. Specifically, a startup program 61, a photographing application program 53, and other selected application programs 62 are stored. These programs are read from the storage data memory 34, the memory card 28, or the memory card 29 and stored in the main memory 32 at an appropriate timing after the game device 10 is started (for example, when the program is started). Is done.

  The startup program 61 is a program for performing main processing in the game apparatus 10. The activation program 61 is read into the main memory and executed after the game apparatus 10 is activated. The startup program 61 includes the startup function program 51 and the shooting function program 52.

  As described above, the activation function program 51 is a program for selecting a selected application program to be activated.

The shooting function program 52 is a program that is not a selected application program and that performs shooting processing. In the present embodiment, the shooting function program 52 has only a part of the functions of the shooting application program 53. That is, in the present embodiment, the shooting function program 52 is a shooting process program with a relatively simple function, and the shooting application program 53 is a relatively multi-functional shooting process program. The data size of the shooting function program 52 is smaller than the data size of the shooting application program 53. Since the programs 52 and 53 have a common function, a part of the data may be stored in common. Hereinafter, the shooting function program 52 that is a relatively simple function is also referred to as a “simple shooting program 52”, and the relatively multifunctional shooting application program 53 is also referred to as a “multifunctional shooting application program 53”.

  In the present specification, “(relatively) simple function” includes both of (relatively) few functions and (relatively) low function. In other words, “(relatively) multi-functional” includes (relatively) many functions as well as (relatively) high functions. That is, while the simple shooting program 52 has a relatively low function (for example, shooting with a low number of pixels, and few types of stamps that can be used when editing a captured image). The multi-function shooting application program 53 may have a relatively high function (for example, shooting with a high number of pixels, or many types of stamps that can be used when editing a captured image). .

  In contrast, the simple shooting program 52 has a relatively small function (for example, adjustment of exposure and white balance is impossible, and a predetermined editing operation cannot be performed on a captured image). 53 may be relatively multifunctional (for example, exposure and white balance can be adjusted, and a predetermined editing operation can be performed on a captured image).

  The other selected application programs 62 are selected application programs other than the multi-function photographing application program 53, and the setting application program 54, the communication application program 55, the game application program 56, and the music playback and sound described above. A sound application program 57 for recording is included.

  The selected application program (including the multi-function shooting application program 53) is stored in the storage data memory 34 or the memory card 28, and is read into the main memory 32 when the program is activated. Note that the selected application program may be stored in the storage data memory 34 by being acquired (downloaded) by communication from an external device.

  On the other hand, in the data storage area 64, display image data 65, setting data 66, and the like are stored. In addition to these data 65 and 66, the data storage area 64 stores various data used for processing in the game apparatus 10.

  The display image data 65 is data indicating a display image. Here, in the present embodiment, one of images captured and stored in the past is displayed on the menu screen, and the displayed image is referred to as a display image. Specifically, the display image data 65 represents a file name of the display image. Although details of the display image selection method will be described later, in the present embodiment, a favorite image described later, an image immediately after being captured (saved) by the simple imaging program 52, or the like is selected as the display image.

  The setting data 66 is data indicating setting information used in each program for photographing (the simple photographing program 52 and the multi-function photographing application program 53). The setting data 66 is passed as an argument to each of the programs 52 and 53 when the programs 52 and 53 for shooting are started. The setting data 66 includes camera switching data 67 and storage destination data 68.

  The camera switching data 67 indicates a camera that performs imaging among the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25. That is, the camera switching data 67 is data indicating either the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25.

  The save destination data 68 indicates a save destination of a captured image (referred to as a save image) saved (stored) by a shooting operation. In the present embodiment, the captured image saved (stored) by the shooting operation is saved in the saving data memory 34 or the memory card 28. Accordingly, the storage destination data 68 indicates either the storage data memory 34 or the memory card 28.

  In addition, information about a favorite is attached to the saved image in addition to information such as a file name. Here, in the present embodiment, the user can set some of the stored images as “favorites” (step SA46 described later). Hereinafter, the stored image set as a favorite is referred to as a “favorite image”. Information indicating that it is “favorite” is added to the favorite image data. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, information indicating any one of the first to third groups is added to the favorite image data. That is, in the present embodiment, favorite images can be managed by being divided into three groups of first to third groups (FIG. 29).

<Processing procedure>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30, a flow of processing related to the launcher function in the game apparatus 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a main flowchart showing the flow of launcher processing in the game apparatus 10. When the power of the game apparatus 10 is turned on by pressing the power button 14F, the CPU 31 of the game apparatus 10 starts executing the startup program 61 after initializing the main memory 32 and the like. Thereby, the process of subsequent steps SA1 to SA13 is started.

  In step SA1, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the game apparatus 10 has been activated for the first time. The determination in step SA1 can be performed by storing the date and time when the game apparatus 10 was last activated, for example. That is, if the date and time of the last activation are stored, it can be determined that the current activation of the game apparatus 10 is not the first activation, while the date and time of the last activation is not stored. It can be determined that the game apparatus 10 is activated for the first time.

  If the determination result of step SA1 is Yes, the process of step SA2 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA1 is No, the process of step SA2 is skipped and the process of step SA3 is executed.

  In step SA2, the CPU 31 executes a shooting guidance process. The shooting guidance process is a process for guiding the user to experience a shooting operation with a simple function. That is, in the shooting guidance process, when the user selects whether to perform the shooting process using the simple shooting program 52 and the user selects to perform the shooting process, the simple shooting program 52 performs a simple process. Let users experience shooting operations. The imaging guidance process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. The CPU 31 executes the process of step SA3 after step SA2.

  In step SA3, the CPU 31 randomly selects a display image from the favorite images. Specifically, the CPU 31 randomly selects one of the favorite images stored in the storage data memory 34 and displays data indicating information (for example, a file name) for specifying the selected favorite image. The image data 65 is stored in the main memory 32. Following step SA3, the process of step SA4 is executed.

In step SA4, the CPU 31 activates the activation function program 51. That is, the CPU 31 reads the activation function program 51 from the storage data memory 34, stores it in the main memory 32, and executes the activation function program 51. The processing after step SA5 is performed by the CPU 31 executing the activation function program 51. In the present embodiment, the CPU 31 reads the simple photographing program 52 into the main memory 32 together with the activation function program 51 at the timing when the activation function program 51 is read. In an alternative embodiment, the simple photographing program 52 may be read into the main memory 32 at a timing when a simple photographing process (step SA11) described later is executed. Following step SA4, the process of step SA5 is executed.

  In step SA5, the CPU 31 displays a menu screen. The menu screen is a screen (image) for allowing the user to select a selected application program to be activated from the selected application programs. The activation acceptance state shown in FIG. 19 is a state in which this menu screen is displayed. Hereinafter, the menu screen in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen. As shown in FIG. 23, in step SA5, an image for causing the user to select a selected application program to be started is displayed on the lower LCD 12. Specifically, on the lower LCD 12, icon images 71a to 71c, a scroll bar 72, a marker 73, and scroll buttons 74a and 74b are displayed.

  The icon image 71 is an image representing the selected application program. The icon image 71 is an icon for starting an application program in the memory card 29. If the memory card 29 is not installed, an icon indicating that the card is not installed is displayed together with a message “Card is not installed”.

  The user can activate the selected application program represented by the touched icon image by performing an operation of touching the icon image 71 displayed in the center of the screen (in the horizontal direction) as the first activation operation. it can.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of icon images (four icon images in FIG. 23) among the icon images corresponding to the plurality of application programs are displayed on the screen. The displayed icon image (type) is changed according to the operation of scrolling the screen. That is, an icon image representing a selected application program other than the currently selected selected application program is not displayed in FIG. 23, but is displayed by scrolling the screen of lower LCD 12.

  The screen of the lower LCD 12 can be scrolled by an operation of touching an icon image other than the icon image displayed at the center of the screen, or an operation of touching the marker 73 or the scroll button 74a or 74b. That is, when the user touches an icon image other than the icon image displayed at the center of the screen (the icon image 71a or 71c in FIG. 23), the screen of the lower LCD 12 scrolls and the touched icon image is displayed on the screen. Displayed in the center. In addition, the user can move the marker 73 on the scroll bar 72 by moving the touch position left and right on the scroll bar 72 while touching the marker 73, and the screen of the lower LCD 12 can be moved to the marker. It can be scrolled according to the movement of 73. Alternatively, the screen of the lower LCD 12 can be scrolled to the left by touching the scroll button 74a on the left side of the scroll bar 72, and the operation of the lower LCD 12 can be scrolled by touching the scroll button 74b on the right side of the scroll bar 72. The screen can be scrolled to the right.

As described above, the user can change the icon image displayed at the center of the screen and touch the icon image displayed at the center of the screen by scrolling the screen while the menu screen is displayed. The selected application program represented by the icon image can be activated by the operation.

  In the present embodiment, not all of the plurality of selected application programs are displayed at the same time, but a part of the plurality of selected application programs is displayed in a list, and the remaining portions are displayed by replacement by scrolling or the like. I tried to do it. Here, in an alternative embodiment, all of the plurality of selected application programs may be displayed simultaneously. The selected application programs (its icon images) displayed as a list may be displayed in a line as in the present embodiment, or may be displayed in a matrix of 2 × 2 or more.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, in step SA5, the upper LCD 22 displays a display image 75 and shooting button images 76a and 76b. The display image 75 is a saved image indicated by the display image data 65 stored in the main memory 32, and is an image selected in step SA3 or the like. Thus, in the present embodiment, images captured in the past are displayed on the menu screen. Thereby, it is possible to make the user who first touched the game apparatus 10 (the first use of the game apparatus 10) aware that the game apparatus 10 has a photographing function. Further, since the menu screen of the game apparatus 10 is different for each user (for each information processing apparatus), the menu screen can have individuality.

  In step SA3, since the display image 75 is selected at random, the user cannot designate any image as the display image 75 from the images stored in the storage data memory 34. As will be described later, the multi-function shooting application program 53 has a favorite image setting function, but the activation function program and the simple shooting program 52 do not have a favorite image setting function. The photographing button images 76a and 76b are images representing an operation for making a transition to a state where photographing can be performed by the simple photographing program 52 (the photographing possible state shown in FIG. 19), that is, the photographing-capable operation. . As described above, in the present embodiment, by displaying the operation for transitioning to the photographing enabled state on the menu screen (start-up acceptance state), the simple photographing program can be performed from the menu screen (without selecting the selected application program). It is possible to present to the user in an easy-to-understand manner that shooting can be performed by the user 52.

  As shown in FIG. 23, typically, the shootable operation is an operation of pressing the L button 14I or the R button 14J. Therefore, the user can enter a state where photographing can be performed by the simple photographing program 52 only by pressing the button (L button 14I or R button 14J) once in the activation acceptance state.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is displayed first after the game apparatus 10 is activated, except at the first activation (in the case of Yes in step SA1). That is, in the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 sets the initial state after the game apparatus 10 is activated to the activation acceptance state. Therefore, the user can start the simple photographing program 52 immediately after starting.

Returning to the description of FIG. 21, the process of step SA6 is executed after step SA5. In step SA6, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. That is, operation data is acquired from the operation button group 14 and input position data is acquired from the touch panel 13. The acquired operation data and input position data are stored in the main memory 32. In the activation acceptance state, the process of step SA6 is executed once every predetermined time (for example, one frame time (1/60 seconds)). Following step SA6, the process of step SA7 is executed.

  In step SA7, the CPU 31 determines whether an operation for scrolling the screen of the lower LCD 12 has been performed. The determination in step SA7 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA6. That is, in the determination process of step SA7, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching the marker 73 or the area where the scroll button 74a or 74b is displayed has been performed.

  If the determination result of step SA7 is Yes, the process of step SA8 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA7 is No, a process of step SA9 described later is executed.

  In step SA8, the CPU 31 scrolls the icon image display (the screen of the lower LCD 12). That is, when touch input is performed on the scroll button 74a, the icon image is scrolled to the left, and when touch input is performed on the scroll button 74b, the icon image is scrolled to the right. Thereby, an icon image that has not been displayed so far can be displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12. Following step SA8, the process of step SA5 is executed again.

  On the other hand, in step SA9, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a shootable operation has been performed. The determination at step SA9 can be made by referring to the operation data stored in the main memory 32 at step SA6. That is, in the determination process in step SA9, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the L button 14I or the R button 14J is pressed.

  If the determination result of step SA9 is Yes, the process of step SA10 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA9 is No, the process of step SA11 described later is executed.

  In step SA10, the CPU 31 executes a simple photographing process. The simple photographing process is a process for causing the user to perform photographing with a simple function by the simple photographing program 52. Hereinafter, the details of the simple photographing process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the simple photographing process (step SA10) shown in FIG. In the input image generation process, first, in step SA21, the CPU 31 activates the simple photographing program 52. In the present embodiment, since the simple shooting program 52 is read into the main memory 32 together with the activation function program 51, the CPU 31 starts executing the simple shooting program 52. At this time, the data 67 and 68 included in the setting data 66 stored in the main memory 32 are input (set) to the simple photographing program 52 as arguments. The processes in steps SA22 to SA29 after step SA21 are performed using the simple photographing program 52 (by executing the simple photographing program 52).

In step SA22, the CPU 31 acquires data of an image captured by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25. In this embodiment, an image is captured only by one of the cameras 23 and 25, and the CPU 31 acquires image data only from the one camera. Note that which of the cameras 23 and 25 is used for imaging is determined according to the contents of the camera switching data 67 passed as an argument when the simple photographing program 52 is started (step SA21). Following step SA22, the process of step SA23 is executed.

  In step SA23, the CPU 31 performs display processing. In step SA23, which is a photographing enabled state, an image captured by the camera 23 or 24 is displayed. Hereinafter, an image displayed in the photographing enabled state will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in a shootable state. As shown in FIG. 24, in step SA23, the captured image 77 obtained by the camera 23 or 24 acquired in step SA22 is displayed on the lower LCD 12. Steps SA22 and SA23 are repeatedly executed at a rate of once every predetermined time (for example, 1/60 seconds). By repeatedly executing the processes in steps SA22 and SA23, a real-time image captured by the camera 23 or 24 is displayed on the lower LCD 12. In an alternative embodiment, the real-time image may be displayed on the upper LCD 22. At this time, an image saved by the photographing operation may be further displayed on the lower LCD 12.

  Further, the lower LCD 12 displays a button image 78 for performing an operation for executing the multi-function photographing application program 53 (the second activation operation). Unlike the icon image displayed on the menu screen, the button image 78 is fixedly displayed at a predetermined position on the screen (the upper right position in FIG. 24). Although details will be described later, the user can easily transition from a state in which the simple photographing program 52 is executed to a state in which the multifunction photographing application program 53 is executed by touching the button image 78.

  Further, the display image 75 and the shooting button images 76a and 76b are displayed on the upper LCD 22 as in FIG. In the present embodiment, the shooting operation is an operation of pressing the L button 14I or the R button 14J, similar to the shooting enabled operation (see the shooting button images 76a and 76b shown in FIG. 24). In an alternative embodiment, the shooting operation may not be the same as the shooting enabled operation. For example, a button image for performing a shooting operation is displayed on the lower LCD 12, and an operation of touching the button image is shot. It is good also as operation. Further, the game apparatus 10 may accept both an operation of pressing the L button 14I or the R button 14J and an operation of touching the button image as shooting operations.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, the process of step SA24 is executed after step SA23. In step SA24, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. The process at step SA24 is the same as the process at step SA6. Following step SA24, the process of step SA25 is executed.

  In step SA25, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a shooting operation has been performed. The determination at step SA25 can be made by referring to the operation data stored in the main memory 32 at step SA24. In the present embodiment, since the first activation operation and the photographing operation are the same operation, the process in step SA25 can be performed in the same manner as in step SA9.

  If the determination result of step SA25 is Yes, the process of step SA26 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA25 is No, a process of step SA29 described later is executed.

  Hereinafter, an image displayed after the photographing operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed after a photographing operation is performed. As shown in FIG. 25, when the determination result of step SA25 is Yes, the captured image 77 acquired by step SA22 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 as the captured image 77 by the camera 23 or 24. Furthermore, in addition to the button image 78 for performing the operation for executing the multi-function shooting application program 53 (the second activation operation), the lower LCD 12 has an operation for saving the captured image. A button image for performing the operation (“hozon”) and a button image for performing an operation for performing the photographing again (“retry”) are displayed.

  Further, the display image 75 and the shooting button images 76a and 76b are displayed on the upper LCD 22 as in FIG. Returning to the description of FIG. 22, in step SA26, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a save operation has been performed. The determination in step SA26 can be made by referring to the operation data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA24, as in step SA25.

  When the determination result of step SA26 is Yes (when “hoson” in FIG. 25 is touched), the process of step SA27 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA26 is No (when “retry” in FIG. 25 is touched), the process of step SA22 described above is executed again. The determination at step SA26 may be omitted, and the process may move to step SA27 after step SA25.

  In step SA27, the CPU 31 stores the captured image. That is, the captured image acquired in step SA22 is stored (stored) in the storage data memory 34 or the memory card 28. The storage location of the captured image is determined according to the content of the storage location data 68 passed as an argument when the simple imaging program 52 is started (step SA21). Note that the storage location of the captured image can be changed by the user in the multi-function shooting process by the multi-function shooting application program 53 described later. Following step SA27, the process of step SA28 is executed.

  In step SA28, the CPU 31 selects the saved image saved in the previous step SA27 as the display image. Specifically, the CPU 31 stores data indicating the saved image saved in the immediately preceding step SA 27 in the main memory 32 as display image data 65. After the process of step SA28, the CPU 31 ends the execution of the simple shooting program 52 and ends the simple shooting process. Thereafter, the process of step SA4 shown in FIG. 21 is executed again.

  Hereinafter, an image displayed after execution of the simple photographing process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed after execution of the simple photographing process. As shown in FIG. 26, after execution of the simple photographing process, the captured image acquired in the simple photographing process is displayed on the upper LCD 22 as a new display image 75. That is, when the image shown in FIG. 22 is compared with the image shown in FIG. 26, it can be seen that the display image displayed on the upper LCD 22 is updated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in response to the shooting operation being performed in the shooting enabled state (simple shooting process), the simple shooting process is terminated and the state transitions from the shooting enabled state to the activation acceptance state. That is, when one captured image is stored in the simple shooting process, the screen display of the game apparatus 10 returns to the menu screen, so even a novice user who has not seen the manual or the like naturally enters the start acceptance state. It is possible to return (after step SA25, when the process proceeds to step SA27, the screen returns to the menu screen when the user performs one shooting operation in the simple shooting process). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the photographing operation and the photographing operation are the same, the transition from the start acceptance state to the photographing ready state and the transition from the photographable state to the start acceptance state are performed by the same operation. be able to. Therefore, even if the user accidentally presses the L button 14I or the R button 14J or presses the button without understanding the operation, the user is not changed. If the button is pressed, the original state (starting acceptance state) can be restored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game apparatus 10 that is easy for a novice user to operate.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the shooting operation is performed, the state of the game apparatus 10 transitions to the activation acceptance state. Therefore, the image stored in the process of step SA26 is a simple shooting. Without being displayed by the program 52, a transition to the activation acceptance state occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of step SA27, the CPU 31 sets the image stored in the process of step SA26 as the display image after transitioning to the activation acceptance state. Thereby, the stored image photographed by the simple photographing program 52 is displayed as a display image immediately after the transition to the activation acceptance state. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, although the transition to the activation acceptance state is performed when the photographing operation is performed, the user can immediately confirm the image photographed by the simple photographing program 52.

  On the other hand, in step SA29, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the second activation operation has been performed. The determination in step SA29 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA24. That is, in the determination process of step SA29, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where the button image 78 for performing the second activation operation is displayed has been performed. If the decision result in the step SA29 is Yes, a multi-function shooting process (FIG. 30) described later is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA29 is No, the process of step SA22 is executed again. Above, description of the simple imaging | photography process shown in FIG. 22 is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21, in step SA11, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a first activation operation has been performed. The determination at step SA11 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 at step SA6. That is, in the determination process in step SA11, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where an icon image is displayed has been performed. If the determination result of step SA11 is Yes, the process of step SA12 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA11 is No, the process of step SA13 described later is executed.

  In step SA12, the CPU 31 performs execution processing of the selected application program. That is, the selected application program corresponding to the icon image selected by the first activation operation is read into the main memory 32 and the selected application program is executed. Thereby, the selected application program is started, and the user can use the selected application program. The process of step SA12 ends when the selected application program ends, and the process of step SA3 is executed again after step SA12.

  Here, the case where the multi-function photographing application program 53 is executed as the selected application program in step SA12 will be described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing (multifunctional photographing processing) by the multifunction photographing application program 53.

  In the multi-function shooting process, first, in step SA30, the CPU 31 activates the multi-function shooting application program 53. That is, the multi-function photographing application program 53 is read into the main memory 32 and execution is started. At this time, the data 67 and 68 included in the setting data 66 stored in the main memory 32 are input (set) to the simple photographing program 52 as arguments. Following step SA30, the process of step SA31 is executed. The processes in steps SA31 to SA39 after step SA30 are performed using the multi-function shooting application program 53 (by executing the multi-function shooting application program 53).

  In step SA31, the CPU 31 performs display processing. Here, in the present embodiment, in the multi-function shooting process, there are a shooting mode in which shooting is performed using an imaging unit, and a photo display mode in which images (stored images) shot in the past are displayed. In the display process of step SA31, in order to set an image for allowing the user to select two modes (photo display mode and shooting mode) in the multi-function shooting process, and a save destination of the captured image saved by the shooting operation. Are displayed on at least one of the two LCDs 12 and 22. Hereinafter, the image displayed in the display process of step SSA31 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in the multi-function photographing process. As shown in FIG. 31, in step SA31, a button image 101 for instructing selection of a shooting mode and a button image 102 for instructing selection of a photo display mode are displayed on the lower LCD 12, respectively. Further, the button image 101 includes a display of the number of images that can be captured (for example, the remaining OO images) according to the remaining capacity of the storage location of the current captured image. In addition, the button image 102 includes a display of the number of stored captured images (for example, a total of OO) at the storage destination of the current captured image. In addition, button images 103 and 104 for instructing to change the storage destination of the captured image are also displayed on the lower LCD 12. When the button image 103 is touched, the built-in nonvolatile memory (built-in memory; storage data memory 34) is selected, and when the button image 104 is touched, a removable memory card (card memory; memory card 28) is selected. It becomes. When the built-in memory is selected, the display mode of the button image 103 changes. When the card memory is selected, the display mode of the button image 104 changes. Further, when the button image 101 or 102 is touched, the mode is switched to the photographing mode or the photo display mode at the timing of the touch.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the multi-function photographing application is activated, the user can select either the built-in memory or the card memory, and the selection is not fixed at the timing of the selection. The user can select either the shooting mode or the photo display mode on the same screen. Then, at the timing when the shooting mode and the photo display mode are selected, the selection of the built-in memory and the card memory is confirmed, and the mode shifts to the shooting mode or the photo display mode. That is, when the shooting mode is selected while the built-in memory is selected, the shooting mode is activated, and an image shot in the subsequent shooting mode is stored in the built-in memory. When the shooting mode is selected while the card memory is selected, the shooting mode is activated, and images shot in the subsequent shooting mode are stored in the card memory. In addition, when the photo display mode is selected while the internal memory is selected, the photo display mode is activated, and the captured image stored in the internal memory is displayed in the subsequent photo display mode. Further, when the photo display mode is selected while the card memory is selected, the photo display mode is activated, and the captured image stored in the card memory in the subsequent photo display mode is displayed.

Further, various button images 105 to 107 are displayed on the lower LCD. End button 1
Reference numeral 05 denotes a button image for performing an operation to end the multi-function photographing process. That is, when a touch input is made to the end button 105, the multi-function shooting process ends, and the process by the CPU 31 returns to the process of step SA4.

  The calendar button 106 is a button image for performing an operation for starting a calendar function described later. That is, when a touch input is made to the calendar button 106, a calendar function described later is executed. The other button 107 is a button image for performing various settings.

  In step SA32, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. The process at step SA32 is the same as the process at step SA6. Following step SA32, the process of step SA33 is executed.

  In step SA33, the CPU 31 determines whether a photo display mode has been selected. The determination in step SA33 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA32. That is, in the determination process of step SA33, as shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where the image 102 representing the photo display mode is displayed has been performed.

  If the determination result of step SA33 is Yes, the process of step SA34 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA33 is No, a process of step SA35 described later is executed.

  In step SA34, the CPU 31 executes processing to be executed in the photo display mode (photo display mode processing). Details of the photo display mode process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the flow of the photograph display mode process (step SA34) shown in FIG. In the photo display mode process, first, in step SA41, the CPU 31 performs a display process. In step SA41 in the photo display mode, a saved image taken in the past is displayed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 33, an image displayed in the photo display mode will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in the photograph display mode. As shown in FIG. 33, in step SA41, a plurality (three in the figure) of stored images 181 to 183, a cursor 184, scroll buttons 185 and 186, a setting button 187, and an end button 188 are on the lower side. It is displayed on the LCD 12.

  In FIG. 33, saved images 181 to 183 are (part of) saved images saved in the saved data memory 34 or the memory card 28. A saved image 182 surrounded by the cursor 184 is an image currently selected by the cursor 184. The scroll buttons 185 and 186 are buttons for scrolling the stored images 181 to 183 to the left and right. That is, when touch input is performed on the scroll button 185 on the right side of the screen, the stored images 181 to 183 scroll to the right side, and when touch input is performed on the scroll button 186 on the left side of the screen, the stored image 181 is displayed. ~ 183 scrolls to the left. As a result of the scrolling of the saved image to the left and right, the saved image displayed on the lower LCD 12 is changed and the saved image selected by the cursor 184 is changed.

In the present embodiment, in the photo display mode, the captured image stored in either the simple shooting process or the multi-function shooting process is displayed. In this embodiment,
Both the saved image saved in the simple shooting process and the saved image saved in the multi-function shooting process are saved without distinction. Specifically, for any saved image, the file name of the file name of the saved image data file (for example, the date and time of shooting, the total number of images shot by the game apparatus 10, etc.) (Appendix) is the same. As a result of saving the saved images saved in any shooting process without distinction, both the saved images saved in each shooting process can be displayed in the photo display mode.

  The setting button 187 is a button image for performing an operation of setting the saved image selected by the cursor 184 as a new favorite image. That is, when a touch input is made to the setting button 187, the saved image selected by the cursor 184 is set as a favorite image.

  The end button 188 is a button image for performing an operation to end the photo display mode. That is, when a touch input is made to the end button 188, the photo display mode ends, and the process by the CPU 31 returns to the process of step SA31.

  In step SA41, some information may be displayed on the upper LCD 22, or may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the CPU 31 displays the saved image selected by the cursor 184 on the upper LCD 22.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the process of step SA42 is executed after step SA41. In step SA42, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. The process of step SA42 is the same as the process of step SA6. Following step SA42, the process of step SA43 is executed.

  In step SA43, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an operation for scrolling the stored image displayed on the lower LCD 12 has been performed. The determination in step SA43 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA42. That is, in the determination process of step SA43, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching the area where the scroll button 185 or 186 is displayed has been performed.

  If the determination result of step SA43 is Yes, the process of step SA44 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA43 is No, a process of step SA45 described later is executed.

  In step SA44, the CPU 31 scrolls the stored image displayed on the lower LCD 12. That is, when a touch input is made to the scroll button 185, the saved image is scrolled to the right, and when a touch input is made to the scroll button 186, the saved image is scrolled to the left. As a result, the saved image that has not been displayed so far is displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12. Following step SA44, the process of step SA41 is executed again.

On the other hand, in step SA45, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an operation for setting a saved image as a favorite image has been performed. The determination in step SA45 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA42. That is, in the determination process in step SA45, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching the area where the setting button 187 is displayed has been performed. If the determination result of step SA45 is Yes, the process of step SA46 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA45 is No, the process of step SA41 is executed again.

  In step SA46, the CPU 31 sets the saved image currently selected by the cursor 184 as a favorite image. Specifically, information indicating that the image is a favorite image is added to the data of the stored image stored in the storage data memory 34 or the memory card 28. Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 31 causes the user to select which of the first group to the third group to set the stored image in step SA46. Therefore, information indicating the group selected by the user among the first to third groups is added to the data of the stored image. Following step SA46, the process of step SA47 is executed.

  In step SA47, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the photo display mode. The determination in step SA47 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA42. That is, in the determination process in step SA47, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching the area where the end button 188 is displayed has been performed. If the determination result in step SA47 is Yes, the CPU 31 ends the photo display mode process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA47 is No, the process of step SA41 is executed again.

  In the photo display mode described above, the user can browse saved images taken in the past and set the saved images as favorite images. As described above, in step SA3, the display image (display image 75 shown in FIG. 23) displayed on the menu screen is selected from the favorite images. Therefore, the user can select an image to be displayed as a display image by himself / herself.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the process of step SA34 ends, the process of step SA31 is executed again. Therefore, when the photo display mode ends, a screen that allows the user to select either the photo display mode or the shooting mode is displayed again (step SA31).

  On the other hand, in step SA35, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a shooting mode is selected. The determination in step SA35 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA32. That is, in the determination process of step SA35, as shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where the image 101 representing the shooting mode is displayed has been performed. If the determination result of step SA35 is Yes, the process of step SA36 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA35 is No, a process of step SA37 described later is executed.

  In step SA36, the CPU 31 executes a process to be executed in the shooting mode (shooting mode process). Hereinafter, the details of the photographing mode process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of the shooting mode process (step SA36) shown in FIG. In the shooting mode process, first, in step SA50, the CPU 31 acquires data of an image captured by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25. The process at step SA50 is the same as the process at step SA22 (FIG. 22). Following step SA50, the process of step SA51 is executed.

  In step SA51, the CPU 31 performs display processing. In step SA51, which is a shooting mode, an image captured by the camera 23 or 24 is displayed. Hereinafter, an image displayed in the shooting mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35A is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in the shooting mode. As shown in FIG. 35A, in step SA51, various buttons 91 to 99 are displayed on the lower LCD 12 in addition to the captured image 77 similar to FIG. Each button 91 to 99 is an image for giving an instruction to the game apparatus 10 when the user performs a touch input on the position of the image. Hereinafter, the buttons 91 to 99 will be described.

  The shooting button 91 is a button image for performing a shooting operation. That is, when a touch input is performed on the shooting button 91, a captured image saving process is performed. In addition, it is preferable that the photographing button 91 is displayed at substantially the center (with respect to the left-right direction) of the lower housing 11 so that the user can easily operate the camera with either the right hand or the left hand.

  The camera switching button 92 is an image for performing a camera switching operation. That is, when touch input is performed on the camera switching button 92, the camera that performs imaging is switched between the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25.

  The end button 93 is a button image for performing an operation to end the shooting mode. That is, when a touch input is made to the end button 93, the shooting mode ends, and the process by the CPU 31 returns to the process of step SA31.

  Each button 94 to 99 is a button image for giving an instruction in the editing process. The pen mode button 94, the eraser mode button 95, and the stamp mode button 96 are button images for performing an operation for changing the editing mode. Here, in this embodiment, three modes, a pen mode, a stamp mode, and an eraser mode, are prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image of the input locus input to the touch panel 13 can be added to the captured image. In the stamp mode, a stamp image prepared in advance can be added to the captured image. In the eraser mode, an image added in the pen mode or the stamp mode can be erased. The pen mode button 94 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the pen mode. The eraser mode button 95 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the eraser mode. The stamp mode button 96 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the stamp mode.

  The thickness change button 97 is an image for giving an instruction to change the thickness of a line input in the pen mode. The color change button 98 is an image for giving an instruction to change the color of a line input in the pen mode. The all erase button 99 is an image for instructing to erase all the images added in the pen mode or the stamp mode.

  By giving instructions using the buttons 94 to 99, the user can input an image on the captured image displayed on the lower LCD 12 (overlaid on the captured image). Note that FIG. 35A shows an image when there is no image input by the user in the editing process described later. In the present embodiment, the upper LCD 22 displays an image that explains to the user how to operate in the shooting mode.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in step SA52, the CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. The process at step SA52 is the same as the process at step SA6. Following step SA52, the process of step SA33 is executed.

In step SA53, the CPU 31 determines whether a shooting operation has been performed. The determination in step SA53 can be made by referring to the operation data and input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA52. That is, step S
In the determination process of A53, the CPU 31 determines whether the L button 14I or the R button 14J has been pressed, or whether an input for touching the area where the shooting button 91 is displayed has been performed.

  As described above, in the multi-function shooting process, the user can perform the same operation as the shooting operation in the simple shooting process (an operation of pressing the L button 14I or the R button 14J) as the shooting operation, and press the shooting button 91. The touch operation can be performed as a shooting operation. If the determination result of step SA53 is Yes, the process of step SA54 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA53 is No, a process of step SA55 described later is executed.

  As described in step SA53 above, in this embodiment, the photographing processing function, which is a function shared by the simple photographing program 52 and the multi-function photographing application program 53, is the same operation (L button 14I or R button 14J). The operation is performed in response to the operation of pressing. Since the same operation can be performed for the same function even if the program changes, an operation system that is easy for the user to use can be provided.

  It should be noted that “a common function is executed in response to the same operation” means that the same function is executed by a certain operation in both the simple shooting program 52 and the multi-function shooting application program 53. This does not mean that the function is executed by an operation different from the certain operation in either the simple shooting program 52 or the multi-function shooting application program 53. That is, as in the present embodiment, in the multi-function shooting application program 53, shooting processing is executed by touching the shooting button 91 in addition to pressing the L button 14I or the R button 14J. Also good.

  In step SA54, the CPU 31 stores the captured image. The process in step SA54 is the same as the process in step SA26 in the simple photographing process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process for saving the captured image is executed in the same way in the simple imaging process and the multifunctional imaging process. Specifically, the determination method of the camera used for imaging and the determination method of the storage destination are performed by the same method in the simple imaging process and the multifunctional imaging process. Following step SA54, the process of step SA59 described later is executed.

  In step SA55, the CPU 31 determines whether a camera switching operation has been performed. The determination in step SA55 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA52. That is, in the determination process of step SA55, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where the camera switching button 92 is displayed has been performed. If the determination result of step SA55 is Yes, the process of step SA56 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA55 is No, a process of step SA57 described later is executed.

In step SA56, the CPU 31 switches the camera that captures the image. That is, when the camera that captures an image is the inner camera 23, the camera that captures an image is changed to the outer camera 25, and when the camera that captures an image is the outer camera 25, The camera that performs imaging is changed to the inner camera 23. Specifically, the CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop the operation to one of the cameras 23 and 25 that is capturing an image, and also captures the other camera. To that effect. When the process of step SA56 is executed, in step SA50 to be performed next, image data captured by the camera after switching is acquired by the CPU 31, and in step SA51 to be performed next, it is captured by the camera after switching. An image is displayed on the lower LCD 12. In step SA <b> 56, the CPU 31 stores data indicating the camera after switching in the main memory 32 as camera switching data 67. As a result, when the multi-function shooting process is executed next time and when the simple shooting process is executed, imaging is performed by the switched camera. Following step SA56, the process of step SA59 described later is executed.

  In step SA57, the CPU 31 determines whether an editing operation has been performed. The determination in step SA57 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA52. That is, in the determination process of step SA57, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where the buttons 94 to 99 are displayed or an area where the captured image 77 is displayed is performed. If the determination result of step SA57 is Yes, the process of step SA58 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA57 is No, a process of step SA59 described later is executed.

  In step SA58, the CPU 31 performs various editing processes according to the touch input made by the user. For example, when each of the buttons 94 to 98 is touched, the CPU 31 changes the settings (editing mode and settings related to line thickness or color) according to the touched button. When the area of the captured image 77 is touched, processing corresponding to the editing mode is performed on the touched position. That is, when the edit mode is the pen mode, an image of the locus by the touch input is added to the captured image 77, and when the edit mode is the stamp mode, the stamp image prepared in advance is set to the touch position with respect to the captured image 77. In addition, in the case of the eraser mode, the image added in the pen mode or the stamp mode is erased from the touched position. When the all erase button 99 is touched, all images added to the captured image 77 in the pen mode or the stamp mode are erased. Details of the processing according to the editing mode in step SA58 will be described later.

Following step SA58, the process of step SA59 is executed.
In step SA59, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the shooting mode. The determination in step SA59 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA452. That is, in the determination process of step SA59, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching the area where the end button 93 is displayed has been performed. If the determination result in step SA59 is Yes, the CPU 31 ends the shooting mode process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA59 is No, the process of step SA50 is executed again. Above, description of the imaging | photography mode process shown in FIG. 34 is complete | finished.

  In addition to the editing function described above, the above-described multi-function photographing application program 53 may have a function of performing other types of editing operations and presentation operations on the captured image 77. In such a case, it is preferable to display a menu screen for selecting a function that the user wants to use prior to the display process in step SA51. Hereinafter, an example of a menu screen displayed in the shooting mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35B shows an example of a menu screen displayed in the shooting mode. As shown in FIG. 35B, on the menu screen, in addition to the captured image 77 similar to that in FIG. Each icon image included in the button group 150 is an image for instructing the game apparatus 10 to select a corresponding function included in the multi-function shooting application program 53. Hereinafter, each button 152,154,156,158 is demonstrated.

The scroll buttons 152 and 154 are button images for selecting each icon image included in the button group 150. That is, when a touch input is made to scroll button 152 or 154, among the icon images included in button group 150, the selected state (active) is sequentially changed.

  The end button 156 is a button image for performing an operation to end the shooting mode. That is, when a touch input is made to the end button 152, the shooting mode ends, and the process by the CPU 31 returns to the process of step SA31.

  The start button 158 is a button image for performing an operation for instructing execution of a selected function among the functions included in the multi-function imaging application program. That is, when any one of the icon images included in the button group 150 is selected and touch input is performed on the start button 158, a function corresponding to the currently selected icon image is executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the process of step SA36 ends, the process of step SA31 is executed again. Therefore, when the shooting mode ends, a screen that allows the user to select either the photo display mode or the shooting mode is displayed again (step SA31).

  On the other hand, in step SA37, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an operation for changing the storage destination of the stored image has been performed. The determination in step SA37 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA32. That is, in the determination process of step SA37, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where an image representing an instruction to change the storage destination of the captured image is displayed. If the determination result of step SA37 is Yes, the process of step SA38 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA37 is No, a process of step SA39 described later is executed.

  In step SA38, the CPU 31 changes the storage location of the captured image. That is, when the current storage destination is the storage data memory 34, the storage destination is changed to the memory card 28, and when the current storage destination is the memory card 28, the storage destination is the storage data memory. Change to 34. Specifically, the CPU 31 stores data indicating the changed storage destination in the main memory 32 as the storage destination data 68. Following step SA38, the process of step SA31 is executed again.

  In step SA39, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the multi-function shooting process. This determination is made based on whether or not the user has given an instruction to end the multi-function photographing process. The instruction to end the multi-function shooting process is performed, for example, by displaying a button image for performing an operation to end the multi-function shooting process in the display process in step SA31 and touching the button image. Also good. The instruction may be performed by pressing a predetermined button. If the determination result of step SA39 is No, the process of step SA31 is executed again. On the other hand, if the determination result in step SA39 is Yes, the CPU 31 ends the execution of the multi-function shooting application program 53, and ends the multi-function shooting process. Thereafter, the process of step SA3 shown in FIG. 21 is executed again.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21, in step SA <b> 13, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the processing in the game apparatus 10. The determination in step SA13 is made based on, for example, whether or not the user has performed a predetermined end instruction operation (specifically, an operation of pressing the power button 14F or the like). If the determination result of step SA13 is No, the process of step SA5 is executed again. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA13 is Yes, the CPU 31 ends the process shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the menu screen is displayed (starting acceptance state, step SA5), the game apparatus 10 accepts the first starting operation for starting the selected application program. Along with (steps SA11 and SA12), a photographing enabling operation for starting the simple photographing program 52 is accepted (steps SA9 and SA10). Therefore, since the simple photographing program 52 can be started immediately by the photographing enabled operation from the state in which the menu screen is displayed, the user can easily start the simple photographing program 52. In particular, in the present embodiment, in order to activate a desired selected application program, the user must perform the first activation operation after performing the scroll operation as necessary, whereas the simplified imaging is performed. In order to start the program 52, the user only needs to perform an operation capable of shooting. Therefore, in this embodiment, the simple photographing program 52 can be started more easily than the selected application program.

  Furthermore, according to the above-described embodiment, during execution of the simple photographing program 52 (photographable state; steps SA22 to SA29), the CPU 31 accepts a second activation operation for activating the photographing application program 53 (step SA29). ). According to this, even when the user is shooting with the simple shooting program 52, the multi-function shooting application program 53 can be started by the second starting operation. Therefore, even when the user wants to use the function of the multi-function shooting application program 53 that the simple shooting program 52 does not have during shooting by the simple shooting program 52, the user performs the second activation operation. The function can be used easily and quickly.

  In the present embodiment, the simple photographing program 52, which is a relatively simple function, can be quickly activated from the menu screen, and the multi-function photographing application program 53 having more functions can be used as the simple photographing program. It is possible to start immediately during execution of 52.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, “First, the game apparatus 10 is operated by a shooting program having a simple function, and then various shooting functions of the game apparatus 10 are used by a more versatile shooting program”. The game device 10 can be used by the user in the usage mode, and can be used so that the user gradually gets used to the operation of the game device 10.

  Further, the simple shooting program 52 can be regarded as an introduction (trial version) of the multi-function shooting application program 53, and from the provider side of the game apparatus 10, the simple shooting program 52 is quickly activated from the menu screen. By making it possible, the use of the multi-function photographing application program 53 by the user can be promoted.

  In this embodiment, the function of the simple shooting program 52 is a part of the function of the multi-function shooting application program 53, so the data size of the simple shooting program 52 is larger than the data size of the multi-function shooting application program 53. Small. Therefore, the shooting program can be quickly started from the menu screen by using the simple shooting program 52 having the smaller data size as the program that is started from the menu screen by the above-described shooting enabled operation.

<Shooting guidance processing>
Next, details of the imaging guidance process in step SA2 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the flow of the imaging guidance process (step SA2) shown in FIG. In the shooting guidance process, first, in step SA61, the CPU 31 displays a selection screen that allows the user to select whether or not to perform shooting (that is, whether or not to change the state of the game apparatus 10 to the shooting enabled state). . For example, a button image for giving an instruction to take a picture and a button image for giving an instruction not to take a picture are displayed on the lower LCD 12 together with a message “Would you like to take a picture?”. Following step SA61, the process of step SA62 is executed.

  In step SA62, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. The process at step SA62 is the same as the process at step SA6. Following step SA62, the process of step SA63 is executed.

  In step SA63, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an instruction to perform shooting has been selected. The determination in step SA63 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SA62. That is, in the determination process in step SA63, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input for touching an area where a button image for instructing shooting is displayed is performed. If the determination result of step SA63 is Yes, the process of step SA64 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SA63 is No, a process of step SA65 described later is executed.

  In step SA64, the CPU 31 executes a simple photographing process. Since this simple photographing process is the same as step SA10 described above, a detailed description thereof is omitted. However, since this simple photographing process enables photographing, the user can perform a photographing operation. After the simple photographing process in step SA64 is finished, the CPU 31 finishes the photographing guiding process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, since the process in step SA64 is the same as the process in step SA10, the multi-function shooting application program 53 is also activated during the simple shooting process in the simple shooting process in step SA64. Is possible. However, in an alternative embodiment, in the simple photographing process of step SA64, the button image 78 for performing the second activation operation is not displayed, and the multifunctional photographing application program 53 cannot be activated. Also good.

  On the other hand, in step SA65, the CPU 31 displays an image for introducing the shooting function. For example, an image or the like explaining functions related to the simple photographing program 52 and the multi-function photographing application program 53 is displayed on each LCD 12 and 22. After step SA65, the CPU 31 ends the imaging guidance process shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 determines whether or not the game apparatus 10 is activated for the first time (step SA1), and when the game apparatus 10 is activated for the first time (in step SA1). In (Yes), a display for allowing the user to select whether or not to change the state of the game apparatus 10 to the photographing enabled state is performed (step SA61). When the user selects to perform shooting (Yes in step SA63), the user actually experiences the shooting operation (step SA64).

  Thereby, the user can be guided to experience the shooting operation in the game apparatus 10 first. That is, the shooting guidance process allows a user who uses the game apparatus 10 for the first time to perform a shooting operation first, so that the user can get used to the shooting operation. In this embodiment, since the user experiences a simple photographing operation by the simple photographing program 52 in step SA64, the user can easily perform the photographing operation by the multifunction photographing application program 53 first. Shooting operation can be performed.

  Further, from the manufacturer side of the game apparatus 10, the user can introduce the shooting function of the game apparatus 10 in an easy-to-understand manner by first allowing the user to actually experience a simple shooting operation.

  In the present embodiment, in step SA61, the user is allowed to select whether or not to shift to the photographing enabled state. However, in an alternative embodiment, the user is not allowed to select in the photographing guidance process. Alternatively, the state may be changed to a photographing enabled state. That is, the shooting process by the shooting program 52 or 53 may be executed without causing the user to select.

<About changing the display screen>
In the present embodiment, the game apparatus 10 changes the content of the display image on the menu screen at a predetermined timing (automatically regardless of a user instruction). As a result, the menu screen can be changed so that the user is not bored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined timing includes a timing at which the game apparatus 10 is activated and a timing at which the selected application program is terminated. That is, as described above, when the game apparatus 10 is activated and when the selected application program is terminated, the display process of step SA5 is executed after the process of step SA3 is executed. The display image on the screen is changed. That is, the display image is changed every time the game apparatus 10 is activated and each time the selected application program is executed.

  According to this, since the user can enjoy at the time of starting and at the end of execution of the selected application program ("which image is displayed"), for the provider side of the game apparatus 10, the user can There is an effect that it is possible to promote starting 10 or executing the selected application program (that is, using the game apparatus 10).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined timing includes a timing at which the folding game apparatus 10 is opened. In the present embodiment, since the game device 10 in the closed state is in the sleep mode, the “game device 10 in the closed state (sleep mode)” is displayed at the “timing when the game device 10 is activated”. It can be said that the timing of “opening (restarting from sleep mode)” is included. When the game apparatus 10 is opened again after closing the game apparatus 10 in the opened state, the CPU 31 changes the display image before and after the game apparatus 10 is closed.

  As a result, the user can enjoy when opening the game apparatus 10, so that the provider of the game apparatus 10 can promote the use of the game apparatus 10 by the user by opening the game apparatus 10. effective. In the present embodiment, when the game apparatus 10 in the closed state is opened, the display screen is not changed at random, but is changed according to a predetermined order. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the process of changing the display image according to opening and closing will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of a process (open / close process) executed when the game apparatus 10 is opened / closed. The process shown in FIG. 28 is started in response to the closing of the game apparatus 10 at an arbitrary timing during the process shown in FIG.

In the opening / closing process, first, in step SA71, the CPU 31 shifts the game apparatus 10 to the sleep mode. Specifically, the CPU 31 stops image display on the LCDs 12 and 22 or temporarily stops processing in the application program being executed. Following step SA71, the process of step SA72 is executed.

  In step SA72, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the game apparatus 10 has been opened. If the determination result of step SA72 is Yes, the process of step SA73 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SA72 is No, the process of step SA72 is executed again. That is, the CPU 31 waits until the game apparatus 10 is in an open state.

  In step SA73, the CPU 31 changes the display image from the state before the opening / closing process is started. Here, in step SA73, the display image is changed by sequentially selecting the display image from the favorite images in a predetermined order. Hereinafter, a display image changing method will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display image changing method in step SA73. FIG. 29 shows an example where the first group includes three favorite images, the second group includes two favorite images, and the third group includes four favorite images. In the present embodiment, favorite images included in each group are managed side by side in a predetermined order. The predetermined order may be, for example, the order of shooting (storing) date / time, the order of date / time set as a favorite image, or the order set by the user. In step SA73, the favorite images are sequentially changed according to this order. That is, the CPU 31 sets the favorite image in the next order of the display image before the change (before the opening / closing process is started) as the display image after the change. If the display image before the change is the last favorite image in the group, the top favorite image of the next group in the group is set as the display image after the change. When the display image before the change is the last favorite image in the third group, the first favorite image in the first group is set as the display image after the change. As described above, in step SA73, the display image is changed according to the order of the arrows shown in FIG. After step SA73, the CPU 31 ends the opening / closing process and returns to the state immediately before the opening / closing process is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the game apparatus 10 is opened, the display images are switched in a predetermined order. According to this, the user can enjoy changing the display image one after another by an operation of opening and closing the game apparatus 10. For example, the user creates a four-frame cartoon whose picture (display image) changes each time the game apparatus 10 is opened, or continuously sees a series of photographs arranged in time series by repeatedly opening and closing the game apparatus 10. can do. At this time, in step SA3, the CPU 31 may select a display image at random from the top favorite images of each group. Thereby, all the images included in each group can be continuously displayed in a predetermined order.

  In an alternative embodiment, the game apparatus 10 may switch display images in a predetermined order according to a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing a predetermined button). That is, the predetermined timing may be a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed.

<Modification>
In the above embodiment, predetermined information (data) is used in common between the simple photographing program 52 and the multi-function photographing application program 53. Specifically, the two programs 52 and 53 commonly use information about a camera that performs imaging and information about a storage destination of a stored image. Here, in an alternative embodiment, the two programs 52 and 53 may use other information in common. For example, if the file name of the stored image is determined based on the total number taken by the game apparatus 10, the information on the total number may be used in common.

  In an alternative embodiment, the game apparatus 10 is configured such that the multi-function photographing application program 53 is activated when the multi-function photographing application program 53 is activated in the photographing-capable state (Yes in step SA29). The content of the argument to be passed to the multi-function photographing application program 53 may be different depending on the case of activation (in the case of Yes in step SA11).

  For example, information indicating a mode at the start of execution of the multi-function photographing application program 53 may be used as the argument. That is, the mode at the start of the execution of the multi-function photographing application program 53 is different between when the multi-function photographing application program 53 is activated in the photographing enabled state and when the multifunction photographing application program 53 is activated in the activation accepting state. It may be different.

  Specifically, when the multi-function shooting application program 53 is started in the start acceptance state, the mode at the start of execution is set to a mode for selecting the shooting mode and the photo display mode, as in the above embodiment. On the other hand, when the multi-function shooting application program 53 is started in the shooting enabled state, the mode at the start of execution may be set to the shooting mode.

  When the multi-function photographing application program 53 is activated in the photographing enabled state, it may be assumed that the user has activated the multi-functional photographing application program 53 in order to perform photographing with a function that the simple photographing program 52 does not have. Because it can.

  In the alternative embodiment, when the multi-function shooting application program 53 is started in the shooting enabled state, the mode at the start of execution is set to the photo display mode, and the display image displayed in the shooting enabled state is displayed. (For example, a favorite image in the same group as the display image or an image taken on the same day as the display image) may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is one button image (button image 78 shown in FIG. 24) for starting the multi-function shooting application program 53 in the shooting enabled state. One button image may be displayed. Here, one of the two button images is a button for starting the multi-function shooting application program 53 with the mode at the start of execution of the multi-function shooting application program 53 as a shooting mode, and the other is at the start of execution. This is a button for starting the multi-function photographing application program 53 with the mode in FIG. Thus, in an alternative embodiment, the game apparatus 10 prepares a plurality of types of second activation operations, and the mode at the start of execution (of the multi-function imaging application program 53) depending on the type of the second activation operation performed. May be different.

  In the above embodiment, the simple photographing program 52 is a program different from the activation function program 51 and is activated by the activation program separately from the activation function program 51. Here, in an alternative embodiment, the simple imaging program 52 may be configured as a part of the activation function program 51 (that is, the activation function program 51 and the simplified imaging program 52 are one in the activation program 61). May be a program). In an alternative embodiment, the activation function program 51 may activate the simple imaging program 52.

  That is, the simple imaging program 52 and the multi-function imaging application program 53 may be activated by the same program or may be activated by different programs as long as instructions (operations) for activation are different.

[7. Details of functions in multifunctional shooting application]
<Overview>
As described above, by executing the multi-function shooting application program 53, a number of functions that the simple shooting program 52 does not have are provided. Details of two typical functions provided by the multi-function photographing application program 53 according to the present embodiment will be described below.

<Processing procedure (first form)>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of shooting processing (part 1) in the multi-function shooting application in the game apparatus 10. Note that the processing loop of steps SB1 to SB11 shown in FIG. 36 is executed once every predetermined time (for example, 1/60 seconds) (except when the processing of steps SB8 to SB10 is executed).

  In step SB1 shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 31 acquires data of an image captured by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25. In the present embodiment, an image is captured only by one of the cameras 23 and 25. In step SB1, the CPU 31 acquires image data only from the one camera. In the present embodiment, the camera that captures an image is set to the outer camera 25 at the start of the shooting process. Following step SB1, the process of step SB2 is executed.

  The image data acquired from the camera 23 or 25 in step SB1 is displayed on the lower LCD 12. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22. Note that FIG. 37 shows an image when there is no image input by the user in the input image generation processing described later. As shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 31 displays a real-time image (captured image) 52 captured by the camera 23 or 25 on the lower LCD 12. The upper LCD 22 displays an image 252 that explains how to operate the user. In the present embodiment, the CPU 31 displays various button images 253 to 261 on the lower LCD 12 together with the captured image 252. Each of the button images 253 to 261 is an image for giving an instruction to the game apparatus 10 when the user performs a touch input on the position of the image. Hereinafter, the button images 253 to 261 will be described.

  The pen mode image 253, the eraser mode image 254, and the seal mode image 255 are images for changing the edit mode. Here, in this embodiment, three modes, a pen mode, a seal mode, and an eraser mode, are prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image of the input locus input to the touch panel 13 can be added to the captured image. In the seal mode, a seal image prepared in advance can be added to the captured image. In the eraser mode, an image added in the pen mode or the seal mode can be erased. The pen mode image 253 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editing mode to the pen mode. The eraser mode image 254 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the eraser mode. The seal mode image 255 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the seal mode.

The thickness change image 256 is an image for giving an instruction to change the thickness of a line input in the pen mode. The color change image 257 is an image for giving an instruction to change the color of a line input in the pen mode. The all erased image 258 is an image for instructing to erase all the images added in the pen mode or the seal mode.

  By giving an instruction using each of the button images 253 to 258, the user can input an image on the captured image displayed on the lower LCD 12 (overlaid on the captured image). Details of processing for generating an input image (input image generation processing) will be described later.

  The end image 259 is an image for giving an instruction to end the photographing process. The shooting instruction image 260 is an image for giving a shooting instruction. In the present embodiment, the shooting instruction is an instruction to save (record) an image displayed on the lower LCD 12 (an image in which an input image is superimposed on a captured image). In addition, it is preferable that the photographing instruction image 260 is displayed at approximately the center (in the left-right direction) of the lower housing 11 so that the user can easily operate the user with either the right hand or the left hand. Therefore, if the lower LCD 12 is not arranged at the approximate center of the lower housing 11, the CPU 31 is arranged not at the center of the screen of the lower LCD 12 but at the approximate center of the lower housing 11. Is preferably displayed. The camera switching image 261 is an image for performing a camera switching instruction. The camera switching instruction is an instruction to switch a camera that performs imaging among the inner camera and the outer cameras 223 and 225.

  In step SB2, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. That is, operation data is acquired from the operation button group 14 and touch position data is acquired from the touch panel 13. The acquired operation data and touch position data are stored in the main memory 32. Following step SB2, the process of step SB3 is executed.

  In step SB3, the CPU 31 determines whether a camera switching instruction has been issued. In the present embodiment, the camera switching instruction is input by pressing a predetermined button (for example, the button 14B, the button 14C, the button 14D, or the button 14E) or touching an area where the camera switching image 261 is displayed. This is performed by performing the operation on the touch panel 13. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB3, the CPU 31 determines whether the predetermined button has been pressed or an input for touching an area where the camera switching image 261 is displayed has been performed. Note that the determination in step SB3 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB2. If the determination result of step SB3 is Yes, the process of step SB4 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB3 is No, the process of step SB5 described later is executed.

  In step SB4, the CPU 31 switches the camera that captures an image. That is, when the camera that captures an image is the inner camera 23, the camera that captures an image is changed to the outer camera 25, and when the camera that captures an image is the outer camera 25, The camera that performs imaging is changed to the inner camera 23. Specifically, the CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop the operation to one of the cameras 23 and 25 that is capturing an image, and also captures the other camera. To that effect (imaging execution instruction). When the process of step SB4 is executed, in step SB1 performed next, image data captured by the camera after switching is acquired by the CPU 31, and in step SB6 performed next, data is captured by the camera after switching. An image (live image) is displayed on the lower LCD 12. After step SB4, the process of step SB1 is executed again.

  In step SB5, the CPU 31 performs an input image generation process. The input image generation process is a process for generating the input image by a user input. The details of the input image generation processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the flow of the input image generation process (step SB5) shown in FIG. In the input image generation process, first, in step SB20, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an input image generation operation has been performed. That is, it is determined whether an input for touching an area where a captured image is displayed on the input surface of the touch panel 13 is performed. The determination in step SB20 can be made based on whether or not the touch position data acquired in step SB2 indicates a position in the area where the captured image is displayed. If the determination result of step SB20 is Yes, the process of step SB21 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB20 is No, a process of step SB26 described later is executed.

  In step SB21, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the current editing mode is the pen mode. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the editing mode is set to the pen mode at the start of the editing process. If the determination result of step SB21 is Yes, the process of step SB22 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB21 is No, processing of step SB23 described later is executed.

  In step SB22, processing in the pen mode is executed. That is, the CPU 31 draws an image of the locus of touch input performed on the captured image. Specifically, an image of a line connecting the positions indicated by the touch position data acquired so far in step SB2 is drawn in a memory (frame buffer) that stores image data to be displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22. . The thickness and color of the drawn line are determined according to the contents set in step SB29 described later. The process of step SB22 may be any process as long as it generates and draws an image representing the locus of the position where the user has input on the touch panel 13. An example of such processing is shown in steps SB52 and SB53 described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 in the pen mode. When the process of step SB22 is executed, an input image 262 representing the locus drawn by the user is displayed over the captured image displayed on the lower LCD 12 in a display process (step SB6) described later. (See FIG. 39). Following step SB22, a process of step SB26 described later is executed.

  On the other hand, in step SB23, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the current editing mode is the seal mode. When the determination result of step SB23 is Yes (that is, when the current editing mode is the seal mode), the process of step SB24 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB23 is No (that is, when the current edit mode is the eraser mode), the process of step SB25 described later is executed.

  In step SB24, processing in the seal mode is executed. That is, the CPU 31 draws a predetermined sticker image at a position where touch input is performed on the captured image. Specifically, a predetermined sticker image is drawn at the position indicated by the touch position data acquired in step SB2. Note that the process of step SB24 may be any process as long as it generates and draws a predetermined sticker image at a position where the user inputs on the touch panel 13. An example of such processing is shown in steps SB60 and SB61 described later. When the process of step SB24 is executed, in the display process (step SB6) described later, an input image that is a predetermined sticker image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the captured image displayed on the lower LCD 12. Note that the CPU 31 may prepare a plurality of sticker images and allow the user to select a sticker image to be drawn from the plurality of sticker images. Following step SB24, a process of step SB26 described later is executed.

On the other hand, in step SB25, processing in the eraser mode is executed. That is, the CPU 31 erases the input image (trajectory image or sticker image) on the edited image in response to an input to the touch panel 13. Specifically, the input image drawn at the position indicated by the touch position data acquired in step SB2 is deleted. Following step SB25, the process of step SB26 is executed.

  In step SB26, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an instruction to delete all input images has been issued. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an input for touching the area where the all erased image 258 is displayed has been performed. If the determination result of step SB26 is Yes, the process of step SB27 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SB26 is No, the process of step SB27 is skipped and the process of step SB28 described later is executed.

  In step SB27, the CPU 31 deletes all input images generated / drawn so far. In this way, the user can redo the operation of drawing the input image from the beginning by touching the all erased image 258. Following step SB27, the process of step SB28 is executed.

  In step SB28, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an instruction to change the setting related to the input image generation operation has been issued. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an input for touching an area where the button images 253 to 257 are displayed is performed. If the determination result of step SB28 is Yes, the process of step SB29 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SB28 is No, the process of step SB28 is skipped, and the CPU 31 ends the input image generation process.

  In step SB29, the CPU 31 changes the setting in accordance with the given instruction. That is, when a touch input is performed on any of the mode images 253 to 255, the CPU 31 shifts the edit mode to a mode corresponding to the mode image for which the touch input has been performed. When touch input is performed on the thickness change image 256, the CPU 31 changes the setting of the thickness of the line (trajectory) generated in the pen mode. Specifically, the CPU 31 displays a plurality of images of lines having different thicknesses, and allows the user to select a line having a desired thickness from among the plurality of lines having different thicknesses, so that the selected thickness is obtained. Change the line thickness setting. When touch input is performed on the color change image 257, the CPU 31 changes the color of the line (trajectory) generated in the pen mode. Specifically, the CPU 31 displays a plurality of images of a plurality of colors, causes the user to select a desired color from the plurality of colors, and changes the setting of the line color so that the selected color is obtained. After the end of step SB29, the CPU 31 ends the input image generation process.

  By the above step SB5, it is added to the real-time image (live image) based on the input to the touch panel. That is, the user can input an image on the captured image displayed on the lower LCD 12 (overlaid on the captured image). In the present embodiment, the process of adding an image drawn by the user or a seal image prepared in advance to the captured image has been described as an example. However, in an alternative embodiment, the CPU 31 performs a process of changing a real-time image. The process of distorting the captured image or the process of changing the facial expression when a human face image is included in the captured image (detecting a facial feature point by image recognition processing, A process of changing a position), a process of converting a captured image into an image that is line-symmetric with respect to a certain line, and the like may be executed.

Returning to the description of step SB20, in step SB6 subsequent to step SB5, the CPU 31 executes display processing for displaying a predetermined image on each of the LCDs 12 and 22. Specifically, the upper LCD 22 displays an image explaining how to operate the user like an image 252 shown in FIG. On the lower LCD 12, the captured image acquired in step SB1 is displayed, and the button images 253 to 261 are displayed (see FIG. 37). Furthermore, when an input image is generated and drawn in the input image generation process, the input image is displayed on the captured image (see FIG. 39). In the present embodiment, since the processing of steps SB1 to SB6 is repeatedly executed, the captured image is different every time. Therefore, the user can add an input image on the image captured in real time by the camera 23 or 25. Following step SB6, the process of step SB7 is executed.

  In step SB7, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a shooting instruction has been issued. In the present embodiment, the shooting instruction is performed by pressing a predetermined button (for example, the button 14I or the button 14J) or by performing an input on the touch panel 13 to touch an area where the shooting instruction image 260 is displayed. Done. In addition, you may make it image | photograph automatically at a predetermined timing by program processing. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB7, the CPU 31 determines whether the predetermined button has been pressed or an input for touching an area where the shooting instruction image 260 is displayed has been performed. Note that the determination in step SB7 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB2. If the determination result of step SB7 is Yes, the process of step SB8 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB7 is No, the process of step SB11 described later is executed.

  In step SB8, the CPU 31 fixes (freezes) the display contents (captured image and input image) currently displayed on the lower LCD 12. That is, the still image (the captured image and the input image displayed in step SB5) that is a live image at the time when the shooting instruction is given is continuously displayed on the lower LCD 12. Note that the period during which the still image is displayed may be a predetermined period set in advance, or may be a period until the display process of step SB6 is executed next. In an alternative embodiment, the process of step SB8 may not be executed. That is, a moving image of a live image may always be displayed on the lower LCD 12 without displaying a still image on the lower LCD 12 in accordance with an imaging instruction. Following step SB8, the process of step SB9 is executed.

  In step SB9, the CPU 31 stores the captured image and the input image currently displayed on the lower LCD 12. That is, the captured image data and the input image data displayed in step SB5 are stored in the storage data memory 34, for example. As a result, the user can save the captured image and the input image added on the captured image. The CPU 31 may store image data obtained by combining the captured image and the input image, or the image data of the captured image and the image data of the input image after associating the captured image with the input image. It may be stored separately. Following step SB9, the process of step SB10 is executed.

  In step SB10, the CPU 31 displays the image saved in step SB9 on the upper LCD 22. Note that the image displayed on the upper LCD 22 is continuously displayed until another shooting instruction is given (Yes again in Step SB7) and another stored image is displayed in Step SB10. As a modification, the image displayed on the upper LCD 22 may be displayed only for a predetermined period, or may be displayed until the display process of step SB6 is executed next. Further, after the display of the stored image is finished, an image explaining the operation method to the user (an operation explanation image as described above with reference to FIG. 37) may be displayed on the upper LCD 22. In the present embodiment, the display process is executed in step SB10 after the storage process is executed in step SB9. However, the order of the storage process and the display process may be first. That is, the CPU 31 may display an image saved by the shooting instruction on the upper LCD 22 in response to the shooting instruction, and is not limited to displaying the image saved by the shooting instruction. The image scheduled to be stored may be displayed. Following step SB10, the process of step SB11 is executed.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 when Step SB10 is executed. As shown in FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in response to a shooting instruction (shooting operation) being performed, an image 263 saved by the shooting instruction is displayed on the upper LCD 22 (step SB10). As a result, an image of the photographing result can be displayed on the upper LCD 22 that is a display screen facing a display direction (a direction that coincides with the photographing direction or a direction opposite to the photographing direction) corresponding to the photographing direction of the camera 23 or 25. . By displaying the image of the photographing result on the upper LCD 22, the image of the photographing result can be presented to the user so that the photographing direction can be easily understood. In this embodiment, the real-time image captured by the camera 23 or 25 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 whose display direction does not correspond to the shooting direction of the camera 23 or 25. Presenting an image to the user is particularly effective.

  In the present embodiment, the editing result before the shooting instruction is given is maintained even after the shooting instruction (after the image is stored). That is, as shown in FIG. 40, the input image 262 input before the shooting instruction is displayed on the lower LCD 12 so as to overlap the live image even after the shooting instruction. In an alternative embodiment, the editing result before the shooting instruction is given may be deleted according to the shooting instruction, and only the live image may be displayed on the lower LCD 12 after the shooting instruction. .

  Note that in an alternative embodiment, the image of the shooting result (stored image) may be displayed on the upper LCD 22 at any timing, not limited to the timing according to the shooting instruction. . For example, the CPU 31 may display a photographed image (either one or a plurality of images) on the upper LCD 22 in response to the user's instruction to browse the image, or an image that explains the operation method. Instead, the image of the photographing result may be always displayed on the upper LCD 22.

  In step SB11, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editing process. This determination is made based on whether or not the user has given an instruction to end the editing process. Specifically, the determination in step SB11 is made based on whether or not touch input has been performed on the region of the end image 259 displayed on the lower LCD 12. When the determination result of step SB11 is No, the CPU 31 executes the process of step SB1 again. Thereafter, the processing loop of steps SB1 to SB11 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step SB11 that the photographing process is to be ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB11 is Yes, the CPU 31 ends the photographing process shown in FIG.

  With the shooting process described above, the user can save an image captured by the camera in response to a shooting instruction. Here, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which has two display apparatuses, while displaying the image currently image | photographed on one display apparatus, the screen for demonstrating operation is displayed on the other. Thus, the user can perform the shooting operation while viewing the screen for explaining the operation in addition to the current captured image, and thus the easy-to-use game apparatus 10 can be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the touch panel 13 is provided on the lower LCD 12 to facilitate the operation.

In the present embodiment, the user can issue a shooting instruction by pressing the button 14I or the button 14J. By using the button 14I or the button 14J as a shutter button, the user can press the shutter button while holding the lower housing 11 with both hands. Note that in alternative embodiments, some of the buttons 14B-14E may be used as shutter buttons. Even in this case, as in the present embodiment, the user can press the shutter button while holding the lower housing 11 with both hands. In addition, some buttons of the direction input button A (for example, one direction input; for example, left input) and one of the buttons 14B to 14E (for example, the button 14D) are provided with a shutter button function. May be. In this way, both left-handed and right-handed users can easily operate the shutter button.

<Processing procedure (second form)>
In the above processing procedure (first form), the case where the user adds an input image to the image acquired in real time in the shooting process has been described as an example. However, in the shooting process, the image is captured by the game apparatus 10. The user may add an input image to the displayed image (still image). Hereinafter, a second form of the imaging process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the flow of the shooting process (part 2) in the multi-function shooting application in the game apparatus 10. When the power of the game apparatus 10 is turned on by pressing the power button 14F, the CPU 31 of the game apparatus 10 initializes the main memory 32 and the like, and then performs a shooting process shown in FIG. Start running. Note that the processing loop of steps SB31 to SB44 shown in FIG. 41 is executed at a rate of once every predetermined time (for example, 1/60 seconds) except during the execution of the editing process (step SB43).

  In step SB31 shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 31 acquires data of an image captured by the inner camera 23 or the outer camera 25. In the second embodiment, an image is captured only by one of the cameras 23 and 25. In step SB31, the CPU 31 acquires image data only from the one camera. In this modification, the camera that captures an image is set to the outer camera 25 at the start of the photographing process. Following step SB31, the process of step SB32 is executed.

  In step SB32, the CPU 31 executes a display process for displaying a predetermined image on each of the LCDs 12 and 22. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 in step SB32. As shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 31 displays a real-time image (captured image) 51 captured by the camera 23 or 25 on the upper LCD 22. That is, the image data acquired in step SB31 is output to the upper LCD 22. In the present modification, an image 272 indicating the current date is displayed on the upper LCD 22 so as to overlap the captured image 271.

  In the present modification, the main memory 32 stores magnification data indicating the magnification of the captured image displayed on the upper LCD 22. In step SB32, the captured image is displayed on the upper LCD 22 at the magnification indicated by the magnification data. That is, the CPU 31 determines a range to be displayed in the captured image according to the magnification, and displays the image in the determined range on the upper LCD 22 after being enlarged according to the size of the upper LCD 22 as necessary. At the start of the photographing process, the magnification data is set to indicate a predetermined magnification (for example, a magnification (1 ×) at which the entire captured image is displayed on the upper LCD 22). . The content of the magnification data is changed when a zoom change instruction to be described later is performed. Therefore, when the captured image is enlarged to be the upper LCD 22, only a part of the captured image may be displayed instead of the entire captured image.

  On the other hand, the CPU 31 displays an operation screen for operating the game apparatus 10 on the lower LCD 12. As shown in FIG. 42, the operation screen displayed in step SB32 includes saved images 273A to 273D and instruction images 274 to 278 for giving various instructions to the game apparatus 10 using the touch panel 13.

  The stored images 273A to 273D are images (referred to as stored images) that have been taken in the past by the game apparatus 10 and stored in the game apparatus 10 (or the memory card 28). In the present modification, a predetermined number (four in FIG. 42) of the stored images is displayed on the lower LCD 12. In the main memory 32, data indicating a saved image (display saved image) displayed on the lower LCD 12 is stored as display saved image data. The display saved image data is, for example, data indicating an ID given to the saved image. Further, in FIG. 42, the stored images 273A to 273D are displayed side by side in the order of the shooting date (and date and time). Here, the leftmost saved image 273A is an image taken at the oldest time, and the photographing times are in order of the second saved image 273B from the left, the second saved image 273C from the right, and the rightmost saved image 273D. It is new. In this modification, an instruction (edit instruction) for performing an editing process for editing a stored image can be performed by performing an input on the touch panel 13 for touching the displayed stored images 273A to 273D.

  Further, on the lower LCD 12, a shooting instruction image 274, a camera switching image 275, a zoom bar 276, a zoom cursor 277, and display change images 278A and 278B are displayed as the instruction images. The shooting instruction image 274 is an image for giving a shooting instruction using the touch panel 13. The shooting instruction is an instruction to cause the camera 23 or 25 of the game apparatus 10 to perform shooting. The camera switching image 275 is an image for performing a camera switching instruction using the touch panel 13. The camera switching instruction is an instruction to switch the camera to be imaged among the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25. The zoom bar 76 and the zoom cursor 277 are images for performing a zoom change instruction using the touch panel 13. The zoom change instruction is an instruction to enlarge / reduce the captured image displayed on the upper LCD 22. Display change images 278A and 278B are images for instructing display change. The display change instruction is an instruction to change a stored image displayed on the lower LCD 12 as the stored images 273A to 273D among the stored images stored in the game apparatus 10. The operation method of each instruction and the process executed by the game apparatus 10 according to each instruction will be described later.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 41, the process of step SB33 is executed after step SB32. In step SB33, the CPU 31 receives an input to each input device. That is, operation data is acquired from the operation button group 14 and touch position data is acquired from the touch panel 13. The acquired operation data and touch position data are stored in the main memory 32. Following step SB33, the process of step SB34 is executed.

  In step SB34, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a shooting instruction has been issued. In this modified example, the shooting instruction is performed by pressing a predetermined button (for example, the button 14I or the button 14J) or by performing an input on the touch panel 13 to touch an area where the shooting instruction image 274 is displayed. Done. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB34, the CPU 31 determines whether the predetermined button is pressed or an input for touching an area where the shooting instruction image 274 is displayed is performed. Note that the determination in step SB34 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB33. If the determination result of step SB34 is Yes, the process of step SB35 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB34 is No, the process of step SB36 described later is executed.

In step SB35, the CPU 31 performs a photographing process, that is, stores (saves) the image data acquired from the camera in step SB31 in the saving data memory 34. In an alternative embodiment, the CPU 31 displays the image data acquired from the camera in step SB31 on any of the LCDs 12 and 22, and confirms with the user whether or not to save the image data. May be. The image data may be stored (saved) in the save data memory 34 only when the user gives an instruction to save the image data. In an alternative embodiment, the CPU 31 may store the captured image data in the memory card 28, or store it in the apparatus main body (save data memory 34) or in the memory card 28. You may make it make a user specify. After step SB35, the process of step SB42 described later is executed.

  On the other hand, in step SB36, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a camera switching instruction has been issued. In this modification, the camera switching instruction is input by pressing a predetermined button (for example, the button 14B, the button 14C, the button 14D, or the button 14E) or touching an area where the camera switching image 275 is displayed. This is performed by performing the operation on the touch panel 13. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB36, the CPU 31 determines whether the predetermined button has been pressed or an input for touching an area where the camera switching image 275 is displayed. Note that the determination in step SB36 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB33. If the determination result of step SB36 is Yes, the process of step SB37 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB36 is No, a process of step SB38 described later is executed.

  In step SB37, the CPU 31 switches the camera that captures an image. That is, when the camera that captures an image is the inner camera 23, the camera that captures an image is changed to the outer camera 25, and when the camera that captures an image is the outer camera 25, The camera that performs imaging is changed to the inner camera 23. Specifically, the CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop the operation to one of the cameras 23 and 25 that is capturing an image, and also captures the other camera. To that effect (imaging execution instruction). When the process of step SB37 is executed, in step SB31 performed next, image data captured by the camera after switching is acquired by the CPU 31, and in step SB32 performed next, the data was captured by the camera after switching. An image is displayed on the upper LCD 22. After step SB37, the process of step SB42 described later is executed.

  On the other hand, in step SB38, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a zoom change instruction has been issued. In this modification, the zoom change instruction is performed by moving the zoom cursor 277 up and down on the zoom bar 276 by an input to a predetermined button (for example, the upper button or the lower button of the direction input button 14A) or the touch panel 13. Specifically, the zoom cursor 277 moves up by a predetermined distance in response to the upper button of the direction input button 14A being pressed, and the predetermined distance in response to the lower button of the direction input button 14A being pressed. Just move down. The user can move the zoom cursor 277 up and down by first touching the screen area where the zoom cursor 277 is displayed and performing an operation on the touch panel 13 while moving the touch position up and down. . Therefore, in the determination process of step SB38, the CPU 31 determines whether the predetermined button has been pressed or whether an operation for moving the zoom cursor 277 has been performed on the touch panel 13. Note that the determination in step SB38 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB33. If the determination result of step SB38 is Yes, the process of step SB39 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB38 is No, the process of step SB40 described later is executed.

In step SB39, the CPU 31 enlarges / reduces the captured image displayed on the upper LCD 22 according to the zoom change instruction. That is, when an instruction to move the zoom cursor 277 upward is made, the content of the magnification data stored in the main memory 32 is changed so that the magnification is reduced. As a result, in the next step SB32, the captured image is reduced and displayed as compared with the previous step SB32. On the other hand, when an instruction to move the zoom cursor 277 downward is given, the content of the magnification data stored in the main memory 32 is changed so that the magnification is increased. As a result, in the next step SB32, the captured image is enlarged and displayed as compared with the previous step SB32. After step SB39, the process of step SB42 described later is executed.

  On the other hand, in step SB40, the CPU 31 determines whether a display change instruction has been issued. In the present modification, the display change instruction is performed by pressing a predetermined button (for example, the left button or the right button of the direction input button 14A), or the region where the display change image 278A is displayed and the display change image 278B are displayed. This is performed by performing an input on the touch panel 13 for touching any one of the areas. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB40, the CPU 31 has pressed the predetermined button, or has an input for touching either the area where the display change image 278A is displayed or the display change image 278B is made? Determine. The determination at step SB40 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 at step SB33. If the determination result of step SB40 is Yes, the process of step SB41 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB40 is No, processing of step SB42 described later is executed.

  In step SB41, the CPU 31 changes a stored image (displayed stored image) displayed on the lower LCD 12 among the stored images. Specifically, when the right button of the direction input button 14A is pressed or the display change image 278B is touched, the display save image is shifted by one image to the new one. That is, the image captured at the earliest time among the current four display storage images is deleted from the display storage image. Furthermore, the saved image taken after the image taken at the latest time among the current four displayed saved images is added as a new saved display image. On the other hand, when the left button of the direction input button 14A is pressed or the display change image 278A is touched, the display storage image is shifted by one image to the older one. That is, the image captured at the newest time among the current four display storage images is deleted from the display storage image. In addition, a saved image taken immediately before the image taken at the oldest time among the current four displayed saved images is added as a new displayed saved image. In the main memory 32, data indicating the display storage image after the change in step SB40 is stored as new display storage image data. After step SB41, the process of step SB42 described later is executed.

  In step SB42, the CPU 31 determines whether an editing instruction has been issued. In this modification, the editing instruction is performed by performing an input on the touch panel 13 for touching the display area of the stored image to be edited among the displayed stored images 273A to 273D. Therefore, in the determination process of step SB42, the CPU 31 determines whether an input for touching any of the areas where the stored images 273A to 273D are displayed has been performed. Note that the determination in step SB42 can be made by referring to the operation data and touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB33. If the determination result of step SB42 is Yes, the process of step SB43 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB42 is No, a process of step SB44 described later is executed.

  In step SB43, the CPU 31 executes an editing process. The editing process is a process for editing a saved image. Hereinafter, the saved image to be edited is referred to as an edited image. Details of the editing process will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the flow of the editing process (step SB43) shown in FIG. In the editing process, first, in step SB51, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the current editing mode is the pen mode. Here, in this modification, three modes of a pen mode, a seal mode, and an eraser mode are prepared in advance in the editing process. In the pen mode, an image of the input trajectory input to the touch panel 13 can be added to the edited image. In the seal mode, a prepared seal image can be added to the edited image. In the eraser mode, an image added in the pen mode or the seal mode can be erased. In this modification, it is assumed that the editing mode is set to the pen mode at the start of the editing process. If the determination result of step SB51 is Yes, the process of step SB52 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB51 is No, the process of step SB58 described later is executed.

  In steps SB52 to SB57, processing in the pen mode is executed. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 in the pen mode of editing processing. As shown in FIG. 44, an operation screen (editing screen) for editing is displayed on the lower LCD 12 during the editing process. Specifically, a part or all of the edited image 281 is displayed on the lower LCD 12. The edited image 281 is a saved image to be edited, that is, a saved image designated by touch input among the saved images 273A to 273D shown in FIG. The lower LCD 12 displays images 284 to 290 for performing various operations. Details of operations using these images 284 to 290 will be described later. On the other hand, during the editing process, the entire edited image 281 is displayed on the upper LCD 22 as shown in FIG. A dotted line area 282 shown in FIG. 44 indicates an area displayed on the lower LCD 12 in the edited image 281. Such an image of the dotted line region 282 may or may not be displayed on the upper LCD 22. Note that since the real-time image captured by the camera 23 or 25 is not displayed during the editing process, the CPU 31 may instruct the cameras 23 and 25 not to perform the imaging operation. Hereinafter, the details of the processing in the pen mode (steps SB52 to SB57) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step SB52, the CPU 31 receives an input to the touch panel 13. That is, touch position data is acquired from the touch panel 13. The acquired touch position data is stored in the main memory 32. Following step SB52, the process of step SB53 is executed.

  In step SB53, the CPU 31 displays an image of the input locus 83 in response to an input on the touch panel 13. That is, when touch input is performed on the area of the edited image 281 by the touch panel 13, an image of the input locus 283 is displayed. The input locus 283 is an image showing a locus of a position where touch input by the touch panel 13 is performed. Specifically, when the touch position data acquired in step SB52 indicates a position in the area where the edited image 281 is displayed, the CPU 31 adds the image of the input locus 283 to the position of the edited image 281. Then, the edited image 281 with the added image is displayed on each LCD 12 and 22. During the pen mode, the processing loop of steps SB51 to SB56 is repeated once every predetermined time (one frame time (1/60 seconds)), so the processing of steps SB52 and SB53 is repeated during the pen mode. It is. Therefore, when the user continuously inputs the touch panel 13 to draw a locus, an image of the input locus 283 is generated and displayed so as to show the locus. Note that the generation / display processing of the input locus 283 in step SB53 is executed only when a touch input is performed on the area of the edited image 281, and when the touch input is not performed and other than the edited image 281. This is not executed when a touch input is made to the area. Following step SB53, the process of step SB54 is executed.

  In step SB54, the CPU 31 performs enlargement / reduction processing of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. This enlargement / reduction process is executed when a magnification change instruction is given, that is, when an input is made on the area of the magnification change instruction image 289 displayed on the lower LCD 12 by the touch panel 13. Note that the magnification change instruction image 289 is an image for instructing enlargement / reduction of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. In step SB54, when the touch position data acquired in step SB52 indicates a position in the area where the magnification change instruction image 289 is displayed, the CPU 31 sets the magnification for displaying the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. Switch. In this modification, the magnification for displaying the edited image 281 is, for example, three levels, and the CPU 31 changes the magnification in the order of small magnification, medium magnification, and large magnification each time a magnification change instruction is issued. In addition, when a magnification change instruction is issued when the magnification is high, the magnification is changed to a low magnification. As described above, when a magnification change instruction is issued by the user, the magnification of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12 is changed. Note that the magnification change process in step SB54 is executed only when a touch input is performed on the area of the magnification change instruction image 289, and when the input to the touch panel 13 is not performed, and the magnification change instruction image When a touch input is made to an area other than 289, it is not executed. Following step SB54, the process of step SB55 is executed.

  In step SB55, the CPU 31 performs a process for moving the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. This movement process is executed when a movement instruction is performed, that is, when a touch input is performed on the area of the movement instruction image 290 displayed on the lower LCD 12. The movement instruction image 290 is an image for giving an instruction to move (scroll) the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. In step SB55, when the touch position data acquired in step SB52 indicates a position within the area where the movement instruction image 290 is displayed, the CPU 31 scrolls and displays the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. . In the present modification, as shown in FIG. 44, the movement instruction image 290 includes images indicating the four directions of up, down, left and right (triangular images in FIG. 44). When a touch input is performed on any region of the image, the CPU 31 scrolls the edited image 281 in a direction corresponding to the image on which the touch input is performed. Note that the movement process in step SB55 is executed only when a touch input is performed on the area of the movement instruction image 290, and when the input on the touch panel 13 is not performed, and the area other than the movement instruction image 290 It is not executed when touch input is performed. Following step SB55, the process of step SB56 is executed.

In step SB56, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the edit mode. This determination is made based on whether or not a mode change instruction has been issued by the user. Specifically, the determination in step SB56 is based on whether or not a touch input is performed on any of the areas of the pen mode image 284, the eraser mode image 285, and the seal mode image 286 displayed on the lower LCD 12. Done. The pen mode image 284 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editing mode to the pen mode. The eraser mode image 285 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the eraser mode. The seal mode image 286 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edit mode to the seal mode. In step SB56, the CPU 31 determines that the position indicated by the touch position data acquired in step SB52 is a position within an area where any one of the pen mode image 284, the eraser mode image 285, and the seal mode image 286 is displayed. It is determined that the determination result is Yes. Then, the editing mode is changed to a mode corresponding to the input image. On the other hand, if the position indicated by the touch position data is not a position in the area where any of the pen mode image 284, the eraser mode image 285, and the seal mode image 286 is displayed, it is determined that the determination result is No. In this case, the edit mode is not changed. Step S
When the determination result of B56 is Yes, the process of step SB51 is executed again. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB56 is No, the process of step SB57 is executed.

  In step SB57, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editing process. This determination is made based on whether or not the user has given an instruction to end the editing process. Specifically, the determination in step SB57 is performed based on whether or not a touch input has been performed on any area of the stop instruction image 287 and the completion instruction image 288 displayed on the lower LCD 12. The stop instruction image 287 is an image for giving an instruction to stop the editing process. The completion instruction image 288 is an image for giving an instruction to complete the editing process. In step SB57, if the position indicated by the touch position data acquired in step SB52 is a position in the area where either the stop instruction image 287 or the completion instruction image 288 is displayed, the determination result is Yes. It is judged that. On the other hand, if the position indicated by the touch position data is not a position in the area where either the stop instruction image 287 or the completion instruction image 288 is displayed, it is determined that the determination result is No. If the determination result of step SB57 is Yes, the process of step SB72 described later is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB57 is No, the process of step SB52 is executed again.

  As described above, the processing in the pen mode (steps SB52 to SB57) is repeated until the determination result in step SB56 is Yes or the determination result in step SB57 is No. In addition, when the user inputs a locus to the touch panel 13 during the pen mode, an image of the input locus 283 is added to the edited image (see FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, in step SB58, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the current editing mode is the seal mode. When the determination result of step SB58 is Yes (that is, when the current editing mode is the seal mode), the process of step SB59 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB58 is No (that is, when the current edit mode is the eraser mode), the process of step SB66 described later is executed.

  In steps SB59 to SB65, processing in the seal mode is executed. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of images displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 in the seal mode of the editing process. As shown in FIG. 45, the edit image 281 is displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 in the seal mode as in the pen mode, and images 264 to 270 for performing various operations are displayed on the lower LCD 12. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the process (steps SB59 to SB65) in the seal mode will be described.

  In step SB59, the CPU 31 selects a seal image to be added to the edited image 281. The selection of the seal image is performed by the user specifying a desired seal image from among the seal images stored in advance in the main memory 32, the storage data memory 34, or the memory card 28. When a sticker image is selected in step SB59, the selected sticker image is added to a predetermined position (for example, the center position) of the edited image 281. As a result, the seal image 291 is added to the edited image 281 and displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 (FIG. 45). Following step SB59, the process of step SB60 is executed.

In step SB60, the CPU 31 receives an input to the touch panel 13. The process at step SB60 is the same as the process at step SB52. In subsequent step SB61, the CPU 31 moves the sticker image 291 on the edited image 281 in accordance with an input to the touch panel 13. The movement operation of the sticker image 291 is performed by the same operation as the zoom change instruction (step SB38) described above. That is, the user can move the sticker image 291 by first touching the area where the sticker image 291 is displayed, and performing an operation on the touch panel 13 while shifting the touch position. The CPU 31 can detect the movement operation of the sticker image 291 by referring to the touch position data stored in the main memory 32 in step SB60. It should be noted that the movement process of the sticker image 291 in step SB61 is executed only when an operation for moving the sticker image 291 is performed, and when an input to the touch panel 13 is not performed and an operation other than the operation is performed. It will not be executed if. Following step SB61, the process of step SB62 is executed.

  In step SB62, the CPU 31 performs enlargement / reduction processing of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. The process at step SB62 is the same as the process at step SB54. In addition, in the seal mode, when the magnification of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12 is changed, the seal image 291 is also enlarged / reduced as the edited image 281 is enlarged / reduced, and the size and the seal of the edited image 281 are displayed. The ratio with the size of the image 291 does not change. In the subsequent step SB63, the CPU 31 performs a process for moving the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12. The process at step SB63 is the same as the process at step SB55. Following step SB63, the process of step SB64 is executed.

  In step SB64, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the edit mode. The process at step SB64 is the same as the process at step SB56. If the determination result of step SB64 is Yes, the process of step SB51 is executed again. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SB64 is No, the process of step SB65 is executed.

  In step SB65, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editing process. The process at step SB65 is the same as the process at step SB57. When the determination result of step SB65 is Yes, the process of step SB72 described later is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB65 is No, the process of step SB60 is executed again.

  As described above, the process in the seal mode (steps SB60 to SB65) is repeated until the determination result in step SB64 becomes Yes or the determination result in step SB65 becomes No. Further, during the seal mode, the seal image 291 is added to the edited image 281, and the user can place the seal image at a desired position by an input to the touch panel 13.

  On the other hand, if the determination result in step SB58 is No, that is, if the current edit mode is the eraser mode, the processes in steps SB66 to SB71 are executed. In the eraser mode, as in the pen mode and the seal mode, the edited images 281 are displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22, and the images 264 to 270 for performing various operations are displayed on the lower LCD 12. In the eraser mode, the input locus 283 and the sticker image 291 added during the period from the start of the editing process to the transition to the eraser mode are displayed on the LCDs 12 and 22 together with the edited image 281.

In step SB66, the CPU 31 receives an input to the touch panel 13. The process at step SB66 is the same as the process at step SB52. In the subsequent step SB67, the CPU 31 erases the image of the input locus 283 or the seal image 291 on the edited image 281 in accordance with the input to the touch panel 13. Specifically, when the touch position data acquired in step SB66 indicates the position in the area where the input trajectory 283 or the seal image 291 added to the edited image 281 is displayed, the CPU 31 Delete the image attached to the position. Then, the edited image 281 from which the image has been deleted is displayed on each LCD 12 and 22. It should be noted that the image erasing process in step SB67 is executed only when a touch input is performed on the area of the input locus 283 or the sticker image 291, and when the input to the touch panel 13 is not performed, and the input locus When a touch input is performed on an area other than 283 and the seal image 291, it is not executed. Following step SB67, the process of step SB68 is executed.

  In step SB68, the CPU 31 performs enlargement / reduction processing of the edited image 281 displayed on the lower LCD 12, and in step SB69, performs processing for moving the edited image 281. Steps SB68 and SB69 are the same as steps SB54 and SB55.

  In subsequent step SB70, CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the edit mode. The process of step SB70 is the same as the process of step SB56. If the determination result of step SB70 is Yes, the process of step SB51 is executed again. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB70 is No, the process of step SB71 is executed.

  In step SB71, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editing process. The process at step SB71 is the same as the process at step SB57. If the determination result of step SB71 is Yes, the process of step SB72 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step SB71 is No, the process of step SB66 is executed again.

  As described above, the processing in the eraser mode (steps SB66 to SB71) is repeated until the determination result of step SB640 becomes Yes or the determination result of step SB71 becomes No. Further, during the eraser mode, the image of the input locus 283 and the seal image 291 are erased in response to an input to the touch panel 13.

  If it is determined in step SB57, SB65, or SB71 that the editing process is to be terminated, the process of step SB72 is executed. In step SB72, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to save the edited image 281 edited by the editing process. This determination is made based on whether or not a touch input has been made to any region of the stop instruction image 287 and the completion instruction image 288 based on the touch position data acquired in step SB52, SB60, or SB66. That is, when a touch input is performed on the area of the stop instruction image 287, the CPU 31 determines that the editing process is stopped, that is, the edited image is not saved. On the other hand, when a touch input is performed on the area of the completion instruction image 288, the CPU 31 determines that the editing process is completed, that is, the edited image is saved. If the determination result of step SB72 is Yes, the process of step SB73 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SB72 is No, the CPU 31 skips the process of step SB73 and ends the editing process shown in FIG.

  In step SB73, the CPU 31 saves (stores) the edited image 281 in the save data memory 34. Note that the edited image 281 may be saved by overwriting the saved image before editing processing, may be saved separately from the saved image before editing processing, or may be saved by overwriting or saved separately. You may make it make a user select whether to do. Further, the storage location of the edited image 281 may be the memory card 28 instead of the storage data memory 34. After step SB73, the CPU 31 ends the editing process shown in FIG.

  According to the editing process described above, the user can add a character or a picture to the edited image by performing an input of drawing a locus on the touch panel 13. Further, the seal image can be added to a desired position on the edited image.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41, the processing of step SB44 is executed after the editing processing (step SB43). In step SB44, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the photographing process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power button 14F has been pressed. When the determination result of step SB44 is No, the CPU 31 executes the process of step SB31 again. Thereafter, the processing loop of steps SB31 to SB44 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step SB44 that the photographing process is to be terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of step SB44 is affirmative, the CPU 31 ends the photographing process shown in FIG.

  With the shooting process described above, the user can save an image captured by the camera in response to a shooting instruction. Here, in this modification, it is set as the structure which has two display apparatuses, While displaying the image currently image | photographed on one display apparatus, the operation screen and the image image | photographed in the past are displayed on the other. Thus, the user can perform a shooting operation while looking at the operation screen and an image captured in the past in addition to the current captured image displayed on the upper LCD 22, and therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-use game apparatus 10. Can do. Further, in the present modification, the touch panel 13 is provided on the lower LCD 12 to facilitate the operation.

<Calendar function>
Next, a calendar function that is activated when a touch input is made to the calendar button 106 in the image displayed in the multi-function shooting process shown in FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed in the calendar process according to the present embodiment. The image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on the upper LCD 22 while the image displayed in the multi-function shooting process shown in FIG. 31 is displayed on the lower LCD 12. When touch input is performed on the calendar button 106, the image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 with a display effect of moving from the upper LCD 22 to the lower LCD 12.

  As shown in FIG. 46, various buttons 302, 303, 304, and 305 are displayed on the lower LCD 12 in addition to the calendar image 306 for one month. When touch input is performed on any date included in the calendar image 306, a captured image or an input memo captured on the touch input date is stored in the main memory 32, the storage data memory 34, If the image is stored in any one of the memory cards 28, the corresponding captured image and / or memo is read out and displayed on the upper LCD 22.

  Scroll buttons 304 and 305 are button images for selecting a calendar image 306 to be displayed. That is, when a touch input is made to the scroll button 304 or 305, the year and month displayed as the calendar image 306 are sequentially changed.

  The memo button 303 is a button image for performing an operation of storing a memo input by the user in the storage data memory 34 or the like in association with a specified date. That is, when a touch input is made to the memo button 303, the screen switches to a memo content reception screen (not shown), and the user uses the touch pen 27 or the like on the memo content reception screen to select an arbitrary character or figure. Can be entered.

An end button 302 is a button image for performing an operation to end the calendar process. That is, when a touch input is made to the end button 302, the calendar process is completed, and the image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on the upper LCD 22 with a display effect of moving from the lower LCD 12 to the upper LCD 22. Will come to be. At substantially the same time, the image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed again on the lower LCD 12.

[8. Image communication function]
<Overview>
Next, processing provided by the image communication program executed when the communication application program 55 is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55. First, prior to describing specific processing operations, examples of display forms displayed on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 by executing the image communication process, connection examples with other devices, and the like will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining an example of an image communication system to which a plurality of game apparatuses 10 are connected. 48 and 49 are diagrams showing screen display examples respectively displayed on the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 of the game apparatus 10 in the previous stage in which the transmission side or the reception side is determined. FIGS. 50 to 54 are screen display examples respectively displayed on the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 of the transmitting game device 10t1 and the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3 in the first to fifth stages of the communication application program, respectively. FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example at the time of disconnection of communication displayed on the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 of the transmitting game device 10t1 and the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3, respectively.

  In FIG. 47, a plurality of game apparatuses 10 transmit and receive image data such as photographs (captured images) via wireless communication. As described above, the game apparatus 10 can wirelessly communicate with another game apparatus 10 using the wireless communication module 38 or the local communication module 39. Here, the local communication module 39 is used to perform predetermined communication. An example in which wireless communication is performed with the same type of game device using the above communication method is used. For the sake of specific explanation, game devices 10t1 to 10t3 shown in FIG. 47 are transmitting game devices 10t that transmit image data, and game devices 10r1 to 10r3 receive image data. It is assumed that the device 10r.

  In the present embodiment, the user is allowed to select whether to be the image data transmitting side or the receiving side when executing the image communication application program. That is, whether to operate as a transmission-side game device or a reception-side game device is determined according to the user's selection. Note that the transmission-side device that executes only the transmission-side program and the reception-side device that executes only the reception-side program may be different devices.

  The transmission-side game device 10t includes a game device 10t1 in which “Ichiro” is a user, a game device 10t2 in which “Taro” is a user, and a game device 10t3 in which “Hanako” is a user. Has been. Further, the receiving game device 10r includes a game device 10r1 in which “Jiro” is a user, a game device 10r2 in which “Saburo” is a user, and a game device in which “Shiro” is a user. 10r3. In this case, a signal (transmission source data) indicating that the own device is the transmission source of the image data is transmitted from each of the transmission game devices 10t1 to 10t3 by broadcast. An example in which the users “Jiro”, “Saburo”, and “Shiro” respectively receive image data from a plurality of game devices 10t on the transmission side by using the game device 10t1 in which “Ichiro” is the user as a transmission source. Will be explained. “Ichiro”, “Taro”, etc. are user names respectively stored in the game apparatus 10 main body, and can be arbitrarily set by the user. It is stored in the memory 34 or the like.

  First, in each game device 10, for example, information for inquiring the user whether to use the main body storage memory (for example, the storage data memory 34) or the memory card (for example, the memory card 28) is displayed on the lower LCD 12, for example. (FIG. 48). The user of the game apparatus 10 can select which storage medium to use by touching any of the options displayed on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13.

  Next, in each game device 10, for example, information for inquiring the user whether to transmit a photo to another game device or to receive a photo from another game device is displayed on the lower LCD 12 (FIG. 49). . Then, the user of the game apparatus 10 becomes the transmission source (for example, the transmission-side game apparatuses 10t1 to 10t3) by touching any of the options displayed on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, respectively. It can be selected whether it becomes a receiving destination (for example, the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the receiving side).

  The reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3 indicate that, for example, the lower-side LCD 12 is currently searching for the transmission-source game device 10t until the transmission-source data is received from the transmission-side game device 10t. For example, the text information “Looking for a partner to receive a photo ...” is displayed (the right diagram in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the transmission-side game device 10t1 recruits the image data reception request from the reception-side game device 10 by transmitting the transmission source data, for example, the lower-side LCD 12 is currently searching for the reception-target game device 10r. A message indicating that it is present (for example, text information stating “Looking for a partner to give a picture ...”) is displayed (the left figure in FIG. 50).

  Next, when the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3 receive the transmission source data from the transmission game devices 10t1 to 10t3, for example, the user of the transmission game device 10t that has received the transmission data on the lower LCD 12 Information indicating the name is displayed. For example, in the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 51, the user names Nt1 to Nt3 of the transmitting game devices 10t1 to 10t3 are displayed on the lower LCD 12 of the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3, respectively. The user of the game device 10r1 to 10r3 on the receiving side touches any one of the user names Nt1 to Nt3 displayed on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, respectively, so that one of the game devices 10t1 to 10t3 on the transmission side One device can be selected as the source device. Then, any of the transmission-side game devices 10t1 to 10t3 selected from the reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3 in response to the user of the reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3 performing an operation of selecting the transmission source device. The receiver data indicating the reception request is transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the game device 10t1 on the transmission side receives the reception destination data from the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side, for example, the lower LCD 12 indicates the user name of the game device 10r that has received the reception destination data. Information is displayed. For example, in the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 51, the user names Nr1 to Nr3 of the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3 that are requesting reception are displayed on the lower LCD 12 of the transmitting game device 10t1. Here, the transmission-side game device 10t1 of the present embodiment has no authority to select a reception-side device from the displayed plurality of reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3, and the displayed reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3. It is possible to select whether to transmit image data to all or to stop transmission. For example, the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side can shift to the image transmission process by touching the operation button icon Bs displayed as “Start” on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13.

Next, the transmitting game device 10t1 selects an image to be transmitted from images stored in a memory (for example, the storage data memory 34) or a memory card (for example, the memory card 28) in the main body of the game device 10t1. Perform processing to select. Typically, an image captured by the game device 10t1 is a transmission target, but another image (for example, an image received from another device or an image stored other than shooting) may be a transmission target. . For example, in the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 52, thumbnails of images stored in the storage data memory 34 or the memory card 28 of the game apparatus 10t1 are displayed in the thumbnail display area At of the lower LCD 12. The thumbnails displayed in the thumbnail display area At are displayed by scrolling left or right by touching the scroll button icon Bl or Br via the touch panel 13. Then, the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side can select a thumbnail image surrounded by the cursor C displayed on the lower LCD 12 as an image to be transmitted. At this time, the thumbnail image IM surrounded by the cursor C (that is, the image to be transmitted) is displayed on the upper LCD 22. Then, the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side touches the operation button icon Bt displayed as “Raise” on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, and thereby the image of the image IM currently being transmitted is displayed. Data can be transmitted. Note that the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side can end the image transmission process itself by touching the operation button icon Bf displayed as “End” on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13.

  On the other hand, in the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side, the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side selects the image on the lower LCD 12, for example, while the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side selects the image to be transmitted. (For example, text information stating “Waiting for the other party to select a photo ...”) is displayed (right diagram in FIG. 52).

  Next, the game device 10t1 on the transmission side receives the image data of the image IM selected as the transmission target from the images stored in the memory or the memory card in the main body of the game device 10t1, and receives the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side. Respectively. At this time, the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side displays that the image IM selected from the game device 10t1 is being transmitted to the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side. For example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 53, the image IM being transmitted is displayed on the upper LCD 22, and the character information described as “I'm raising a photo ...” is displayed on the lower LCD 12.

  On the other hand, the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3 are receiving image data from the transmitting game device 10t1, for example, on the lower LCD 12 while the image data is being transmitted from the transmitting game device 10t1 (for example, , "Character information written as" I'm getting a photo ... "is displayed (right figure in Fig. 53).

Next, when the reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3 finish receiving the image data transmitted from the transmission-side game device 10t1, for example, the image IM indicated by the image data received from the transmission-source game device 10t1 on the upper LCD 22 And prompts the user to select whether to receive image data from the game apparatus 10t1. For example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 54, the received image IM is displayed on the upper LCD 22, and the character information indicating “I received a photo. Do you want to receive more?” Is displayed on the lower LCD 12. . The users of the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the receiving side touch the operation button icon By displayed on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, respectively, to the game device 10t1 that is the transmission source. In addition, it is possible to request reception of image data. In this case, the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side wait for the screen described with reference to the right diagram of FIG. 52 to be displayed and the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side to select the image to be transmitted again. Become. In addition, the users of the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the receiving side touch the operation button icon Bn displayed “No” on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, respectively, thereby stopping the subsequent image data reception. Thus, communication with the game device 10t1 as the transmission source can be terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission-side game device 10t1 completes the transmission of the image data to the reception-side game devices 10r1 to 10r3, for example, the transmission-side game device 10t1 posts the image IM that has been transmitted to the upper LCD 22 and the reception-side game device 10r1. In 10r3, a message indicating that whether or not to receive image data is being selected is displayed. For example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 54, the image IM that has been transmitted is displayed on the upper LCD 22, and the text information “I am thinking about whether or not the other party is still receiving” is displayed on the lower LCD 12. The When receiving information about whether or not to receive image data from all of the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3, further receiving image data from at least one of the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3. When the requested reception request is received, the screen described with reference to the left diagram of FIG. 52 is displayed, and the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side selects the image to be transmitted again.

  Here, when the user of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side and / or the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side performs an operation for ending the image transmission process, for example, the bottom of each game device 10 as shown in FIG. On the side LCD 12, information for inquiring the user whether to send a photo to another game device or to receive a photo from another game device is displayed, and the above-described processing is repeated. When all of the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3 have finished receiving in the transmitting game device 10t1, or when the sending game device 10t1 has finished sending in the receiving game devices 10r1 to 10r3, communication is performed. A message indicating that has been disconnected is displayed. For example, as shown in the left and right diagrams of FIG. 55, when communication is disconnected, the communication is disconnected on the lower LCD 12 of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side and the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side, for example. "Is displayed. Then, the users of the game device 10t1 on the transmission side and the game devices 10r1 to 10r3 on the reception side touch the operation button icon By displayed on the lower LCD 12 via the touch panel 13, respectively. Returning to the initial stage of the transmission process, a new image transmission process is started.

<Data structure>
Next, various data used when executing the image communication application program will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of various data stored in the main memory 32 in response to executing the image communication application program.

  56, the main memory 32 stores temporary data generated in the program and processing read from the memory card 28, the memory card 29, and the storage data memory 34. 56, operation data Da, identification data Db, user data Dc, transmission source data Dd, reception destination data De, image data Df, and the like are stored in the data storage area of the main memory 32. The program storage area of the main memory 32 stores various program groups Pa composed of image communication application programs and the like.

  The operation data Da is touch coordinate data (touch coordinate data) indicating the touch position TP in the screen coordinate system where the player is touching the touch panel 13, and data (operation) indicating a state where the player is operating the operation button group 14. Button data) is stored. For example, the touch coordinate data and the operation button data are acquired every time unit (for example, 1/60 second) in which the game apparatus 10 performs a game process, and stored and updated in the operation data Da according to the acquisition.

  In the identification data Db, data indicating a unique identification number for identifying the game apparatus 10 is stored. For example, data indicating the own device ID preset in the preset data memory 35 of the game apparatus 10 is stored in the identification data Db. As the own device ID, a serial number unique in the manufacturing factory may be stored, or identification information randomly generated by the game apparatus 10 may be stored.

  The user data Dc stores data indicating a user name preset by the user of the game apparatus 10. For example, the user name input by the user is described in the preset data memory 35 or the like of the game apparatus 10, and data indicating the user name is stored in the user data Dc.

  The transmission source data Dd stores data indicating an identification number and a user name of the game apparatus 10 that is a transmission source when image data is transmitted and received. The reception destination data De stores data indicating the identification number and user name of the game apparatus 10 that is a reception destination when image data is transmitted and received.

  The image data Df includes transmission image data Df1, reception image data Df2, operation image data Df3, and the like. The transmission image data Df1 temporarily stores image data of the image when the image is transmitted to another game apparatus 10. The received image data Df2 temporarily stores the image data of the image when the image is received from another game apparatus 10. The operation image data Df3 is image data indicating operation buttons for operating the game apparatus 10 and information for notifying the user.

<Processing procedure>
Next, a specific processing operation by the image communication application program executed on the game apparatus 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example in which the game apparatus 10 performs image communication processing by executing the image communication application program. FIG. 58 is a subroutine showing the detailed operation of the image transmission process executed in step SC52 of FIG. FIG. 59 is a subroutine showing the detailed operation of the image reception process executed in step SC53 of FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of signals transmitted and received between the transmission source game device 10t and the reception destination game device 10r. The program for executing these processes is included in the program stored in the storage data memory 34, and is stored via the memory control circuit 33 when the power of the game apparatus 10 is turned on. The data is read from the main data memory 34 to the main memory 32 and executed by the CPU 31. In the present embodiment, the image communication application program is stored in the storage data memory 34 in advance, but the program may be downloaded to the game apparatus 10 via the Internet or the like. Further, the program may be read from a program stored in the memory card 28 or the memory card 29 and executed.

  First, when the power supply (power button 14F) of the game apparatus 10 is turned on, a boot program (not shown) is executed by the CPU 31, thereby selecting a plurality of application programs stored in the storage data memory 34. A launcher program, which is a program to be executed automatically, is loaded into the main memory 32 and executed by the CPU 31. Thereafter, the image communication application program is loaded into the main memory 32 by selecting and executing the image communication application on the launcher program. Then, the loaded image communication application program is executed by the CPU 31.

The image communication application program according to the present embodiment includes not only an image communication function but also a shooting function and a shot image display function for displaying a shot image. The user can selectively execute each function by an operation using a touch panel or buttons. Here, when the shooting function is selected, an image captured by the currently selected camera among the inner camera 23 and the outer camera 25 is displayed on the lower LCD 12 in real time. In this state, the photographing process is executed by operating the L button 14I or the R button 14J, and the selection is made between the main body storage memory (for example, the storage data memory 34) or the memory card (for example, the memory card 28). The captured image is stored in the stored storage medium. Note that the photographed image may be displayed on the lower LCD 12 immediately after photographing. When the photographed image display function is selected, images desired by the user are displayed one by one or in a list from the photographed images stored in the selected storage medium of the main body storage memory or the memory card. Can do. Further, the user selects whether to use the main unit storage memory or the memory card before selecting each function, and the storage means selected here stores the captured image storage destination and the captured image display in the shooting function. It becomes a reading source of the image displayed in the function. In the image communication function, the reading source of the image transmitted by the transmitting side and the storage destination of the image received by the receiving side are also the storage means selected here. When the user selects and executes the image communication function, the processes after step SC51 shown in FIG. 57 are executed.

  In FIG. 57, the CPU 31 determines whether to use a memory (for example, the storage data memory 34) in the main body or a memory card (for example, the memory card 28) in the subsequent processing based on the operation data Da. (Step SC50). For example, on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 of the game apparatus 10, a display prompting the user to select whether to use the main body storage memory or the memory card is performed (see FIG. 48). Then, in response to the user performing an operation of selecting any option, the CPU 31 determines which storage medium to use. Then, when using the memory card, the CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC57. On the other hand, when using the main body storage memory, the CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC51.

  In step SC <b> 57, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a memory card (for example, the memory card 28) for storing images in the game apparatus 10 is attached to the connector of the game apparatus 10. Then, when the memory card is attached to the connector of game device 10, CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC51. On the other hand, when the memory card is not attached to the connector of the game apparatus 10, the CPU 31 displays a notification prompting the user to attach the memory card on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 (step SC58). Returning to step SC50, the process is repeated.

  In step SC51, based on the operation data Da, the CPU 31 determines whether to transmit an image to another game device 10r or receive an image from another game device 10t in the subsequent processing. For example, on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 of the game apparatus 10, a display prompting the user to select whether to send a photo to another game apparatus 10r or to receive a picture from another game apparatus 10t is performed (FIG. 49). reference). Then, in response to the user performing an operation of selecting one of the options, the CPU 31 determines whether to transmit an image to another game device 10r or to receive an image from another game device 10t. And CPU31 advances a process to the following step SC52, when transmitting an image to the other game device 10r. On the other hand, when receiving an image from another game apparatus 10t, the CPU 31 advances the process to the next step SC53.

  In step SC52, the CPU 31 performs an image transmission process and proceeds to the next step SC54. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 58, the detailed operation of the image transmission process performed in step SC52 will be described.

In FIG. 58, the CPU 31 transmits transmission source data indicating that the own apparatus is the transmission source of the image data by broadcast using, for example, the local communication module 39 (step SC63), and proceeds to the next step SC. . For example, the CPU 31 creates transmission source data using data indicating the identification number and the user name stored in the identification data Db and the user data Dc, and stores the created data in the transmission source data Dd. Then, by transmitting the transmission source data stored in the transmission source data Dd by broadcast, the presence of the game device 10 that is the transmission source is notified to another game device 10r that can receive the transmission source data. (See FIG. 60).

  Next, the CPU 31 searches for another game device 10r as a reception destination (step SC64), and proceeds to the next step. Here, as will be apparent from the description below, the other game device 10r that is the reception destination selects the game device 10t that is the transmission source that the player wants to receive based on the received transmission source data. Then, reception destination data indicating that the own device is the reception destination of the image data is transmitted to the selected transmission source game device 10t (see FIG. 60). In step SC64, the CPU 31 waits for reception of the destination data via the local communication module 39, for example. Then, when receiving the destination data, the CPU 31 describes the identification number and user name of the other game device 10r of the destination indicated by the destination data in the destination data De. Here, while the CPU 31 is searching for another game device 10r as a reception destination, for example, a notification indicating that it is currently searching for the game device 10r as the reception destination is displayed on the lower LCD 12 (see FIG. 50 (see left figure). Further, when the CPU 31 receives the reception destination data from the other game device 10r of the reception destination, for example, information indicating the user name of the other game device 10r of the reception destination indicated by the reception destination data on the lower LCD 12 (left in FIG. 51) Display user names Nr1 to Nr3).

  Next, based on the operation data Da, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to start a process of transmitting an image to the other game device 10r that has been searched (step SC65). For example, the CPU 31 displays on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 a display (operation button icon Bs) that prompts the user to start an image transmission process. Then, when the user performs an operation for starting the process of transmitting an image, it is determined that the process is to be started, and the process proceeds to the next step SC66. On the other hand, when the CPU 31 does not start the process of transmitting the image, the CPU 31 returns to step SC64 and continues to search for another game apparatus 10r that is the reception destination.

  It should be noted that preparation for transmission from the transmission source game device 10t to the reception destination game device 10r has been completed in a period from when the determination to start the process of transmitting an image to the determination of the transmission image. The transmission preparation completion data shown is transmitted. In addition, when the receiving game device 10r is ready to receive image data, reception ready data that has been ready to receive image data in response to receiving the transmission ready data is received. Is transmitted to the game device 10t as the transmission source (see FIG. 60).

  In step SC66, the CPU 31 determines whether an image to be transmitted to the other game device 10r is selected based on the operation data Da. For example, the CPU 31 displays a screen for allowing the user to select an image to be transmitted to the other game apparatus 10r on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 (see the left diagram in FIG. 52) and prompts the user to select a transmitted image. Then, in response to the user performing an operation for determining a transmission image (for example, a touch operation on the operation button icon Bt), the CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC69. On the other hand, if the user has not performed an operation for determining a transmission image (No in step SC66), CPU 31 advances the process to next step SC67.

In step SC69, the CPU 31 transmits the image data indicating the transmission image selected in step SC66 to the other game device 10r of the reception destination, and proceeds to the next step. For example, the CPU 31 extracts image data corresponding to the transmission image selected in step SC66 from the storage medium selected in step SC50, and stores the extracted image data in the transmission image data Df1. Then, the CPU 31 refers to the reception destination data De to identify another game device 10r that is currently the reception destination, and for example, stores the image data stored in the transmission image data Df1 via the local communication module 39. It transmits to the other specified game device 10r (see FIG. 60). While the image data is being transmitted to the other game device 10r as the reception destination, the CPU 31 displays a notification indicating that the image data is currently being transmitted to the game device 10r as the reception destination, for example, on the lower LCD 12. (See the left figure in FIG. 53).

  Next, the CPU 31 waits for reception of a reception destination response respectively transmitted from the reception destination game device 10r (step SC70). Here, the reception destination response includes a response (reception request) indicating that the image data is received or a response (reception end) indicating that the reception is to be terminated, and each of the game devices 10r as the reception destinations stores the image data. After receiving, one of the responses is transmitted to the game device 10t as the transmission source (see FIG. 60). The CPU 31 waits for responses from all currently set recipient game devices 10r, and when receiving a reception request from at least one recipient game device 10r (Yes in step SC71), the CPU 31 returns to step SC66 for processing. repeat. On the other hand, when the CPU 31 waits for responses from all the currently set recipient game devices 10r and receives the end of reception from all the recipient game devices 10r (No in step SC71), the CPU 31 performs the processing according to the subroutine. finish. When the CPU 31 receives a reception end from the receiving game device 10r, the CPU 31 deletes the data of the receiving game device 10r from the receiving data De. Further, while waiting for a response from the other game device 10r of the reception destination, the CPU 31 displays, for example, a notification indicating that the response from the game device 10r as the reception destination is currently waiting on the lower LCD 12 ( (See the left figure in FIG. 54).

  On the other hand, when the user has not yet performed the operation for determining the transmission image in step SC66, based on the operation data Da, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the process of transmitting the image (step SC67). For example, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the process of transmitting an image in response to a user operation (for example, a touch operation on the operation button icon Bf). Then, when ending the process of transmitting the image, the CPU 31 transmits data (transmission end; refer to FIG. 60) indicating that the transmission is ended to the game device 10r that is the current reception destination (step SC68). The processing by the subroutine is finished. On the other hand, if the CPU 31 does not end the image transmission process, it returns to step SC66 and repeats the process.

  Returning to FIG. 57, after the image transmission processing in step SC52, the CPU 31 determines whether or not there is no receiving destination (step SC54). For example, the CPU 31 determines that there is no recipient when the determination in step SC71 is No (that is, reception completion has been received from all the recipient game devices 10r). CPU31 advances a process to the following step SC56, when there is no receiver. On the other hand, when the determination in step SC67 is YES (ie, when the user has selected the end of transmission), the CPU 31 disconnects communication with the game device 10r as the reception destination and performs step SC51. Return to and repeat the process.

  CPU31 performs an image reception process in step SC53, and advances a process to following step SC55. Hereinafter, the detailed operation of the image receiving process performed in step SC53 will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 59, the CPU 31 receives the transmission source data indicated to be the transmission source of the image data (step SC84), and advances the processing to the next step. Here, as described above, the game device 10t serving as the transmission source transmits the transmission source data indicating that the own device is the transmission source of the image data by broadcast using, for example, the local communication module 39. (See FIG. 60). In step SC84, the CPU 31 can know the presence of the other game device 10t that has become the transmission source by receiving the transmission source data transmitted by broadcast. When the transmission source data is received, the CPU 31 acquires the identification number and the user name of the transmission source game device 10t indicated by the transmission source data, and describes them in the transmission source data Dd.

  Here, while the CPU 31 is searching for another game device 10t as a transmission source, for example, a notification indicating that the transmission source game device 10t is currently being searched is displayed on the lower LCD 12 (see FIG. 50 (see right figure). Further, when receiving the transmission source data from the other game device 10t of the transmission source, the CPU 31 displays, for example, information indicating the user name of the other game device 10t of the transmission source indicated by the transmission source data on the lower LCD 12 ( (See the right figure in FIG. 51).

  Next, based on the operation data Da, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a transmission source has been determined from any of the other game devices 10t that have been searched (step SC85). For example, the CPU 31 displays on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 a prompt for selection from information indicating the user name of the other game device 10t of the transmission source (see user names Nt1 to Nt3 on the right side of FIG. 51). Then, in response to the user performing an operation of selecting any one of the user names, it is determined that the image is received with the selected user as a transmission source, and the process proceeds to the next step SC86. On the other hand, if the CPU 31 does not determine the transmission source that receives the image, the CPU 31 returns to step SC84 and continues to search for another game device 10t that is the transmission source.

  In step SC86, the CPU 31 transmits the reception destination data indicating that the own device is the reception destination of the image data to the other game device 10t that is the selected transmission source, for example, using the local communication module 39, Proceed to the next step. For example, the CPU 31 creates reception destination data using the identification number and data indicating the user name stored in the identification data Db and the user data Dc, respectively, and stores the created data in the reception data De. Then, the reception destination data stored in the reception destination data De is transmitted to the other game device 10t serving as the transmission source, whereby the other game device 10t that receives the reception destination data is received. The presence of the previous game apparatus 10 and the user name thereof are notified (see FIG. 60).

  It should be noted that preparation for transmission to the destination game device 10r is completed in a period from when the determination is made to start the process of transmitting an image to the other game device 10t of the transmission source until the transmission image is determined. Transmission preparation completion data indicating that it has been transmitted is transmitted. In this case, when the receiving game device 10r is ready to receive the image data, the reception ready device is ready to receive the image data in response to receiving the transmission ready data. Data is transmitted to the other game device 10t of the transmission source (see FIG. 60).

Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not data indicating the end of transmission has been received from the other game device 10t of the transmission source (step SC87), and whether or not the user has performed an operation to end reception based on the operation data Da. (Step SC88) and whether or not image data has been received from another game device 10t of the transmission source (Step SC89). For example, when an image transmitted by another game device 10t of the transmission source is being selected, the CPU 31 displays a screen on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 indicating that the other party is waiting to select a photo ( 52), the user is notified of the current situation. Then, the CPU 31 determines that the user has performed an operation to cancel the reception in response to the user performing an operation to stop receiving the image (for example, a touch operation on the operation button icon Bf) (Yes in step SC88).
Then, the process proceeds to the next step SC93. In addition, when the CPU 31 receives a transmission end from the other game device 10t of the transmission source (see step SC68 and FIG. 60 in FIG. 58) (Yes in step SC87), the CPU 31 ends the processing by the subroutine. CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC90 when image data reception (see step SC69 in FIG. 58 and FIG. 60) starts from another game device 10t of the transmission source (Yes in step SC89). On the other hand, if any of the determinations is NO (ie, Steps SC87 to SC89 are all No), CPU 31 repeats the determinations of Steps SC87 to SC89.

  In step SC90, the CPU 31 stores the image data (see FIG. 60) received from the other game device 10t in the received image data Df2. Then, the CPU 31 stores the image data stored in the received image data Df2 in the storage medium selected in step SC50, and advances the processing to the next step. Here, when the reception of the image data from the other game device 10t starts, the CPU 31 is currently receiving the image data from the game device 10t as the transmission source, for example, on the lower LCD 12 while receiving the image data. Is displayed (see the right figure of FIG. 53).

  Next, based on the operation data Da, the CPU 31 determines whether or not to further receive an image from the other game device 10t of the transmission source. For example, the CPU 31 displays a screen on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 that allows the user to select whether or not to further receive an image from another game device 10t of the transmission source (see the right side of FIG. 54). Encourage selection. Then, the CPU 31 advances the process to the next step SC92 in response to the user further performing an operation for requesting image reception (for example, a touch operation on the operation button icon By). On the other hand, the CPU 31 advances the process to the next step SC93 in response to the user performing an operation (for example, a touch operation on the operation button icon Bn) to end the image reception.

  In step SC92, the CPU 31 further transmits data (reception request; see FIG. 60) indicating that image data is to be received to the other game device 10t of the transmission source, and returns to step SC87 to repeat the process.

  On the other hand, in step SC93, the CPU 31 transmits data indicating the end of reception (reception end; see FIG. 60) to the other game device 10t that is the transmission source, and ends the processing by the subroutine. In step SC88, the reception may be automatically canceled separately from the user's operation. For example, the remaining storable amount of the storage medium selected in step SC50 is monitored, and when the remaining amount falls below a predetermined amount, the user is notified that the remaining number of stored sheets has become zero. Then, the process of step SC93 may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 57, after the image reception process in step SC53, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a transmission end has been received (step SC55). For example, if the determination of step SC87 determines Yes (that is, the transmission end is received from the transmission source game device 10t), the CPU 31 proceeds to the next step SC56. On the other hand, if No is determined in the determination step of step SC91 (that is, the state where the user has selected the end of reception), the CPU 31 disconnects communication with the game device 10t as the transmission source, and performs step SC51. Return to and repeat the process.

In step SC56, the CPU 31 performs a communication disconnection process, and ends the process according to the flowchart. For example, the CPU 31 ends (disconnects) communication with the other game device 10 that is currently the communication partner, and displays a screen indicating that the communication is disconnected on the lower LCD 12 and / or the upper LCD 22 ( 55), the user is notified of the current situation.

  As described above, when the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment is a reception destination of image data, the game apparatus 10 can select a transmission source apparatus that receives the image data. Therefore, when the game apparatus 10 transmits / receives an image between the apparatuses, the game apparatus 10 can select the transmission side apparatus desired by the user and receive the image.

  In the above description, the game device 10r that receives the image data has the right to select the game device 10t that transmits the image data. However, the game device 10t that transmits the image data also has the right. You may have the right to select the receiving game device 10r which receives image data. For example, in the process of determining the transmission start in step SC65, if the user determines the transmission start after selecting the game device 10r as the reception destination, the transmission source can select the reception destination as well. . For example, when a transmission source user is selected on the destination game device 10r, a check box is added to the reception destination user name displayed on the display screen of the transmission source game device 10t (for example, user names Nr1 to Nr3). Next to). Then, the user of the game device 10t that is the transmission source can transmit the image data only to the user who has received the check by checking the check box given to the user name of the reception destination by a touch operation. .

  In the processing operation described above, the receiving game device 10r can leave the group that transmits and receives images at a timing desired by the user. Further, even if the receiving game device 10r is removed from the group, the transmitting game device 10t can continue to transmit image data as long as at least one receiving game device 10r remains. . As a result, even if the receiving game device 10r leaves the above group due to a shortage of storable remaining capacity, it does not affect the sending game device 10t and other receiving game devices 10r. However, if all of the recipient game devices 10r request to continue image communication, the image data transmission is continued, and if at least one of the recipient game devices 10r is removed from the group, the group It does not matter if all communication belonging to is terminated.

  Further, in the processing operation described above, the transmission source data is first transmitted from the game device 10t as the transmission source by broadcasting to transmit data to an unspecified number of opponents, but communication is started by another method. It doesn't matter. For example, the game device 10r that is the recipient may first send the recipient data to an unspecified number of opponents, and the sender game device 10t that received the recipient data may return the sender data. Absent. In this case, the user name of the game device 10r that transmits the reception destination data may not be described in the reception destination data transmitted first.

  In the above-described processing procedure, an image to be transmitted from the game device 10t to the game device 10r is selected after determining the reception game device 10r that communicates with the transmission-source game device 10t. Accordingly, the transmission source game device 10t can transmit the selected transmission images one after another to the determined reception destination game device 10r, and can easily transmit various images. However, when such an effect is not expected, the transmission image may be determined by another procedure. For example, the transmission-source game device 10t determines a transmission device to be transmitted to another game device 10, and then determines a game device 10r that is a reception destination. In this case, when the transmission source data is first transmitted from the game apparatus 10t as the transmission source toward an unspecified number of opponents, it is transmitted together with data indicating the determined transmission image. As a result, the user of the game apparatus 10r that is the receiving destination can select the transmission source that wants to receive the image data by looking at the image scheduled to be transmitted together with the user name of the transmission source. This makes it possible to select a transmission source that suits your needs.

  In the processing procedure described above, the thumbnail image surrounded by the cursor C when the button Bt is touched is selected as the image to be transmitted. That is, images are selected and transmitted one by one, but a plurality of images may be selected and transmitted. For example, by performing a selection operation (for example, an operation of directly touching) a thumbnail image displayed in the thumbnail display area At in the left diagram of FIG. 52, the thumbnail image is highlighted and an image corresponding to the thumbnail image is displayed. Selected state. Further, a plurality of images may be selected by performing the selection operation a plurality of times, and a plurality of images in the selected state may be transmitted by touching the button Bt in that state. .

  In the former case, since images are selected and transmitted one by one, as a result, the number of images transmitted at a time is limited to one. On the other hand, in the latter case, by limiting the number of selectable sheets, the number of sheets transmitted at a time is limited to the selectable number. In other words, in the latter case, it may be possible not to select more than a predetermined number of images at a time, and if the total capacity of the selected images exceeds a predetermined capacity, no more images can be selected at a time. May be. In addition to the number of selectable images, the number of images transmitted at one time may be limited. In this case, it is possible to set a larger number of selectable images than the number of images transmitted at one time, and a limited number of image transmission processes are repeated a plurality of times for one image selection operation. The transmission process of the selected image is completed. Regardless of the mode of image selection / image transmission restriction, the user of the game device 10 on the receiving side can cancel further image reception in the middle of image reception, and reception based on the number of received images. You can decide whether to continue.

  Further, when transmission source data is first transmitted from the game device 10t that is a transmission source toward an unspecified number of opponents, other information may be further included and transmitted to the game device 10r that is the reception destination. For example, information indicating the title and the number of images scheduled to be transmitted from the game device 10t as the transmission source may be included in the transmission source data and transmitted. As a result, the receiving game device 10r can display the information indicating the title and the number of images included in the received transmission source data together with the transmission source user name. The information for selection increases, and the transmission source can be selected more appropriately. The title of the image to be included in the transmission source data may be selected from fixed titles determined in advance by the user of the game device 10t as the transmission source, or may be freely input by the user. The number of images included in the transmission source data may be the number of images to be transmitted by the user of the transmission source game device 10t, or the number of photos stored in the game device 10t is included as the number of images. It doesn't matter.

  Further, the screen display example described above is merely an example, and it goes without saying that other screen display may be performed. For example, in the screen display example shown in FIG. 53, a notification indicating the state is displayed during transmission / reception of image data. However, when the time for transmitting / receiving the image data is extremely short, the notification is displayed. You don't have to.

  In the above description, a still image captured by the game apparatus 10 is transmitted / received between the game apparatuses 10 as a transmission target, but a moving image may be transmitted / received. In this case, the moving image to be transmitted may be a moving image captured by the game apparatus 10, or may be a moving image received from another apparatus or a moving image stored other than shooting.

In the above-described embodiment, when the user selects transmission end or reception end, the process returns to step SC51, that is, whether the image is sent to another game device 10r or whether the image is received from another game device 10t. Although the operation example is returned to the process of prompting the user to select, the process may not be returned to the process. For example, even if the user himself selects transmission end or reception end, the process of step SC56 is performed, that is, the communication with the other game device 10 that is the communication partner is disconnected, and the communication is disconnected. It is also possible to display the screen indicating this (see the left diagram or the right diagram in FIG. 55) and terminate the processing according to the flowchart.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the liquid crystal display unit for two screens, the case where the physically separated lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 are arranged one above the other (in the case of two upper and lower screens) has been described. However, the configuration of the display screen for two screens may be other configurations. For example, the lower LCD 12 and the upper LCD 22 may be arranged on the left and right on one main surface of the lower housing 11. In addition, the lower LCD 12 is the same as the lower LCD 12 and has a vertically long LCD that is twice as long as the lower LCD 12 (that is, an LCD that is physically one and has two display screens vertically). It may be arranged on one main surface of the housing 11 so that two images are displayed up and down (that is, displayed adjacently without the upper and lower boundary portions). In addition, a horizontally long LCD having the same vertical width as the lower LCD 12 and having a horizontal length twice as long as the lower LCD 12 is arranged on one main surface of the lower housing 11 so that two game images are horizontally displayed. May be displayed (that is, displayed adjacent to each other without the left and right boundary portions). That is, two images may be displayed by physically dividing one screen into two. Regardless of the image format, if the touch panel 13 is disposed on the screen on which the display image displayed on the lower LCD 12 is displayed, the present invention can be similarly realized. When the two images are displayed by physically dividing one screen into two, the touch panel 13 may be disposed on the entire screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, the touch panel 13 is integrally provided on the game apparatus 10, but it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even if the game apparatus and the touch panel are configured separately. Further, the touch panel 13 may be provided on the upper surface of the upper LCD 22 and the display image displayed on the lower LCD 12 described above may be displayed on the upper LCD 22. Furthermore, although two display screens (lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22) are provided in this embodiment, the number of display screens may be one. That is, in this embodiment, the upper LCD 22 may not be provided and the touch panel 13 may be provided using only the lower LCD 12 as a display screen. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 13 may be provided on the upper surface of the upper LCD 22 without providing the lower LCD 12, and the display image displayed on the lower LCD 12 may be displayed on the upper LCD 22.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the touch panel 13 is used as an input unit of the game apparatus 10 that realizes coordinate input, but other pointing devices may be used. Here, the pointing device is an input device that specifies an input position and coordinates on the screen. For example, a mouse, a trackpad, a trackball, or the like is used as an input means, and is calculated from an output value output from the input means. The present invention can be similarly realized by using the position information of the screen coordinate system.

  In addition, in the case of a stationary game device in which a player holds a game controller and enjoys a game, a pointing device of another aspect is also conceivable. For example, a camera fixed to the housing of the game controller can be used as the pointing device. In this case, the captured image captured by the camera changes in accordance with the change in position indicated by the housing of the game controller. Therefore, by analyzing this captured image, it is possible to calculate the coordinates indicated by the housing with respect to the display screen. Needless to say, the present invention can be realized even if the game device 10 is not provided with a pointing device itself such as the touch panel 13.

In the present embodiment, the portable game apparatus 10 and the stationary game apparatus have been described. However, the image communication application program of the present invention is executed by an information processing apparatus such as a general personal computer to The invention may be realized.

  In addition, the shape of the game device 10 described above, the shape, number, and installation position of the operation buttons 14 and the touch panel 13 provided on the game device 10 are merely examples, and are other shapes, numbers, and installation positions. However, it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized. Further, it is needless to say that the execution order of each step used in the above-described image communication processing, a screen display example, and the like are merely examples, and that the present invention can be realized even with another execution order and screen display.

[9. Sound function]
Next, processing provided by a sound program executed when the sound application program 57 is started will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Usage example of game device>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a sound selection screen 400 in the sound function in the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 61, game device 10 according to the present embodiment uses a recording data file recorded by the user as a sound function, or music data stored in an SD card, as a sound function. A plurality of functions including a function of playing a music file and the like are installed, and the user can arbitrarily select a desired function on the sound selection screen 400 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of icons 402 and 404 corresponding to each function mounted on the game apparatus 10 are displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12.

  Here, when the “Record with a microphone” icon 404 is selected, the user can freely record with the microphone of the main unit to create a recording data file, play back the created recording data file, or create the recorded data. Switch to microphone recording / playback mode for editing files.

  On the other hand, when the “Play with music on the SD card” icon 404 is selected, a transition is made to a music playback mode of a function for playing back music files that are music data stored on the SD card. In this embodiment, the storage of the music file on the SD card is appropriately performed by a personal computer or the like as an example. However, the music file is stored via the Internet using the wireless communication module 38 described above. The music file downloaded to the SD card may be stored by transmitting / receiving data to / from the server.

  Here, when the user selects the “setting” icon 408, the user can freely select a function related to the setting process.

  When the “Stop” icon 406 is selected, the sound function is terminated and the screen returns to a menu screen (not shown).

  In FIG. 61, a bird-shaped object 410 is displayed at the bottom of the lower LCD 12 screen. When the bird-shaped object 410 is displayed, it is assumed that an automatic recording / playback function described later is executed.

Hereinafter, a music playback mode, which is a function for executing a playback process of music files that are music data stored in an SD card, will be described first.

  Specifically, when the “Play with playing SD card” icon 404 is selected, the music playback mode is selected and a music playback folder list selection screen 500 is displayed.

  FIG. 62 is a view for explaining a music playback folder list selection screen 500 according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 62A shows a case where the music playback folder list selection screen 500 is displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12.

  In FIG. 62B, a list screen 500 # of music files included in the currently selected folder is displayed on the screen of the upper LCD 22.

  Referring to FIG. 62A, the user touches the screen of lower LCD 12 with touch pen 27 or the like to select an arbitrary folder from folder list display range 530 on music playback folder list selection screen 500. Is possible. As an example, in the folder list display range 530, each folder is displayed obliquely along the circumference of the disk.

  For example, it is assumed that the cursor 520 selects the folder displayed at the top of the folder list display range 530. Touch the position where another folder in the folder list display range 530 on the screen of the lower LCD 12 is displayed with the touch pen 27 or the like, or touch the screen and move the touch pen 27 or the like while touching it. Thus, the scroll display process of the folder list corresponding to the locus of the touch pen is executed. In this example, the position of the cursor 520 does not change as an example, and it is assumed that the top folder of the folder list currently displayed in the folder list display range 530 is selected. Therefore, the scroll display processing of the folder list is executed so that the disc rotates according to the locus of the touch pen.

  In this example, it is assumed that the position of the cursor 520 does not change as an example. However, the position of the cursor 520 can be moved to a position corresponding to the touch position touched with the touch pen 27. Specifically, when an operation (touch-off) for releasing the touched state is performed without touching the touch position and changing the touch position from the touched position, only the cursor 520 is displayed according to the touch position. Moving. At that time, the scroll display process of the folder list is not executed. Specifically, in FIG. 62A, when the “Random” folder is touched, only the cursor 520 moves to the “Random” folder position.

  On the other hand, when the touch pen 27 or the like is moved while touching on the screen, that is, the touch position is changed from the touched position while the touch position is changed (drag operation) is executed. The scroll display processing of the folder list is executed according to the movement locus (movement distance) of the touch pen. In this case, the cursor 520 can be maintained at the position of the cursor 520 before the scroll display process, or can be set to the state selected for the top folder in the folder list.

Also, when the position of the cursor 520 changes and the selected folder is changed, FIG. 62B shows a list screen of music files included in the folder selected by the cursor 520. It is updated to 500 #. Specifically, when a favorite folder described later is touched, a list of music files registered in the favorite folder is displayed. When the automatic folder is touched, random playback is executed as described later, and a list of music files to be played back by random playback is displayed. In the case of random playback, the file name is displayed for music files that have already been played, and the file names of music files that have not been played are replaced with another symbol. Is also possible. With this process, in the case of random playback, the user cannot give a sense of expectation until the next played music file is played back, so that the user can have a sense of expectation, and music data can be played happily.

  Even if the position of the cursor 520 does not change, the folder selected by the cursor 520 is changed according to the scroll display processing of the folder list, so that the list screen 500 # displayed on the screen of the upper LCD 22 is changed. , Updated to the list of music files in the selected folder.

  Further, the user can move the slider 518 of the folder list scroll bar 510 displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12 with the touch pen 27 or the like.

  By moving the slider 518 of the folder list scroll bar 510, the folder list displayed in the folder list display range 530 is updated, and the folder list corresponding to the cursor position is displayed.

  The user can set the volume output from the speaker or the like by designating the volume setting icon 550 with the touch pen 27 or the like.

  Further, the user can return to the sound selection screen 400 that is the previous screen by selecting the “return” icon 512.

  Also, a music file selection screen is displayed by selecting the “open” icon 514.

  The user can execute a function corresponding to the selected function icon by selecting the selected function icon 516 in FIG. It is assumed that the display and setting of the selection function icon are switched corresponding to the folder currently selected by the cursor 520. Here, as an example, a case where the folder of “Best 10” which is one of the favorite folders is selected is shown, and a selection function icon 516 of “Delete All” is provided corresponding to the folder. Yes. When the “Delete All” selection function icon 516 is selected, a process of deleting all the music files registered in the best 10 folders is executed. A favorite folder, which will be described later, can be displayed when a music file is registered in the folder, and the folder can be prevented from being displayed when the music file is not registered.

In addition, the “Omakase” folder is displayed in the folder next to the “Best 10” folder, and when the “Omakase” folder is selected and executed, all music files from the beginning to the end are displayed. It is assumed that the playback order is specified at random and playback is started. Then, when the reproduction of the last designated music file is completed, the reproduction order is again designated at random and the reproduction is continued. When the “Random” folder is selected, random playback is performed but the playback order is specified. Therefore, it is possible to return to a music file that has been played once and repeat playback. In addition, when the last specified music file finishes playing and the next playback order is specified at random, the last specified music file is the same as the next first music file. Then, the process of replaying the playback order is executed. By this processing, it is possible to suppress the user's stress by suppressing the same music piece from being played continuously. Also, when the “Random” folder is selected, the playback process selection screen 503, which will be described later, is displayed because the playback process is automatically started.

  In addition, as an example, “Best 10” is followed by “Omakase” folder, and “Favorite” folder and “Collection” folder which are other favorite folders in this order. It is not limited to the display order and can be displayed freely. For example, the “Omakase” folder and “Best 10” can be switched and displayed. For example, when the initial position of the cursor 520 is the “Random” folder, the above playback process is automatically started, so that the user can play music data without selecting anything.

  FIG. 63 is a view for explaining another music playback folder list selection screen 501 according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 63A shows a case where the music playback folder list selection screen 501 of the lower LCD 12 is displayed.

  In FIG. 63 (b), a list screen 501 # of music files included in the currently selected folder is displayed on the screen of the lower LCD 12.

  For example, in the folder list display range 530 of FIG. 62A, a case where the user scrolls the folder list using the touch pen 27 or the like is shown.

  Specifically, when the touch pen is moved (sliding operation) while touching the screen in the folder list display range 530 as an example, the folder list is updated according to the moved locus.

  Therefore, FIG. 63A shows a case where the position of the cursor 518 # of the folder list scroll bar 510 has moved from the initial position.

  In addition, the music folder FA is selected according to the cursor 520, and a list screen 501 # in FIG. 63B shows that a plurality of music files are stored in the music folder FA. Since the other points are the same as those described in FIG. 62, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  In addition, since the favorite folder such as “Best 10”, the “Omakase” folder, and the music folder are displayed in parallel in the same folder list display range 230, it is possible to grasp at a glance the folder to be designated. Yes, the user's operability in selecting a folder list is improved.

  In FIG. 62A, as an example, a case where “best 10”, “memories”, and “collection” are provided as favorite folders is shown. It is also possible to provide a folder that is “reserved” and a folder that can be displayed specially according to the user's preference. For example, it is possible to provide a folder that provides a “secret” folder and displays only the first few characters of the music files contained in the folder, but does not display the remaining characters. It is. The registration of the folder will be described later.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a music file selection screen 502 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 64A, a music file list 540 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12.

  When the “open” icon 514 is selected on the previous music playback folder list selection screen, a list of music files included in the selected music folder is displayed.

  Further, the user can move the slider 518 # of the file list scroll bar 510 # on the screen of the lower LCD 12 with the touch pen 27 or the like.

  By moving the slider of the file list scroll bar 510 #, the file list displayed on the file list selection screen is scrolled to display the music file list corresponding to the cursor position.

  The user can execute a function corresponding to the selected function icon by selecting the selected function icon shown in FIG. It is assumed that the display and setting of the selection function icon are switched corresponding to the folder currently selected by the cursor 520. Here, a “favorite” selection function icon 515 is provided. When the “favorite” selection function icon 515 is selected, a favorite folder selection screen is displayed.

  FIG. 102 is a view for explaining a favorite folder selection screen 509 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 102, “best 10” registration icon 700, “memory” registration icon 702, “collection” registration icon 704, “renchuchu” registration icon 706, which is a favorite folder, is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12. A case where a “secret” registration icon 708 is provided is shown.

  When the user selects one of the registration icons on the favorite folder selection screen 509, the music file selected by the cursor 520 # in FIG. 64A is registered and displayed in the selected folder. Will be.

  When the “return” icon 710 is selected, a music file selection screen 502 as the previous screen is displayed.

  Referring again to FIG. 64A, a playback mode switching icon 517 is provided on the music file selection screen 502.

  In addition, the user can switch the playback mode in the folder by selecting the playback mode switching icon 517. Specifically, a playback mode that repeatedly plays the music file being played, a playback mode that plays in order and repeats from the beginning when all playback is finished, a playback mode that plays back in order and stops when all playback is finished, A playback mode in which playback is performed randomly and a playback mode in which only a set section is played back repeatedly can be sequentially switched and executed.

In addition, information on the selected music folder is displayed on the upper LCD 22 in FIG.
Is displayed.

  In FIG. 64A, when the user selects the “start” icon 516, the music file selected by the cursor 520 # is reproduced and a reproduction operation selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining a playback operation selection screen 503 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 65 (a) shows a case where the lower LCD 12 displays a playback operation selection screen 503 that is operated by changing music in the playback operation or the like.

  Specifically, for example, the user selects the sound effect selection icons 532 and 534 with a touch pen or the like, and thereby the sound effect output from the speaker or the like when the user presses the R button 14J and the L button 14I, respectively. It is possible to switch.

  Further, the user can execute a function of changing the playback speed and pitch of the playback signal by selecting the speed pitch adjustment icon 541.

  In addition, the user can perform a function of modulating the frequency of the reproduction signal or performing a filtering process or the like to change to another timbre by selecting the timbre adjustment icon 542.

  In addition, the user can execute a function of outputting a sound recording data file, which will be described later, from a speaker as a sound effect by selecting a recording data selection icon 544.

  Also, it is assumed that the slider 519 moves within the display range of the playback time bar 511 according to the playback position of the playback time of the entire music file. When the user touches the display range of the playback time bar 511 with the touch pen 27 or the like, the music file playback process can be started from the time corresponding to the touch position. In this case, it is assumed that the slider 519 moves to the position where the reproduction process is started. It is also possible to select the slider 519 with the touch pen 27 or the like and perform a slide operation, and start the reproduction process from the position where the slide operation is performed.

  In addition, the user can pause the music file being played by selecting the pause command icon 522. In addition, the user can select the next music file included in the folder by selecting the next music selection command icon 524, and can execute the reproduction operation. Further, the user can select the previous music file included in the folder by selecting the previous music selection command icon 520 and execute the reproduction operation.

  The user can execute a visualizer process described later by pressing the visualizer switching icon 531.

  In addition, the user can switch the playback mode in the folder by pressing the playback mode switching icon 517. Specifically, a playback mode that repeatedly plays the music file being played, a playback mode that plays in order and repeats from the beginning when all playback is finished, a playback mode that plays back in order and stops when all playback is finished, A playback mode in which playback is performed randomly and a playback mode in which only a set section is played back repeatedly can be sequentially switched and executed.

  Also, when the user presses the “favorite” icon 515, the favorite folder selection screen 509 described with reference to FIG. 102 is displayed. Then, as described above, by selecting any of the registration icons on the favorite folder selection screen 509, it is possible to register and display the currently played music file in the selected folder.

  In FIG. 65B, the music file list 540 displayed on the lower LCD 12 screen of FIG. 64A is displayed as the music file selection list screen 503 # on the upper LCD 22 screen. The case is shown. A music file included in the same folder as the music file being played can be selected by operating the direction input button 14A. That is, after a music file is selected (start pressed) with a touch pen or the like on the lower LCD 12 screen of FIG. 64 (a), the playback operation selection screen is displayed on the lower LCD 12 screen of FIG. 65 (a). It is possible to select a process for the reproduction operation of the music file that is the target selected by the touch pen or the like by using the touch pen or the like, and on the screen of the upper LCD 22, the music file can be selected by the direction input button 14A.

  Then, for example, by selecting a music file using the direction input button 14A and pressing one of the operation buttons 14B to 14E, the music file being played can be switched to the selected music file and the playback operation can be executed. It is.

  Therefore, the process on the playback operation selection screen 503 of the lower LCD 12 and the process on the music file selection list screen 503 # of the upper LCD 22 can be processed in parallel, which is convenient for the user.

Hereinafter, detailed processing of the sound function according to the present embodiment will be described.
A processing procedure related to the “sound function” according to the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to the following flow. Each step is typically realized by the CPU 31 reading a program or the like stored in the memory card 29 to the main memory 32 and executing it.

<Function selection process>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating processing related to function selection in game device 10 according to the present embodiment. The flow shown in FIG. 66 explains the processing in the sound selection screen 400 of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 66, after the game apparatus 10 is turned on or the start button is pressed, the sound function is executed by the user selecting a predetermined icon from a menu screen (not shown).

  In step SD1, the CPU 31 displays a sound selection screen 400 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 31 starts automatic recording / playback processing (step SD2). The automatic recording / playback process will be described later. Note that the order of steps SD1 and SD2 can be switched.

Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from the touch panel 13 (step SD3). The CPU 31 determines whether touch position data has been input from the touch panel 13 via the I / F circuit 42. That is, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the user performs a touch operation with the touch pen 27 or the like. If touch position data has not been input (NO in step SD3), the process of step SD3 is repeated.

  On the other hand, if touch position data has been input (YES in step SD3), the process proceeds to step SD4.

  In step SD4, the CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the function selection icon. That is, the CPU 31 determines whether the “Record with a microphone and play” icon 402 or the “Play with SD card” icon 404 is selected.

  If the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the “Record and play with microphone” icon 402 or the “Play with SD card” icon 404 (YES in step SD4), the process is step. Proceed to SD8.

  On the other hand, if the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is outside the display range of any of “Record and play with microphone” icon 402 or “Play with SD card” 404 (NO in step SD4), the process proceeds to step SD5. Proceed to

  In step SD8, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is a value within the display range of the function selection icon, the automatic recording / reproducing process is terminated (step SD8).

  Then, the CPU 31 executes a transition process for the next selected function mode (step SD9). The transition process of the selected function mode will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within the display range of the function selection icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is the display range of the “setting” icon 408. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD5).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is a value within the display range of the “setting” icon 408, the automatic recording / reproducing process is terminated (step SD10).

  Next, the CPU 31 executes setting processing (step SD11). The setting process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within the display range of the “setting” icon 408, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is the “end” icon 406. It is determined whether the value is within the display range (step SD6).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD6 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the display range of the “end” icon 408, the CPU 31 ends the automatic recording / playback process and ends the function selection process (end). ). That is, this returns to a menu screen (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within the display range of the “end” icon 408 in step SD6, the CPU 31 returns to step SD3.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the selection function mode transition processing in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 67, CPU 31 has a coordinate value indicating the touch position within the display range of “play with SD card music” icon 404 or within the display range of icon 402 of “play with microphone”. Which one is determined (step SD20).

  If the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is a value within the display range of the “play with music on the SD card” icon 404, the CPU 31 proceeds to step SD21.

  Then, the CPU 31 determines whether or not an SD card is inserted (step SD21). If the CPU 31 determines that an SD card is inserted, it next shifts to the music playback mode (step SD22). The music playback mode will be described later. When the music playback mode ends, the screen returns to the sound selection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 1 (return).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD21 that no SD card is inserted, it executes an error display process (step SD23). As an example, the error display process is a process of urging the user to insert an SD card by executing a display process such as “SD card is not inserted”. And it returns to step SD1 again (return).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD20 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the display range of the “record and play with microphone” icon 402, the CPU 31 shifts to the microphone recording / playback mode (step SD24). The microphone recording / playback mode will be described later. When the microphone recording / playback mode is completed, the screen returns to the sound selection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 1 (return).

<Music playback mode>
Next, the music playback mode will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing in the music playback mode.

  Referring to FIG. 68, first, CPU 31 executes a folder search process in the SD card (step SD30).

The CPU 31 then generates a folder list (step SD31).
Next, the CPU 31 displays a music playback folder list selection screen (step SD32). 62 and 63 described above are examples when the music playback folder list selection screen 500 is displayed.

Here, the folder search process in the SD card will be described.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the folder search processing in the SD card.

  Referring to FIG. 69, CPU 31 sets a search initial path to be searched first among paths associated with folders stored in the SD card (step SD50). Next, the CPU 31 executes a music file search process according to the search initial path (step SD51).

Then, the CPU 31 performs a music file search process according to the search initial path,
It is determined whether or not a music file exists in the folder (step SD52).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD52 that there is a music file, it extracts a music folder containing the music file (step SD53).

  Note that whether or not a music file exists can be determined by referring to an extension for identifying the file as an example. Note that the determination is not limited to the extension, and the determination can be made by referring to the identification information stored in the file header or the like, and the determination method is not limited.

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the search has been completed for all paths (step SD54).

  In step SD54, if the CPU 31 determines that the search has not been completed for all the paths, it sets a search next path to be searched next (step SD25).

  Then, the process returns to step SD51, and the music file search process as described above is executed.

  Then, the processes of steps SD51 to SD54 described above are repeated until the search for all paths is completed. If the CPU 31 determines in step SD54 that all paths have been searched, it ends the processing (return).

  As a result, all folders in which music files exist can be extracted from the loaded SD card.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine process for generating a folder list.
Referring to FIG. 70, first, CPU 31 executes a folder name determination process (step SD60). Next, the CPU 31 executes folder arrangement processing (step SD61).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the folder name determination processing.
Referring to FIG. 71, CPU 31 selects the first folder extracted by the folder search process of FIG. 69 (step SD65). Then, CPU 31 determines whether or not there is the same folder name next (step SD66).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that the same folder name exists, the CPU 31 merges the folders (step SD67).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that there is no identical folder, the CPU 31 proceeds to step SD68. In step SD68, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the determination has been completed for all folders extracted by the folder search process of FIG.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that the determination has not been completed for all folders, it selects the next folder extracted by the folder search process of FIG. 69 (step SD69). Then, the CPU 31 returns to step SD66 and repeats the processes of steps SD66 to SD69 described above.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that the determination has been completed for all folders, the CPU 31 then proceeds to the folder arrangement process (step SD61) in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 70 again, in the folder arrangement process (step SD61), in the folder name determination process (step SD60), the folders are arranged in accordance with a predetermined arrangement order according to the names or symbols of the merged folders.

Then, the process returns again to FIG. 68 (return).
Referring to FIG. 68, next, in a folder arrangement process (step SD61) in step SD32, a folder list is displayed on the music playback folder list selection screen according to the arranged folder order (step SD32).

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a specific example for explaining the folder search processing.
Here, as an example, a list structure of music files and folders stored in one SD card is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 72, specifically, as an example, a folder FD1 and a folder FD2 are provided, and a music folder FA and a music folder FB are provided in the folder FD1.

  The music folder FA includes a music file MAA, a music file MBB,...

  In addition, the music folder FB includes music files.

  In the folder FD2, a music folder FA and a music folder FC are shown.

  The music folder FA includes music files MX and MY.

  Also, the music folder FC includes a music file.

  When a folder having such a tree structure is stored in the SD card, the music folder FA. Containing the music file is stored by the processing according to the flow described with reference to FIG. Four music folders of FB, FA, and FC are extracted.

71, since the music folder FA stored in the folder FD1 and the music folder FA stored in the folder FD2 have the same folder name, the music folder FA is stored in each folder as the music folder FA. The stored music files will be merged. As a result of the merging, the music file list screen 501 # illustrated in FIG. 63B and the music file selection list screen 503 # illustrated in FIG. In the example, the music folder FA is set so that music files MAA, music file MBB,..., Music file MX, music file MY,. .

  By this processing, the same folder name is merged and the folder list is displayed on the folder list selection screen. As a result, if a folder with the same name exists in the installed memory card (SD card), it is displayed as a list in the same group, so that the folder structure of the SD card when there are a plurality of the same folder names, etc. Thus, there is no problem in the folder extraction process, and the convenience can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in order to group the music files in the installed memory card (SD card), the folder information of the memory card is used as it is without using the attribute information in the music file (same Music files in the folder are treated as the same group). Regardless of the hierarchy in which each folder exists, all folders are displayed in parallel (in one hierarchy) on the music playback folder list selection screen 500 or the like. That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 14, when music files also exist in the folder FD1 and the folder FD2, on the music playback folder list selection screen 500, the folder FD1, the folder FD2, the music folder FA, the music folder FB, The music folder FC will be listed in parallel. Thereby, even if the hierarchical structure of the memory card is complicated, a desired music file can be easily found by, for example, a child who is a user.

  Further, since the folder name registered in the memory card is used as it is in the music playback folder list selection screen 500 as the name of the folder handled as the same group, the user can easily find a desired music file. , Improve convenience.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the music playback folder list selection screen 500, the name of each folder extracted from the memory card (this is also a touch button for displaying a list of music files belonging to each folder) and the favorite folder (This is also a touch button for displaying a list of music files registered in favorites.) Since it is displayed in parallel (in one hierarchy), the folder selection operation is facilitated and the convenience is further improved. Furthermore, since the “Random” folder is displayed in parallel in such a list, the convenience is further improved.

  Referring to FIG. 68 again, after the music playback folder list selection screen is displayed in step SD32, CPU 31 next determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD33). The CPU 31 determines whether touch position data has been input from the touch panel 13 via the I / F circuit 42. That is, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the user performs a touch operation with the touch pen 27. In other words, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a coordinate value input by a user operation on the touch panel 13 is detected. If touch position data has not been input (NO in step SD33), the process in step SD33 is repeated.

  On the other hand, if touch position data has been input (YES in step SD33), the process proceeds to step SD34.

  Then, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the coordinate value indicating the touch position data is a value within the folder list display range (step SD34).

In step SD34, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the folder list, the scroll display of the folder list is performed according to the movement position from the touch position or the touch position of the touch pen. Processing is executed (step SD35).

  Next, CPU 31 executes a process for moving the slider position of folder list scroll bar 510 in accordance with the position of the selected folder in the folder list (step SD35 #). And it returns to step SD33 again. It should be noted that the processing order of steps SD35 and SD35 # can be switched. The same applies to the following.

  In this example, only the folder list scroll display process has been described to explain that the position of the cursor 520 does not change as an example. However, as described above, the touch of touching the position of the cursor 520 with the touch pen 27 is described. It is also possible to execute the display process so as to move to a position corresponding to the position.

  In that case, when an operation (touch off) for releasing the touched state is performed without touching the touched position and changing the touched position from the touched position, only the cursor 520 is displayed according to the touched position. Moving. At that time, the scroll display process of the folder list and the process of moving the slider position of the folder list scroll bar are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the touch pen 27 or the like is moved while touching on the screen, that is, the touch position is changed from the touched position while the touch position is changed (drag operation) is executed. The scroll display processing of the folder list is executed according to the movement locus (movement distance) of the touch pen. At that time, the moving process is also executed for the slider position of the folder list scroll bar.

  On the other hand, in step SD34, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the folder list display range, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the volume setting icon 550. Whether it is a value or not is determined (step SD36).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the CPU 31 next executes volume setting processing (step SD37). And it returns to step SD33 again. The volume setting process will be described later.

  In step SD36, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “open” icon 514. It is determined whether the value is within the display range (step SD38).

  In step SD36, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “open” icon 514, the CPU 31 next executes music file selection processing (step SD39). The music file selection process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD38 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “open” icon 514, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is then scrolled through the folder list. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of the bar 510 (step SD40).

  In step SD40, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the folder list scroll bar 510, the CPU 31 executes a scroll display process of the folder list according to the touch position ( Step SD41).

  Then, a process for moving the slider position of the folder list scroll bar 510 is executed according to the selected folder position in the folder list (step SD42). And it returns to step SD33 again.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD40 that the coordinates indicated by the touch position data are not within the display range of the folder list scroll bar 510, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the next selected function icon. It is determined whether the value is within the display range (step SD43).

  In step SD43, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the selected function icon, the CPU 31 executes a function corresponding to the selected function icon (step SD44).

  On the other hand, in step SD43, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the selection function icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “return” icon 512. It is determined whether the value is within the display range (step SD45).

  In step SD45, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “return” icon 512, the CPU 31 ends the music playback mode processing and performs step SD1 in FIG. The sound selection screen is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD45 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “return” icon 512, the process returns to step SD33.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the music file selection processing.

  Referring to FIG. 73, CPU 31 first displays music file selection screen 502 described with reference to FIG. 64 (step SD70).

  Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD70 #). The CPU 31 determines whether touch position data has been input from the touch panel 13 via the I / F circuit 42. That is, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the user performs a touch operation with the touch pen 27. In other words, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a coordinate value input by a user operation on the touch panel 13 is detected. If touch position data has not been input (NO in step SD70 #), the process in step SD70 # is repeated.

  On the other hand, if touch position data has been input (YES in step SD70 #), the process proceeds to step SD71.

  Then, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the music file list 540 (step SD71).

  In step SD71, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the music file list 540, the CPU 31 next performs a scroll display process of the music file list 540 according to the touch position. Execute (step SD72).

  Next, the CPU 31 executes a process for moving the slider position of the scroll bar 510 # of the music file list in accordance with the position of the selected music file in the music file list (step SD73). Then, the process returns to step SD70 # again.

  On the other hand, in step SD71, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the music file list 540, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the volume setting icon 550. Whether the value is within the display range is determined (step SD74). In step SD74, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the CPU 31 executes volume setting processing (step SD75). Then, the process returns to step SD70 # again. The volume setting process will be described later.

  In step SD74, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the display range of the “start” icon 526. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD76).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD76 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “start” icon 526, the CPU 31 executes music file playback processing (step SD76 #). The music file playback process will be described later.

  On the other hand, in step SD76, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “start” icon 526, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the next music file list. Whether the value is within the display range of the scroll bar 510 # is determined (step SD77).

  In step SD77, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the scroll bar 510 # of the music file list, the CPU 31 scrolls the music file list 540 according to the touch position data. Processing is executed (step SD78).

  Next, the CPU 31 executes a process for moving the slider position of the scroll bar 510 # of the music file list in accordance with the position of the selected music file in the music file list (step SD79). Then, the process returns to step SD70 # again.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD77 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the scroll bar 510 # of the music file list, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the next. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of the selected function icon (step SD80).

In step SD80, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the selected function icon, the CPU 31 executes a function corresponding to the selected function icon (step SD81). Then, the process returns to step SD70 # again. For example, if it is determined that the value is within the display range of the “favorite” selection function icon 515, the favorite folder selection screen 509 described above with reference to FIG. 102 is displayed. Then, by selecting one of the registration icons, a process for registering the music file in the selected folder is executed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD80 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the selection function icon display range, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “return” icon 512 #. Whether the value is within the display range of is determined.

  If it is determined in step SD82 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “return” icon 512 #, the process proceeds to “A” to select the music playback folder list in step SD32 in FIG. A screen is displayed.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the subroutine processing of the music file reproduction processing.
Referring to FIG. 74, CPU 31 starts playback of the selected music file (step SD90).

  As described above, the sound output control circuit 42c outputs to the headphone via the headphone amplifier 48 when the headphone 18 is connected according to the instruction from the CPU 31, and when the headphone is not connected, the sound output control circuit 42c Output to the right speakers 45 and 47 via 44 and 46.

  Next, a music file selection screen is displayed on the upper LCD 22 and a reproduction operation selection screen is displayed on the lower LCD 12 (step SD91).

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from the touch panel 13 (step SD92).

  In step SD92, when CPU 31 determines that touch position data is not input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether there is an operation by direction input button 14A next (step SD93).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD93 that there is an operation by the direction input button 14A, the CPU 31 scrolls the music file list selected by the cursor position on the music file selection screen according to the operation of the direction input button 14A. Is executed (step SD94).

  On the other hand, when determining in step SD93 that there is no operation by the direction input button 14A, the CPU 31 returns to step SD92 again.

  Then, CPU 31 determines whether or not a predetermined button is pressed next (step SD94 #).

  In step SD94 #, if the predetermined button is pressed, CPU 31 starts reproduction of the music file selected by the cursor position (step SD90).

On the other hand, CPU 31 returns to step SD92 again when the predetermined button is not pressed in step SD94 #. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined button is set to any one of the operation buttons 14B to 14E.

  In step SD92, when the touch position data is input from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the reproduction time bar 511 ( Step SD95).

  In step SD95, when the CPU 31 determines that the display indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the playback time bar 511, the CPU 31 executes a music file playback process from the time corresponding to the touch position (step S95). SD96).

  Then, the CPU 31 executes a process for moving the slider position indicating the reproduction position in the entire reproduction time in the reproduction time bar 511 corresponding to the touch position (step SD97). And it returns to step SD92 again.

  In step SD95, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the reproduction time bar 511, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is displayed next on the volume setting icon 550. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD98).

  In step SD98, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the CPU 31 executes a volume setting process (step SD99). And it returns to step SD92 again. The volume setting process will be described later.

  On the other hand, in step SD98, if the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the next coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the range of the visualizer switching icon 531. It is judged whether it is a value of (step SD100).

  In step SD100, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the visualizer switching icon 531, the visualizer display process is executed next (step SD101). And it returns to step SD92 again. The visualizer display process will be described later.

  In step SD100, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the visualizer switching icon 531, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is displayed next to the reproduction operation command icon. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD402). Here, as the playback operation command icons, a pause command icon 522, a next music selection command icon 524, and a previous music selection command icon 520 are provided as an example.

  In step SD402, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the icon of the reproduction operation command, the CPU 31 executes a function corresponding to the reproduction operation command (step SD103). And it returns to step SD92 again.

Specifically, when it is determined that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the pause command icon 522, the CPU 31 pauses the reproduction operation. If the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is determined to be a value within the display range of the selection command icon 524 for the next song, the CPU 31 starts playback of the next selected music file. On the other hand, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the previous song selection command icon 52.
If it is determined that the value is within the display range of 0, the CPU 31 starts playback of the previously selected music file.

  In step SD402, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the reproduction operation command icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the next display range of the selection function icon. It is determined whether the value is in the range.

  In step SD104, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the selected function icon, the CPU 31 executes the function corresponding to the selected function icon (step SD105). And it returns to step SD92 again. For example, in this example, a “favorite” icon 515, a playback mode switching icon 517, a speed interval adjustment icon 541, a tone color adjustment icon 542, and a recording data selection icon 544 are displayed as selection function icons.

  Specifically, as described above, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “favorite” icon 515, the CPU 31 selects the music file currently selected as the favorite folder. Execute the process to move to.

  In addition, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the playback mode switching icon 517, the CPU 31 switches and displays the setting of the playback mode.

  When the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the speed pitch adjustment icon 541, the CPU 31 executes a function of changing the playback speed and pitch described later.

  Further, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the timbre adjustment icon 542, the CPU 31 executes a filtering process for modulating the frequency described later to change to another timbre. Execute.

  Further, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the recording data selection icon 544, the CPU 31 has a function of outputting a recorded audio data file, which will be described later, from the speaker as a sound effect. Run.

  In step SD104, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the selection function icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is displayed next to the “return” icon 512a. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD106).

  In step SD106, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “return” icon 512a, the CPU 31 returns to step SD92.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD106 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “return” icon 512a, the process proceeds to “B”, and in step SD70 of FIG. Display the music file selection screen.

<Volume setting process>
Next, the volume setting process will be described.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged view of the volume setting icon 550.
Referring to FIG. 75A, the volume setting icon 550 is provided with a slider 552 whose volume increases from left to right as an example on the horizontal axis.

  The slider 552 is displayed at a position corresponding to the current value within the volume level parameter setting range.

  Here, an area in a direction where the volume is lower than the position corresponding to the current value displayed by the slider 552 is a volume lower area 554, and an area where the volume is higher than the position corresponding to the current value displayed by the slider 552. The area is set to a loud volume area 555.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, when the slider 552 is selected with a touch pen or the like, it corresponds to the current value according to a subsequent slide touch operation (an operation to change the touch position while continuing the touch-on state). The slider can be continuously moved (so-called drag operation) in any direction from the position in either the low volume area 554 or the high volume area 555.

  When the slider 552 is selected with a touch pen or the like, (i) when touch-on is performed on the slider 552, (ii) the touch position during the touch operation may enter the slider 552. The slider 552 may be dragged only in the case, or the drag operation may be performed only in the case (ii), or the drag operation is performed in either case (i) or (ii). It may be possible to do this.

Referring to FIG. 75 (b)
When the small volume area 554 other than the slider 552 is touched on with a touch pen or the like, the slider 552 can be instantaneously moved to the touch-on position. Thereby, the change to the volume smaller than the current volume value can be instantaneously performed. On the other hand, when the loud volume region 555 other than the slider 552 is touched on with a touch pen or the like, the slider 552 is not instantaneously moved to the touch-on position. As a result, it is impossible to instantaneously change the volume to a volume larger than the current volume value.

  Note that when touch-on is performed on the small volume area 554, (i) when touch-on is performed within the small volume area 554, (ii) the touch position during the touch operation may be within the small volume area 554. The slider 552 may be instantaneously moved to the touch-on position only in the case (i), or the slider 552 may be instantaneously moved to the touch position only in the case (ii). ) Or (ii), it may be possible to move instantaneously.

  When the low volume area 554 is touched, the slider 552 instantaneously moves to the touch position, but when the slide operation is continued thereafter, the drag operation as described above can be performed.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine process of the volume setting process according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 76, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of volume setting icon 550, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of slider 552. Whether it is a value is determined (step SD110).

In step SD110, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the slider display range, the locus moved by moving (sliding) the touch pen while touching the screen. Accordingly, the slider 552 is moved and displayed at the latest touch position (step SD114). That is, a continuous movement operation from the current position of the slider 552 to the desired position within the volume level parameter setting range is accepted.

  Then, the CPU 31 sets the volume according to the position of the slider 552 (step SD115). That is, the volume level parameter is updated to a value corresponding to the moved position of the slider 552 according to the moving operation. At this point, since the slider 552 continuously moves from the current position to the desired position, the volume level parameter is gradually adjusted with the movement.

  On the other hand, in step SD110, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the slider 552, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is then the volume input acceptance display range. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD111).

  In step SD111, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the volume input acceptance display range, the CPU 31 moves and displays the slider 552 at the position input by the touch pen (step SD112). Then, the volume is set according to the position of the slider 552 within the parameter setting range (step SD115).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD111 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the volume input acceptance display range, the CPU 31 executes an input invalidity determination process (step SD113). That is, it is determined that the input is invalid. Then, the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a small volume area is set in the volume input acceptance display range. The large volume area 555 is not set in the volume input acceptance display range. In other words, when the slider moves in a direction that is smaller than the current value of the parameter, in this example, the low volume area accepts an input that is an operation for moving the slider to a desired position, and from the current value of the parameter. When the slider moves in a direction in which the slider becomes larger, in this example, an input that is an operation for moving the slider to a desired position is not accepted in the loud volume region.

  Therefore, at the touch position, the slider 552 is immediately moved for the low volume area and set to a volume corresponding to the slider position. However, the high volume area is input invalidity determination processing, and the slider is not moved to the slider position. The corresponding volume is not set.

  When the sound volume setting process is executed by the touch pen by the process, the sound volume does not suddenly increase due to an erroneous operation by the user. That is, the position of the slider is changed by the touch pen in the direction in which the volume is reduced, and the volume setting process according to the position of the slider can be executed. However, the position of the slider is changed by the touch pen in the direction in which the volume is increased. The volume will not increase.

In particular, when setting processing using a touch pen is performed, the user can freely specify an arbitrary position on the touch panel, and the display range of the volume setting icon 550 cannot be increased for the sake of layout. . Therefore, when performing the volume setting process, it is necessary to carefully specify a position corresponding to a desired volume level within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, but in a direction in which the volume increases due to an erroneous operation. There is a possibility that the user may designate with the touch pen. Therefore, this process can suppress the stress of operating the game apparatus 10 while anxiety that the volume may suddenly increase due to an erroneous operation.

  In the above description, the operation of moving the slider to a desired position has been described with respect to the case where the low volume area is immediately moved and set to a volume corresponding to the slider position. It is also possible to set so that the volume level parameter is gradually adjusted as in the case of.

FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining another example of the volume setting icon.
Referring to FIG. 77 (a), here, a volume setting area for setting the volume output from each of the right speaker and the left speaker is shown.

  Specifically, the vertical axis (R) indicates the volume level of the right speaker, and the horizontal axis (L) indicates the volume level of the left speaker. That is, the coordinate value (position) of an arbitrary point is associated with the volume level of the right speaker and the left speaker. Here, a point 552 # indicating a position corresponding to the current volume level of the right speaker and the left speaker is displayed.

  The point 552 # is selected by touching the point 552 # with the touch pen, and the pointer is moved and displayed according to the moved locus by moving (sliding) the touch pen while touching the screen. On the other hand, when a point other than the point 552 # is touched with the touch pen, if the value is within the voice input acceptance display range, the point 552 # is moved and displayed at the position input by the touch pen.

  Here, the case where two types of parameters are set and the volume levels of the right speaker and the left speaker are respectively associated with the coordinate values (positions) of the horizontal axis and the vertical axis has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the two types of parameters. Further, it is possible to associate with a plurality of types of parameters. In addition, as the display within the parameter setting range, when there is one parameter, for example, the position of the parameter can be displayed in one dimension on the horizontal axis. In such a case, it is also possible to display the parameter position in a two-dimensional manner in two dimensions, the vertical axis and the horizontal axis. Furthermore, when a plurality of types of parameters are set, it is possible to display the parameter positions in multiple dimensions according to the number of types.

  Referring to FIG. 77 (b), here, a case where the sound volume level corresponding to the position is immediately set by touching with the touch pen within the sound volume input acceptance display range is shown. That is, the volume input reception display range is set as the volume input reception display range in the direction of decreasing the volume of at least one of the right speaker and the left speaker using a touch pen, for example. The area is not set within the volume input acceptance display range.

  Therefore, when a point other than the point 552 # is touched, the volume increases excessively without moving the pointer 552 # even in the direction of increasing the volume outside the voice input acceptance display range even when touching with the touch pen. This can prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

In this example, the case where the volume setting icon 550 is divided into the audio input acceptance display range and the other is described within the display range of the volume setting icon 550. However, the present invention is not limited to the volume setting. For example, the playback time described with reference to FIG. In the bar, it is also possible to divide the input reception display range and other areas. For example, a position that has already been reproduced can be set within the input reception display range, and a position that has not been reproduced yet can be outside the input reception display range, and only the continuous movement operation of the slider 519 can be performed. By this processing, it is possible to prevent the reproduction from being started from a position where the reproduction is not performed by touching with the touch pen, and to suppress the user from feeling uncomfortable.

<Speed pitch adjustment processing>
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the function of changing the playback speed and pitch by selecting the speed pitch adjustment icon 541.

  Referring to FIG. 78, here, a speed pitch adjustment screen displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 by pressing speed pitch adjustment icon 541 is shown.

  Here, when the user selects and moves the slider 553 using a touch pen or the like, it is possible to adjust the reproduction speed and pitch corresponding to the movement position. Specifically, the playback speed can be increased by moving the slider to the right from the current position of the slider 553. Conversely, the playback speed can be reduced by moving the slider to the left. Further, the pitch can be increased by moving the slider 553 upward from the current position of the slider 553. Conversely, the pitch can be lowered by moving the slider 553 downward.

  By executing this function, it is possible to change the audio signal that is reproduced and output according to the user's preference.

<Tone adjustment processing>
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a function of changing the frequency of the reproduction signal by selecting the timbre adjustment icon 542, or performing a filtering process or the like to change to another timbre.

  79, a timbre adjustment icon selection screen displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 by pressing timbre adjustment icon 542 is shown here.

  Here, four tone color adjustment selection icons are provided. Specifically, a “radio” icon 542a that adjusts to a tone that can be heard from an old radio by modulating the frequency, etc., and “karaoke” that suppresses vocal voice based on subtraction of left and right sounds of a stereo sound source There are provided an icon 542b, an “echo” icon 542c that is echoed by filtering processing, and an “electronic sound” icon 542d that changes to a sound of a timbre by modulating the frequency. The function of the selected icon is executed when the user selects one of the four tone color adjustment selection icons using a touch pen or the like.

  Here, a case has been described in which four timbre adjustment selection icons are provided and adjustment can be made to four timbres. However, the number of timbre adjustment selection icons is not limited to four, and any number may be used. By providing a plurality of tone color adjustment selection patterns, it is possible to adjust the tone color according to the user's taste.

  Here, the function of the “karaoke” icon 542b has been described with respect to the case where the vocal voice is suppressed based on the subtraction of the left and right sounds of the stereo sound source. This is because the sound is localized at the center of the sound field of the stereo sound source, and the environmental sound is localized to the left and right other than the center. Note that the voice of the vocal can be suppressed according to another method without being limited to this method.

<Sound effect selection process>
FIG. 80 shows that the R button 14J is selected by selecting the sound effect selection icons 532 and 534.
It is a figure explaining the case where the sound effect output from a speaker etc. is changed when a user operates L button 14I. In this embodiment, by operating the R button 14J and the L button 14I, a sound effect can be added and enjoyed during playback of music based on the music file.

  Referring to FIG. 80, the sound effect can be changed by selecting sound effect selection icons 532 and 534 displayed in FIG. Specifically, the initial state is set to “no sound effect” (step SD120). Next, by selecting the sound effect selection icon 532 once, the sound effect of “Taiko” is set (step SD121). Next, by selecting the sound effect selection icon 532, the sound effect of “cymbals” is set (step SD122). Then, by selecting the sound effect selection icon 532, the sound effect of “trumpet” is set (step SD123). Then, by selecting the sound effect icon 532 again, the state of “no sound effect” is set (step SD120). That is, the sound effect output from the speaker or the like can be switched in accordance with the number of selections of the sound effect selection icon. In this example, by selecting the sound effect selection icons 532 and 534 for each of the L button 14I and the R button 14J, it is possible to set the sound effect according to each button operation.

  In addition, although the case where the sound effect is switched in the order of “no sound effect”, “taiko”, “cymbal”, “trumpet” has been described here, it is not limited to this order, and any order is possible. It is. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to set so as to switch to a plurality of sound effects. It is also possible to set different types of sound effects for each of the R button 14J and the L button 14I.

<Visualizer display processing>
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the visualizer display process according to the present embodiment.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD100 in FIG. 74 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the range of the visualizer switching icon 531, the visualizer display process is executed.

  In FIG. 81 (a), a playback operation selection screen of the lower LCD 12 is displayed. Since it is the same as that described in FIG. 65, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

FIG. 81B shows a visualizer display screen on the upper LCD 22.
FIG. 82 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the visualizer display processing.

  Referring to FIG. 82, first, the audio output level is detected (step SD130). Specifically, the output level detection circuit 42d detects the output level of the audio signal output from the audio output control circuit 42c to the amplifiers 44 and 46, and outputs the result to the CPU 31.

  Next, the CPU 31 generates an object corresponding to the output level detected by the output level detection circuit 42d (step SD131).

  Then, the object is scrolled and displayed (step SD132). Again, it returns to step SD130 and repeats said process.

Specifically, in FIG. 81 (b), the output level of the audio signal being reproduced is sequentially detected, new objects are sequentially generated at positions corresponding to the output level, and scrolled to display them.
In this embodiment, at the right end of the display area of the visualizer, objects 801 (specifically, ground objects) are generated one after another at a height corresponding to the output level, and the whole is scroll-displayed to the left. Further, on the ground object thus generated, another object (in this example, the objects 802 and 803 as an example) is automatically motion-controlled (that is, the screen is moved left and right along the ground). Move or jump).

  In this example, the height of the ground object is determined by the total output level of the right and left speakers 45 and 47 of the audio signal being reproduced, or the first object (this embodiment) is determined by the output level of the right speaker 45. In the example, the operation control content (speed, acceleration, jump height, etc.) of the bike-shaped object 802) is determined, and the output level of the left speaker 47 determines the second object (bike-shaped object 803 in this embodiment). The operation control content is determined.

  As another example, the height of the ground object for the first object (object 802 in this embodiment) is determined based on the output level of the signal for the right speaker 45 among the audio signals. Alternatively, the operation control content (speed, acceleration, jump height, etc.) of the first object is determined, and the ground for the second object (object 803 in this embodiment) is determined based on the output level of the signal for the left speaker 47. The height of the object may be determined, or the motion control content of the second object may be determined.

  The user can visually recognize the change in the output level from the height of the terrain according to the output level of the audio signal. Further, since the two motorcycle-shaped objects 802 and 803 perform a jumping operation according to the height of the terrain, it is possible to visually recognize the change in the output level of the audio signal from the change in the objects 802 and 803.

  The two motorcycle-shaped objects 802 and 803 are relative to each other according to the volume level difference between the audio signal output from the right speaker 45 and the audio signal output from the left speaker 47. The positional relationship may change.

  Note that when the playback process of the selected music file is paused, since there is no change in the terrain according to the output level, a flat terrain object is scrolled and displayed. At that time, for example, when the user operates the L button 14I and the R button 14J described above, since the sound effect is output from the speaker or the like, the output level of the sound signal of the sound effect is detected, and the sound signal A terrain object corresponding to the output level is generated and scrolled. The following visualizer display screen is processed according to the same method.

FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining another visualizer display screen.
83 (a) and 83 (b), here, a visualizer that generates a snowball-shaped object 301a having a size corresponding to the output level of the audio signal detected by the upper LCD 22 and scrolls the object is displayed. It is shown. Below the snowball object 301a, the terrain indicating the slope is scrolled and displayed so that the snowball object 301a appears to roll down the slope.

  83 (a) and 83 (b) are compared, and according to the detected output level of the audio signal, the snowball-shaped object 301a of FIG. 83 (a) is the snowball of FIG. 83 (b). A case in which the shape is larger than the object 301a is shown.

By changing the size of the snowball object 301a, the user can visually recognize the change in the output level of the audio signal according to the size of the snowball object 301a.

  Further, since the snowball-shaped object 301a performs a bounding motion at a predetermined timing when the topography indicating the slope is scrolled, the size of the snowball-shaped object 301a can be recognized more visually.

FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining yet another visualizer display screen.
Referring to FIG. 84, here, the output level of the audio signal detected by upper LCD 22 is detected, an object 301 # having a predetermined character shape is generated at a position corresponding to the output level, and scrolling is performed. The visualizer to display is shown. In addition, the screen background area is scrolled from the right screen edge to the left screen edge, and coin-shaped objects 606 are continuously arranged from the position of the predetermined character-shaped object 301 # at predetermined intervals. The screen is set to scroll from the right screen edge to the left screen edge.

  Furthermore, another predetermined character-shaped object 605 is displayed, and is set so that a jumping operation can be executed in the screen as an example by a user operation. When the predetermined character-shaped object 605 overlaps with the coin-shaped object 606, the display of the coin-shaped object 605 is deleted, and the number of times of overlapping with the coin-shaped object 605 is displayed in the upper column on the left side of the screen. It is set to display.

  Therefore, when the height of the object 301 # changes, the user can recognize the change in the output level of the audio signal through vision. Further, since the coin-shaped objects 606 are also continuously arranged according to the height of the object 301 #, the change in the output level of the audio signal can be visually recognized from the height of the coin-shaped object 606. Is possible.

  That is, the display position of the third object (in this embodiment, the coin-shaped object 806) is determined according to the output level of the audio signal. Specifically, the third object is displayed at a height corresponding to the output level at the end of the display area of the virtual space, and then scroll-displayed in the opposite end direction. Then, the movement of the fourth object (the object 805 having a predetermined character shape in this embodiment) is controlled in accordance with the user operation. Then, a predetermined game process is performed according to the positional relationship between the third object and the fourth object. Thereby, during music reproduction, the output level can be confirmed, and enjoyment by operation can be given to the user.

  In addition, the user can operate the object 605 having a predetermined character shape in response to the operation input, and when the coin-shaped object 606 is overlapped with the coin-shaped object 606, the display of the coin-shaped object 606 is erased. Can recognize the change in the output level of the audio signal also from its own operation input (button press).

  In this example, the visualizer display process of three patterns has been described. However, the number of visualizer display processes is not particularly limited to three, and may be one, and a function of a visualizer display process of a plurality of patterns may be provided.

As an example, according to the number of touches within the display range of the visualizer switching icon 531 on the playback operation selection screen of the lower LCD 12 shown in FIG. It is possible to set to change. Then, for example, when the display range of the visualizer switching icon 531 is touched with the touch pen for the fourth time, it is possible to set so that the visualizer display process is ended and the screen of FIG. 65B is displayed. It is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during playback of music based on a music file, the user can add and play a sound effect by performing a predetermined operation. For the level detection, not only the output of music reproduction based on the music file but also the output of the sound effect based on the user operation is considered. That is, an output level obtained by summing both the audio signal based on the music file and the sound signal of the sound effect based on the user operation is detected as the output level of the above-described audio signal. Thereby, the display content of the visualizer is indirectly changed according to the user operation, and more specifically, the display position of the object and the content of the operation are changed.

<Headphone output processing>
FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flow when the headphones according to the present embodiment are detected. The headphone output process operates independently of other processes when the sound function is being executed.

  Referring to FIG. 85, it is first determined whether or not headphones have been detected (step SD140). Specifically, in the I / F circuit 42, for example, when a headphone plug is inserted into the jack 62 described in FIG. 2, a mechanical switch is turned on, or a headphone plug is inserted into the jack 62. As a result, it is detected that the electrical connection has been established, and it is detected that the plug of the headphones has been inserted into the jack. The I / F circuit 42 outputs the detection result to the CPU 31, and the CPU 31 receives the signal indicating the detection result from the I / F circuit 42 and determines that the headphones have been detected.

  And CPU31 performs an equalizer adjustment process next, when headphones are detected (step SD141).

Then, the process ends (END).
When the user listens to the sound signal reproduced with headphones attached and when the user listens to the sound signals reproduced from the speakers, the ear holes are closed when the headphones are attached, so the sound is heard when the headphones are not attached. There is a possibility that the characteristics change greatly and the user feels uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when headphones are detected, equalization adjustment processing is performed that adjusts a predetermined frequency band of audio data so that the audio signal is not harsh to the user due to a change in acoustic characteristics.

  With this method, it is possible to output an audio signal that is easy for the user to listen to even when listening to music data with headphones. It is also possible to adjust the volume of the sound effect output according to the user operation of the L button 14I and the R button 14J, or to change the type of the sound effect described with reference to FIG. 80 according to the detection of the headphones.

  Here, a case has been described in which equalization adjustment processing for adjusting a predetermined frequency band is performed when headphones are detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when headphones are detected, playback is performed from a speaker. It is also possible to switch between the case of performing and the audio signal itself to be reproduced. For example, when playing from a speaker, for a sound with a high pitch that does not feel uncomfortable, replace the sound that is too high when listening with headphones with another sound with low pitch or hear noise when listening with headphones. It is also possible to replace it with another sound.

  Alternatively, instead of switching the reproduced audio signal itself, when headphones are detected, the volume of the reproduced audio signal can be switched to the case of reproducing from a speaker. For example, when playing from a speaker, the volume of a sound signal that is reproduced without a sense of incongruity is increased or decreased with respect to the volume of the sound signal that is poorly balanced when heard through headphones. By doing so, it is also possible to adjust so that it can be heard in a balanced manner.

<Sleep processing>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart for explaining the sleep process when the game apparatus 10 is folded to the folding position.

  Referring to FIG. 86, CPU 31 determines whether or not a folding position has been detected (step SD150). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a determination signal indicating the closed state is input from the folding position detection sensor 50. When it is determined that the determination signal indicating the closed state is input from the folding position detection sensor 50, that is, when the folding position is detected, in step SD150, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the music reproduction operation is being performed next. Is determined (step SD151). Specifically, as described above, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the “start” icon is selected and the reproduction process of the selected music file is being executed.

  When the CPU 31 receives the determination signal indicating the closed state output from the folding position detection sensor 50, for example, when the game apparatus 10 is in operation, the CPU 31 stops the operation, and data on the operation state Set to so-called sleep state to save. On the other hand, after the game apparatus 10 enters the sleep state, the CPU 31 receives the determination signal indicating the open state output from the folding position detection sensor 50, and enters the sleep state based on the stored operation state data. Execute the process to return to the original state.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD151 that the music playback operation is not in progress, it executes a sleep process (step SD154). That is, when another function is operating, the operation is stopped and the data of the operation state is saved. As a result, when music is being played back by the speaker, the music playback is stopped by folding the game apparatus 10 from the open state to the closed state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD151 that the music playback operation is being performed, the CPU 31 next determines whether or not headphones are detected (step SD152). Specifically, as described above, the CPU 31 determines whether or not a signal indicating a detection result accompanying wearing of the headphones from the I / F circuit 42 has been received. On the other hand, as described later, when music is played back with headphones, music playback continues even after the game apparatus 10 is folded from the opened state to the closed state.

  In step SD152, if the CPU 31 determines that no headphones are detected, it executes a sleep process (step SD154). That is, even when the music playback operation is being performed, if the headphones are not detected, the CPU 31 stops the operation and stores the data of the operation state in the same manner as the operation of other functions.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD152 that headphones are detected, the CPU 31 shifts to the sleep music playback mode (step SD153).

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the sleep music playback mode.

  Referring to FIG. 87, CPU 31 continues only the music playback function, and executes sleep processing for the other functions (step SD160). For example, the display process or the like enters a sleep state.

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not there is a setting for continuous playback operation (step SD161). Specifically, the playback mode is set to a playback mode that repeatedly plays back the data being played, a playback mode that plays back in order and repeats from the beginning when all playback is completed, a playback mode that repeatedly plays back only the set section, etc. Or the “Random” folder is selected and executed.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD161 that the continuous playback operation is set, the music playback operation is continued (step SD162).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD161 that there is no continuous playback operation setting, the CPU 31 ends the playback operation with the current music file (step SD163). Then, the sleep process described above is executed (step SD164).

  According to this method, when the user does not operate the game apparatus 10 by folding, the sleep process is executed except when the music is being played. Therefore, it is possible to extend the life of the power supply of the game apparatus 10 by this processing. Further, when the user is performing the music playback function, if the game apparatus 10 is folded, the headphones are detected, and if the continuous playback operation is set, the music playback operation is continued. .

  Generally, it is considered that the user is highly likely to carry the game apparatus 10 in a folded shape such as a bag or a pocket of clothes. Therefore, in such a folded state, since the possibility of operating the game apparatus 10 is low, the sleep process is usually performed.

  On the other hand, even if the user does not operate the game apparatus 10, it is highly convenient if the user can execute the music playback operation function while carrying it in a folded shape.

  Therefore, even when the game apparatus 10 is in a folded shape, the music playback operation is continued if the music playback operation is being performed, the headphones are detected, and the continuous playback operation is set. This can be provided to the convenience of the user. In addition, when the continuous playback operation is not set, the user can determine that the music playback operation is not desired, so that the normal sleep process is executed after the current music file playback operation is finished. By doing so, it is possible to provide convenience for the user. In particular, after the current music file playback operation is completed, the normal sleep process is executed, so that the playback operation can be ended without giving a sense of incongruity to the user enjoying the music playback operation.

<Automatic recording and playback processing>
In the automatic recording / reproducing process, the two function processes of the automatic recording mode and the automatic reproduction mode operate independently of each other. As described in step SD2 of FIG. 66, after the sound selection screen 400 is displayed, the automatic recording / reproducing process is started.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart for explaining the automatic recording mode according to the present embodiment.
Referring to FIG. 88, it is determined whether or not the input volume from microphone 43 is greater than or equal to a threshold value (step SD170). Specifically, the voice input control circuit 42b detects whether or not the input volume from the microphone 43 is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and detects that the input volume from the microphone 43 is equal to or higher than the threshold value. The detection result is output to the CPU 31.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD170 that the input volume from the microphone 43 is greater than or equal to the threshold value, the CPU 31 executes a recording process (step SD171). Specifically, the CPU 31 receives the detection result that the input volume from the microphone 43 from the audio input control circuit 42b is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and executes the recording process.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine process of the recording process according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 89, first, CPU 31 determines whether there is a voice input (step SD180). If the CPU 31 determines that there is an audio input, the CPU 31 temporarily stores the recording data input from the audio input control circuit 42b (step SD181). Specifically, the CPU 31 temporarily stores in the main memory.

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the recorded data has reached a capacity that can be stored in the slot (step SD182). Here, the slot indicates a recording data storage area stored as a recording data file in the storage memory 34. In this example, it is assumed that a plurality of slots used for recording processing are provided in the storage memory 34 in advance. In this example, as an example, it is assumed that 10 seconds of recorded data can be stored in one slot.

  In step SD182, when CPU 31 determines that the recorded data has not reached the capacity that can be stored in the slot, CPU 31 repeats the processing of steps SD180 and SD181 to temporarily store the recorded data.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD182 that the recorded data has reached the capacity that can be stored in the slot, the CPU 31 proceeds to step SD184 and ends the recording. Then, returning to FIG. 88, the process proceeds to step SD172.

  On the other hand, when determining in step SD180 that there is no voice input, the CPU 31 proceeds to step SD183.

  In step SD183, the CPU 31 determines whether or not there is no voice input for a predetermined period. For example, as an example, the predetermined period for executing the silence determination can be set to 3 seconds. The said period is an example and can be set to an appropriate period.

  In step SD183, when CPU 31 determines that there is no voice input for a predetermined period, recording ends (step SD184). Then, returning to FIG. 88, the process returns to step SD172.

  On the other hand, in step SD183, if it is not determined that there is no voice input for a predetermined period, that is, if there is a voice input again, the CPU 31 returns to step SD180 and proceeds to step SD181.

  When there is voice input by the recording process, the recorded data is automatically saved within the capacity that can be stored in the slot, and when there is no voice input, the recording process is automatically performed. finish.

Through these series of processes (SD180 to SD183), sound is automatically recorded on the sound selection screen 400. As a result, what the user has spoken on the sound selection screen 400 (including that he / she spoke without being conscious) is automatically recorded in a capacity that can be stored in the slot.

  Referring to FIG. 88 again, next, CPU 31 determines whether or not the recorded data exceeds a predetermined capacity (step SD172). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the recording data temporarily stored in the main memory exceeds the capacity. As the predetermined capacity, for example, it is possible to set the capacity to be equal to or more than the minimum time that the user can recognize as an audio signal when played back. That is, the case where the capacity is less than the predetermined capacity is a capacity that cannot be recognized as an audio signal when the user reproduces the recorded data.

  In step SD172, if the CPU 31 determines that there is recorded data of a predetermined capacity or more in the main memory, it executes a recorded data storage process (step SD173). On the other hand, in step SD172, if the CPU 31 determines that there is no recording data of a predetermined capacity or more, the recording data is the unrecognizable recording data with a small amount of stored data, so that the temporarily stored recording data is stored. Is deleted (step SD174). Note that the predetermined capacity is smaller than the storable capacity of the slot. Therefore, the recording data is automatically deleted for data having a length that cannot be recognized as a voice signal by the user.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart for explaining the subroutine processing of the recording data saving processing.
Referring to FIG. 90, first, CPU 31 confirms an empty slot (step SD190). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not there is a slot that does not include recording data among a plurality of slots that are a plurality of recording data storage areas provided in the storage memory 34 in advance.

  Then, the CPU 31 determines whether there is an empty slot (step SD191).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD191 that there is an empty slot, the CPU 31 executes a storage process for recording data in the empty slot as a recording data file (step SD192). Specifically, the CPU 31 stores the recording data temporarily stored via the memory control circuit 33 in the storage memory 34 as a recording data file. Then, the flow returns to the flow of FIG. 88 (return).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD191 that there is no empty slot, it determines one slot from among a plurality of slots by a process using a random number, and records the recorded data in the slot determined by the random number. Overwrite processing is executed as a file (step SD193). And it returns to the flow of FIG. 30 (return).

By this processing, one recording data file is saved in the slot.
On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD191 that the recorded data is not less than the recordable capacity, the CPU 31 executes a deletion process for deleting the old recorded data file (step SD193). Then, the process returns to step SD191 again to determine whether the capacity is less than the recordable capacity, and the process of step SD193 is repeated until the capacity is less than the recordable capacity. When the recorded data becomes less than the recordable capacity, the above-described storage process is executed as a recorded data file. Therefore, the old recording data file is automatically updated to the new recording data file.

Next, the automatic reproduction mode will be described.
FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the automatic playback mode according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 91, CPU 31 determines whether there is a slot in which the recording data file is stored (step SD200). Specifically, the CPU 31 determines whether or not recording data files exist in a plurality of slots provided in advance in the storage memory 34 via the memory control circuit 33.

  In step SD200, if there is no recording data file in the slot, the CPU 31 repeats the process of step SD200.

  On the other hand, if CPU 31 determines in step SD200 that there is a recorded data file in the slot, it executes a reproduction process of the recorded data file (step SD201). Next, the CPU 31 executes standby processing (step SD202). Specifically, CPU 31 waits for a predetermined period and returns to step SD200 again. The standby process may be a standby for a predetermined period, or may be a standby for a random period.

  Therefore, when there is a recording data file in the slot, the CPU 31 repeats the reproduction process in a certain period or a random period.

  Further, in the reproduction process, when it is determined that the recording data files exist in the plurality of slots of the storage memory 34, the reproduction process of the recording data files stored in each slot is executed in order. Further, during the reproduction process, the bird-shaped object 410 of FIG. 61 can be displayed so as to operate. Through the display process, the user can visually recognize that the reproduction process is being executed by the operation of the bird-shaped object 410.

  With this processing, when the user speaks in the sound selection screen of FIG. 61 with words whose input volume of the microphone exceeds the threshold value, the voice signal as the spoken words is recorded in the recording data file by the automatic recording mode. Saved in the slot. Then, the audio signal stored in the slot as the recording data file is automatically reproduced by the automatic reproduction mode, and the reproduction process is repeated.

  With this function, the user can create his / her audio signal as a recording data file and play it back.

  In the above description, the method of executing the recording process or the recording storage process based on whether or not the recording data has reached a predetermined capacity has been described. However, the method is not limited to the capacity, and for example, the determination is based on the recording time. It is also possible to make a determination based on another parameter.

<Setting process>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine process of the setting process according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 92, when CPU 31 determines in FIG. 61 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is a value within the display range of “setting” icon 408, CPU 31 displays the setting screen (step SD210). ).

FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen 508 according to the present embodiment.
Referring to FIG. 93, here, “headphone” setting item 560, “touch sound” setting item 562, and “backlight” setting item 564 are provided. As a setting item 560 for “headphones”, a selection function icon 561 for selecting and setting “stereo” or “monaural” is provided. In addition, as the setting item 562 for “touch sound”, a selection function icon 563 for selecting and setting “False” or “Never” is provided. Further, a selection function icon 565 for selecting and setting “always on” or “automatic off” is provided as the “backlight” setting item 564. In addition, an “initialize save data” icon 566 is provided. By selecting the “initialize save data” icon 566, a recording data file in the automatic recording / reproduction process or a microphone recording / reproduction mode described later can be used. The recording data file to be created and the contents of the music file registered in “Favorites” are deleted. Also, by selecting the “return” icon 512b, the screen returns to the previous sound selection screen 400.

  Referring to FIG. 92 again, CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD211).

  In step SD211, if the CPU 31 determines that touch position data is input from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the “headphone” function selection icon. Judgment is made (step SD212).

  In step SD212, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “headphone” function selection icon, the CPU 31 determines whether the current setting is “stereo” ( Step SD213).

  In step SD213, the CPU 31 switches to monaural setting when the current setting is “stereo” (step SD214).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD213 that the current setting is not “stereo”, the CPU 31 switches to the stereo setting (step SD215).

  When the “stereo” setting is selected, the audio output is output in stereo when headphones are connected. That is, the right output and the left output are output separately. On the other hand, in the case of the “monaural” setting, when the headphones are connected, the audio output is output in monaural. When the headphones are not connected, the audio output is output in stereo regardless of the setting.

  In step SD212, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the function selection icon “headphone”, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “touch sound”. It is determined whether or not the value is within the display range of the function selection icon (step SD216).

  In step SD216, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the function selection icon “touch sound”, the CPU 31 determines whether the current setting is “False” ( Step SD217).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD217 that the current setting is “False”, the CPU 31 switches to a setting that does not generate a touch sound (step SD218).

And it returns to step SD211 again.
In step SD217, if the CPU 31 determines that the current setting is not “False”, the CPU 31 switches to a setting for smoothing the touch sound (Step SD219).

  In step SD216, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the function selection icon “touch sound”, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “back”. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of the function selection icon “light function” (step SD220).

  In step SD220, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the “backlight” function selection icon, the CPU 31 determines whether the current setting is “always on”. (Step SD221).

  In step SD221, if the CPU 31 determines that the current setting is “always on”, the CPU 31 switches to the automatic off setting (step SD222). When it is determined that the game apparatus 10 has not been operated for a certain period of time by switching to the automatic off setting, a process of automatically turning off the backlight is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD221 that the current setting is not “always on”, the CPU 31 always switches to the on setting (step SD223). Then, the process returns to step SD211.

  On the other hand, in step SD220, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “backlight” function selection icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “save”. It is determined whether or not the value is within the display range of the function selection icon “initialize data” (step SD224).

  In step SD224, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the function selection icon “initialize save data”, it is registered in the recording data file and “favorite”. The deletion processing of the content thus executed is executed (step SD225). That is, the recording data file stored in the storage data memory 34 is deleted.

  In step SD224, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the function selection icon display range of “initialization of save data”, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “returns”. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of the function selection icon.

  In step SD226, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the function selection icon “return”, the CPU 31 returns to the previous sound selection screen 400.

  With the setting process, according to the user's preference, for example, with respect to a reproduction process when wearing headphones, in the case of one ear, the stereo setting can be switched to the monaural setting. With this switching setting, it is possible to select an appropriate reproduction process according to the type of headphones. In the case of both ears, it is naturally possible to switch to monaural setting.

<Microphone recording / playback mode>
Next, the microphone recording / playback mode will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine process in the microphone recording / reproducing mode.

  Referring to FIG. 94, when the CPU 31 shifts to the microphone recording / playback mode, it first displays a recording data file list selection screen for recording and playing with the microphone (step SD230).

  FIG. 95 is a view for explaining a recording data file list selection screen 600 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 95, a case where a recording data file list selection screen 600 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 is shown.

  The user can select an arbitrary recording data file from the recording data file list by touching the screen of the lower LCD 12 with the touch pen 27 or the like. As will be described later, it is assumed that the recording data file is set to a display color selectively designated by the user. Here, each recording data file in the recording data file list corresponds to one of a plurality of slots provided in advance for use in recording processing in the storage memory 34.

  For example, as an example, it is assumed that the cursor 590 selects the recording data file displayed at the top left of the recording data file list 610 on the recording data file list selection screen 600. For example, by touching a recording data file included in the recording data file list 610 with the touch pen 27 or the like, the cursor 590 moves to the touched recording data file, and the recording data file designated by the cursor 590 is selected. .

  Also, touch any recording data file on the screen and move to the position of any other recording data file while keeping touching, that is, while maintaining the selection state of the recording data file designated by the cursor 590. It is assumed that the position of the recording data file is changed by performing (slide operation).

  Here, for example, the recording data file 615 is assumed to be a file in which recording data is not stored. The same applies to other items. On the other hand, the other recorded data files are files in which recorded data is stored. In this example, as an example, it is assumed that an audio signal can be recorded for about 10 seconds per file.

  The user can set the volume output from the speaker or the like by designating the volume setting icon 550 with the touch pen 27 or the like. Since the processing is the same as described above, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  Further, the user can return to the sound selection screen 400 which is the previous screen by selecting the “return” icon 620.

  In addition, when a recording data file is selected on the recording data file list selection screen 600 and the “play” icon 570 is selected, a reproduction process is started and a recording data reproduction operation selection screen 301 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when a file in which recording data is not stored is selected on the recording data file list selection screen 600, the “play” icon 570 is switched to the “record” icon 570 #. Then, by selecting the “record” icon 570 #, a recording start screen 602 described later is displayed.

  Further, by selecting the “erase” icon 571 with the touch pen 27 or the like, the currently selected recording data file can be deleted and set to a file in which no recording data is stored.

  In addition, as the display of the recording data file, the data amount of the recording data included in the whole of each file is displayed as a water level. By this display, the user can sensuously recognize the data amount of the recording data file. In the recording data file list 610, a case where the shape indicating the recording data file is changed is shown. For example, when a processing editing function using a tone color adjustment icon 542 or the like to be described later is executed and “Wagaki” is selected, that is, when recording data is changed to another recording data, a recording data file corresponding to the processing editing is displayed. The display process is performed so as to change to the shape.

  With this display, the user can intuitively recognize that the recorded data file is a file that has been processed and edited, which is convenient for the user.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a recording data reproduction operation selection screen 601 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a case where a recorded data reproduction operation selection screen 601 is displayed on the lower LCD 12.

  Specifically, the user can execute a function of changing music in a playback operation or the like of recorded data by selecting with a touch pen or the like.

  Here, a case where a speed pitch adjustment icon 541, a tone color adjustment icon 542, a playback mode switching icon 517, and a “wow” icon 586 are provided as selection function icons is shown.

  The user can execute the function of changing the playback speed and the pitch by selecting the above-described speed pitch adjustment icon 541.

  In addition, the user can execute a function of modulating the frequency of the reproduced signal by selecting the timbre adjustment icon 542, or executing a filtering process or the like to process and edit another timbre. Specifically, it is possible to provide a tone color adjustment icon as described with reference to FIG. 79, or it is possible to provide another tone color adjustment icon.

  Further, the user can pause the recording data file being played by pressing the pause command icon 580 as the playback operation command icon. At that time, the display of the pause command icon 580 is switched to the playback command icon 582 #. A reverse playback command icon 580 is also provided as a playback operation command icon. When the reverse playback command icon 580 is selected, reverse playback processing is executed. At that time, the reverse playback command icon 580 is switched to the pause command icon 580 #. As the command icon, two icons of a reproduction command and a reverse reproduction command are displayed, and the selected icon is switched to a pause command icon. Therefore, the user can switch between the reproduction operation and the reverse reproduction operation with one action using the touch pen 27 or the like.

That is, in the playback interface for music data (here, music data will be described as an example, but video data may be used), two command icon areas are provided (a first command icon area and a second command icon area). Either the reverse playback command icon or the pause command icon is switched and displayed in the first command icon area, and either the playback command icon or the pause command icon is switched and displayed in the second command icon area.

More specifically, it is shown below.
During stop: The reverse playback command icon is displayed in the first command icon area, and the playback command icon is displayed in the second command icon area.

  During playback: A reverse playback command icon is displayed in the first command icon area, and a pause command icon is displayed in the second command icon area.

  During reverse playback: The pause command icon is displayed in the first command icon area, and the playback command icon is displayed in the second command icon area.

Playback command icon: When touched, the audio data starts to be played in order.
Reverse playback command icon: When touched, reverse playback of audio data is started.

Pause command icon: Pauses playback of audio data when touched.
In this example, the pause command icon for pause is described, but it is also possible to use a stop command icon for stopping instead of pause.

  As a result, the two command icon areas can be used to make a transition to playback, reverse playback, or stop in any state of stop, playback, and reverse playback.

  More generally speaking, in an information processing apparatus that can take three states (first state, second state, and third state), when two button areas are provided and the current state is the first state, A transition button to the state and a transition button to the third state are displayed (i). When the transition button from the state (i) to the second state is operated to shift to the second state, the transition button to the second state is changed to a transition button to the first state, and the first state A transition button to and a transition button to the third state are displayed (ii). Further, when the transition button from the state (i) to the third state is operated to shift to the third state, the transition button to the third state is changed to a transition button to the first state, and the state is changed to the second state. And a transition button to the first state are displayed (iii). Further, when the button for shifting to the first state is operated from the state (ii) to shift to the first state, the state returns to the state (i). Further, when the state is shifted from the (iii) state to the first state by operating the transition button to the first state, the state returns to the (i) state. In addition, when the transition button from the state (ii) to the third state is operated to shift to the third state, the transition button to the first state is changed to a transition button to the second state, and the third state The transition button to is changed to a transition button to the first state, and a transition button to the second state and a transition button to the first state are displayed. In addition, when the transition to the second state is performed by operating the transition button to the second state from the state of (iii), the transition button to the second state is changed to a transition button to the first state. The transition button to is changed to the transition button to the third state.

  Thereby, it is possible to efficiently shift to any of the three states using the two button areas.

Further, the user can switch the playback mode in the recorded data file list by pressing the playback mode switching icon 517. Specifically, a playback mode that repeatedly plays back the data being played, a playback mode that plays in order, and a playback mode that repeats from the beginning when all playback is finished, a playback mode that plays back in order, and stops when all playback is finished, random It is possible to switch between the playback mode for playback with and the playback mode for repeatedly playing back only the set section in order.

  In addition, the user can press the “Wakigaki” icon 586 to select and save the recording data file that has been processed and edited by filtering processing or the like by selecting the timbre adjustment icon 588 to the recording data file, for example. .

  In FIG. 96B, the recording data file list 610 displayed on the lower LCD 12 screen of FIG. 95 is displayed as the recording data file selection list screen 601 # on the upper LCD 22 screen. It is shown. The recorded data files displayed in the recorded data file list 610 # can be selected by operating the direction input button 14A. That is, after selecting a recording data file with a touch pen or the like on the screen of the lower LCD 12 in FIG. 95, on the recording data reproduction operation selection screen on the lower LCD 12 of FIG. It is possible to select the processing for the reproduction operation of the recording data file that is the target selected by the touch pen or the like by using the touch pen or the like and select the recording data file by the direction input button 14A on the upper LCD 22 screen.

  Then, for example, by selecting the recording data file using the direction input button 14A and pressing any one of the operation buttons 14B to 14E, the recording data file being reproduced is switched to the selected recording data file and the reproducing operation is executed. It is possible.

  Therefore, the processing on the playback operation selection screen 601 of the lower LCD 12 and the processing on the recording data file selection list screen 601 # of the upper LCD 22 can be processed in parallel, which is convenient for the user.

  In addition, the user can press the “Wakigaki” icon 586 to select and save the recording data file that has been processed and edited by filtering processing or the like by selecting the timbre adjustment icon 588 to the recording data file, for example. .

  That is, in an information processing apparatus having two screens (or two display areas), contact detection means (a touch panel in the present embodiment) is provided on at least one screen (the lower LCD 12 in the present embodiment). Then, on the one screen, an icon group indicating each of a plurality of options (first icon group; in the embodiment, an icon 615 group indicating each recording data file) is displayed, and any one of them is detected by the contact detection unit. The icon can be selected. After any icon is selected from the plurality of icons by the contact detection means, the display of the first icon group is moved to the other screen (in this embodiment, the upper LCD 22), and the one screen is displayed. Displays another icon group (second icon group; 541 and 542 in the embodiment), and any one icon can be selected from the second icon group by the contact detection means. Even after the first icon group moves to the other screen, one icon can be selected from the first icon group by a key switch (a direction key, in the embodiment, the cross key 14A). Is possible. Thereby, selection from the first icon group and selection from the second icon group can be performed in parallel. For example, the first selection may be performed using the first icon group, and the selection related to the icon selected in the first selection may be performed using the second icon group (in this embodiment, The first selection selects data to be processed, and the second selection selects the processing content for the selected data). In this case, after the first selection is made for the first icon group, the selection for the first icon group is changed by operating the key switch even after the transition to the second selection scene. Therefore, after shifting to the second selection scene, the first selection can be performed again in parallel, and convenience is improved.

  Referring to FIG. 94 again, CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD231).

  In step SD231, when it is determined that touch position data is input from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the recording data file list 610. (Step SD232).

  In step SD232, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the recording data file list 610, the CPU 31 then selectively displays the recording data file according to the touch position (step SD233). ).

  Then, the CPU 31 changes and displays the function icon button according to the recording data file (step SD234). And it returns to step SD231 again. Specifically, the “play” icon 570 is displayed when the cursor selects and displays a recording data file, and “record” when the cursor selects and displays a file that has not been recorded. Icon 570 # is displayed.

  In step SD232, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the recording file list 610, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is displayed next on the volume setting icon 550. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD235).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD235 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the CPU 31 executes volume setting processing (step SD236). Since the volume setting process has been described above, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  On the other hand, in step SD235, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “play” icon. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of 570 (step SD237).

  In step SD237, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “play” icon 570, the CPU 31 executes a recorded data file reproduction process (step SD237 #). The recorded data file reproduction process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “play” icon 570, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “erased” next. It is determined whether or not the value is within the display range of the icon 571 (step SD238).

  In step SD238, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “erase” icon 571, the CPU 31 executes a recording data file erasure process (step SD239).

In step SD238, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “erase” icon 571, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “record” icon. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of 570 # (step SD240).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD240 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “record” icon 570 #, the CPU 31 executes a recording data file creation process (step SD241). The recording data file creation process will be described later.

  In step SD240, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “record” icon 570 #, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is “returned” next. It is determined whether the value is within the display range of the icon 620 (step SD242).

  In step SD242, if the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “return” icon 620, the process proceeds to step SD231 again.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 31 determines in step SD242 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “return” icon 620, the sound selection screen 400 shown in FIG. 61 is displayed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the subroutine process of the recorded data file reproduction process.
Referring to FIG. 97, in step SD237, if CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the “play” icon display range, playback of the next selected recording data file is performed. Processing is started (step SD250).

  Next, the CPU 31 displays a recording data file selection list screen 601 # on the upper LCD 22 and a reproduction operation selection screen 601 on the lower LCD 12 (step SD251).

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from the touch panel 13 (step SD252).

  In step SD252, when CPU 31 determines that touch position data is input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by touch position data is a value within the display range of reproduction time bar 551. (Step SD253).

  In step SD252, if the CPU 31 determines that there is no input of touch position data from the touch panel 13, it determines whether there is an operation by the direction input button 14A next (step SD264).

  In step SD264, if the CPU 31 determines that there is an operation by the direction input button 14A, the cursor indicating the selected recording data file on the recording data file selection list screen 601 # according to the operation of the direction input button 14A. A position scroll display process is executed (step SD265).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD264 that there is no operation by the direction input button 14A, it returns to step SD252 again.

  Then, CPU 31 determines whether or not a predetermined button is pressed next (step SD266).

  In step SD266, if the predetermined button is pressed, the CPU 31 starts reproduction of the recording data file selected by the cursor position (step SD250).

  On the other hand, if the predetermined button is not pressed in step SD266, the CPU 31 returns to step SD252 again. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined button is set to any one of the operation buttons 14B to 14E.

On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD252 that touch position data has been input from the touch panel 13, whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the reproduction time bar 551 or not. Judgment (step SD253)
In step SD253, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the playback time bar 251, the recording data file is played back from the time corresponding to the touch position. Execute (step SD254).

  In step SD254, the CPU 31 next executes a process for moving the slider position of the reproduction time bar 251 corresponding to the touch position (step SD255).

  In step SD253, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the reproduction time bar 251, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is displayed next on the volume setting icon 550. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD256).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD256 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the CPU 31 executes volume setting processing (step SD257). Since the volume setting process has been described above, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  In step SD256, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the volume setting icon 550, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the next display of the reproduction operation command icon. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD258).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD258 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the reproduction operation command icon, the CPU 31 executes a function corresponding to the reproduction operation command (step SD259).

Next, the display of the reproduction operation command is switched (step SD260).
And it returns to step SD252 again.

  In step SD258, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of the reproduction operation command icon, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is next within the selection function icon display range. It is determined whether or not the value is (step SD261).

  In step SD261, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the selection function icon display range, the CPU 31 executes a function corresponding to the selection function icon (step SD262).

  In step SD261, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the selection function icon display range, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is a value within the display range of the “return” icon 513. It is determined whether or not.

  In step SD263, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “return” icon 513, the recording data file list selection screen 600, which is the previous screen, is displayed. (Step SD230).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 31 determines in step SD263 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within the display range of the “return” icon 513, the CPU 31 returns to step SD252.

  98 and 100 are flowcharts for explaining the subroutine processing of the recording data file creation processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the storage memory 34 is provided with a plurality of slots used for recording processing in advance.

Referring to FIG. 98, first, CPU 31 has a recording start screen 602 displayed.
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining a recording start screen 602 according to the present embodiment (step SD270).

  Referring to FIG. 99, recording command icon 610 is provided on recording start screen 602. In addition, a “quit” icon 615 is provided. Recording is started by pressing the recording command icon 610. In addition, after the recording is started, the display of the recording command icon 610 is switched to the stop command icon 610 #. Recording is stopped when the stop command icon 610 # is pressed. Further, it is assumed that the “Stop” icon 615 is pressed to return to the recording data file list selection screen 600 which is the previous screen.

  Referring to FIG. 98 again, CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD270 #).

  Next, when it is determined that the touch position data is input from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the recording command icon display range (step). SD271).

  In step SD271, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of the recording command icon 610, it determines whether or not the microphone input volume is equal to or higher than the threshold value. (Step SD272).

  If the CPU 31 determines that the microphone input volume is equal to or higher than the threshold value, it next starts the recording process (step SD273).

  Next, the CPU 31 executes recording command display switching (step SD274). Specifically, a stop command icon 610 # is displayed.

  Next, the CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from the touch panel 13 (step SD275).

  When CPU 31 determines that touch position data is input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by touch position data is within the display range of stop command icon 610 # (step SD276). .

  In step SD276, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the display range of stop command icon 610 #, it ends the recording process (step SD277). Then, the process proceeds to “D”.

  Referring to FIG. 100, in step SD277, when the recording process is completed, next, CPU 31 stores the recording data file (step SD290). Specifically, the CPU 31 stores the recording data file in the storage data memory 34 via the memory control circuit 33.

  Next, the CPU 31 displays a recording data file color designation screen (step SD291).

  FIG. 101 is a view for explaining a recording data file color designation screen 603 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 101, a case where “recorded and played with this voice” is displayed on the recording data file color designation screen 603 according to the present embodiment is shown. A color designation range 620 is provided, and red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and amber color designation selection icons 621 to 626 are provided. The user can specify by touching any of the color specifying icons using the touch pen 27 or the like. The display color of the recording data file corresponding to the slot designated by the designated color is registered. Further, when the “Cancel” icon 630 is pressed, the recorded data file is deleted, and the recorded data file list selection screen 600 is displayed again.

  Referring to FIG. 100 again, CPU 31 determines whether or not touch position data is input from touch panel 13 (step SD292).

  In step SD292, when the CPU 31 determines that touch position data is input from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the color designation range (step SD293).

  In step SD293, when the CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is a value within the color designation range, the designated display color is registered (step SD294). Then, the CPU 31 displays a recording data file list selection screen 600. At this time, the selected recording data file is displayed in the designated display color.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD293 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the color designation range, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the display range of the “cancel” icon 630. It is determined whether the value is within the range (step SD295).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “cancel” icon 630, the CPU 31 returns to step SD292.

On the other hand, when the CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “cancel” icon 630, the CPU 31 deletes the recording data file corresponding to the designated slot ( Step SD296).

  Then, the CPU 31 displays a recording data file list selection screen 600. At this time, the selected file is displayed as a file in which recording data is not stored.

  Referring to FIG. 98 again, in step SD276, if CPU 31 determines that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not a value within the display range of stop command icon 610 #, it returns to step SD275.

  In step SD275, if there is no input of touch position data from the touch panel 13, the CPU 31 determines whether or not the recorded data has reached a capacity that can be stored in the slot (step SD278).

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the recorded data does not reach the capacity that can be stored in the slot, it returns to step SD275 again.

  In step SD278, if the CPU 31 determines that the recorded data does not reach the capacity that can be stored in the slot, it returns to step SD275 again.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the recorded data has reached the capacity that can be stored in the slot, the CPU 31 ends the recording process (step SD279). Then, the process proceeds to step SD290 in FIG. The subsequent processing is the same as described above.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 31 determines in step SD271 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the recording command icon 610, the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is the “stop” icon. Whether the value is within the display range of 615 is determined.

  If the CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of the “stop” icon 615, the CPU 31 selects the recording data file list selection screen 600 described with reference to FIG. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within the display range of the “stop” icon 615, the process proceeds to step SD270 #.

  With this processing, the user can freely create a recording data file recorded with the microphone of the main body and reproduce it using the created recording data file. Also, the created recording data file is displayed by selecting the recording data selection icon 544 described with reference to FIG. 65, and the function of outputting the recording data file recorded by voice according to the same method as a sound effect from the speaker is executed. Is also possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an example, a case has been described in which a storage memory 34 built in the game apparatus 10 is provided with a slot for storing a recording data file, and the recording data file is stored. For example, it is possible to store the data in a memory card such as an SD card in accordance with a user operation instruction.

[10. Storage medium for storing program]
The above description is based on the assumption that at least various application programs to be executed are stored in any one of the storage data memory 34, the memory card 28, and the memory card 29. Hereinafter, a more preferable form of the application program stored in each storage medium will be exemplified.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a storage medium that can be used by the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 103, storage data memory 34 built in game device 10 is provided with a program area and a data area separately. The program area typically includes a first shooting function program 901 (for example, the shooting function program 52 or the shooting application program 53 described above), a first recording function program 902 (for example, the sound application program 57 described above), Second shooting function program 903 (a program that has not been described so far, for example, the same program as the shooting application program 53 described above, and also in a memory in a dedicated standard card that is mounted in the shooting mode. The photographed image can be saved, and in the photograph display mode, the photographed image saved in the memory in the attached dedicated standard card can be displayed) and the second recording function program 904 (to date) This is a program that has not been explained. This is a program similar to the window application program 57, and can further store audio data in the memory in the attached dedicated standard card, and can also be saved in the memory in the attached dedicated standard card. And the first photo utilization program 905 (a program that has not been described so far, for example, an editing function in the above-described shooting application program 53 (an editing function in the above-described shooting mode). Only) and a photo browsing function (the above-described photo display mode), and a first sound utilization program 906 (a program not described so far, for example, recorded from the above-described sound application program 57) And the second photo utilization program 9). 7 (a program that has not been described so far, for example, a program having only a photo display mode in the above-described shooting application program 53, and further, a shooting stored in a memory in a dedicated standard card that is mounted) A second audio utilization program 907 (a program that has not been described so far, for example, a program in which the recording function is deleted from the sound application program 57 described above, and being installed) Audio data stored in the memory of the dedicated standard card can be reproduced and edited).

  Among these programs, the first shooting function program 901, the first recording function program 902, the first photo use program 905, and the first sound use program 906 are stored in the storage data memory 34 of the game apparatus 10. Assume that it is stored in advance (preinstalled).

  On the other hand, for the second shooting function program 903, the second recording function program 904, the second photo use program 907, and the second sound use program 907, the wireless communication module 38, the local communication module 39, or It is downloaded from a distribution server (not shown) via other communication means.

The data area 909 stores the imaging data acquired by the first or second imaging function programs 901 and 903 and / or the audio data acquired by the first or second recording function programs 902 and 904 in a nonvolatile manner. Can be memorized. It should be noted that the imaging data acquired by the first imaging function program and the imaging data acquired by the second imaging function program can be stored in the same area without distinction and can be used mutually. In addition, the audio data acquired by the first recording function program and the audio data acquired by the second recording function program can be stored in the same area without distinction and can be used mutually.

  In FIG. 103, for easy understanding, “built-in NAND” indicating a NAND flash memory that typically implements the storage data memory 34 is described. Needless to say, the storage memory 34 may be realized by a non-volatile memory other than the NAND flash memory.

  Furthermore, a memory card 28 (typically an SD card) composed of a general-purpose standard card based on the general-purpose standard can be attached to the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment via the memory card interface 36 (FIG. 18). . The memory card 28 can store various data in a nonvolatile manner. That is, the memory card 28 is provided with a data area 910.

  Furthermore, in the game apparatus 10 according to the present embodiment, any one of various memory cards 29-1 to 29-4 including a dedicated standard card based on the dedicated standard is selectively selected via the memory card interface 37 (FIG. 18). It can be attached to. Each of the memory cards 29-1 to 29-4 is provided with a program area and a data area.

  More specifically, the memory card 28-1 has a shooting function program 921 (a program having the same function as the shooting function program 2 described above, but the specific contents of the program are different), and photo usage. It is assumed that a program 922 (a program having the same function as that of the above-described second photo utilization program, but the specific content of the program is different) is stored. In addition, the memory card 29-1 is provided with a data area 923 in which imaging data and / or audio data can be stored in a nonvolatile manner.

  Similarly, the memory card 29-2 has a shooting function program 931 (a program having the same function as the shooting function program 2 described above, but the specific contents of the program are different. The above is limited to the non-volatile memory 933 in the own card) and the photo use program 932 (a program having the same function as the photo use program 2 described above, but the specific contents of the program are different. It is assumed that it can be stored only in captured images stored in the non-volatile memory 933 in the own card. Further, the memory card 28-2 is provided with a data area 933 in which imaging data and / or audio data can be stored in a nonvolatile manner.

  In addition, the memory card 29-3 includes a recording function program 941 (a program having the same function as the recording function program 2 described above, but the specific content of the program is different) and a voice utilization program 942 (described above). It is assumed that a program having the same function as that of the voice utilization program 2 is stored, but the specific contents of the program are different. Further, the memory card 28-3 is provided with a data area 943 capable of storing imaging data and / or audio data in a nonvolatile manner.

  Similarly, the memory card 28-4 has a recording function program 951 (a program having the same function as the recording function program 2 described above, but the specific contents of the program are different. The storage destination is limited to the non-volatile memory 953 in the own card) and the voice use program 952 (a program having the same function as the voice use program 2 described above, but the specific contents of the program are different. It is assumed that it can be used (limited to audio data stored in the non-volatile memory 933 in the own card). Further, the memory card 28-4 is provided with a data area 953 capable of storing imaging data and / or audio data in a nonvolatile manner.

  For example, even if the programs stored in the respective storage media are shooting function programs that provide the same shooting function, some or all of the provided functions are different.

  For example, between the first shooting function program 901 preinstalled in the main body of the game apparatus 10 and the second shooting function program 903 stored in the game apparatus 10 by downloading, image data obtained by the shooting is saved. The previous selectable range is different. That is, in the first imaging function program 901, the acquired imaging data can be selectively stored in either the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) or the memory card 28 (SD card). . On the other hand, in the second shooting function program 903, the acquired imaging data is attached to the game apparatus 10 in addition to the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card). It can be selectively stored in one of the memory cards 29 (dedicated standard card). That is, the second shooting function program 903 provides more sophisticated processing than the first shooting function program 901 in terms of the selectable range of the storage destination of the imaging data.

  The CPU 31 executes one of the shooting function programs, thereby realizing the processing as shown in FIG. Then, due to the difference in function between the same shooting function programs, the number of button images from which the storage destination shown in FIG. 31 can be selected is different.

  Similarly, in the first recording function program 902, the acquired audio data is selectively stored in either the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) or the memory card 28 (SD card). it can. On the other hand, in the second recording function program 904, the acquired audio data is attached to the game apparatus 10 in addition to the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card). It can be selectively stored in one of the memory cards 29 (dedicated standard card). That is, the second shooting / recording program 904 provides more sophisticated processing than the first recording function program 902 in terms of the selectable range of the storage destination of the imaging data. The CPU 31 executes the recording function program, thereby realizing the processing as shown in FIG.

  The CPU 31 executes one of the recording function programs, thereby realizing the processing as shown in FIG. Then, due to the difference in function between the same recording function programs, selectable storage destinations of the recording data file shown in step SD290 in FIG. 100 are different.

  In the first photo utilization program 905, the image data stored in either the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) or the memory card 28 (SD card) can be selectively used. It is. On the other hand, in the second photo use program 907, in addition to the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card), the memory card 29 (dedicated standard) attached to the game apparatus 10 is used. Image data stored in one of the cards) can be selectively used. In other words, the second photograph utilization program 907 provides more sophisticated processing than the first photograph utilization program 905 in terms of the selectable range of storage media from which the imaging data can be read and used.

The CPU 31 executes any one of the photo utilization programs, thereby realizing the processing as shown in FIG. That is, it is possible to view (display) already acquired imaging data and perform various edits on the imaging data. Then, due to the difference in function between the same photo utilization programs, the number of button images from which the reading destination shown in FIG. 31 can be selected differs.

  Similarly, in the first sound use program 906, sound data stored in either the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) or the memory card 28 (SD card) is selectively used. Is possible. On the other hand, in the second sound utilization program 908, in addition to the built-in storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card), the memory card 29 (dedicated standard) attached to the game apparatus 10 is used. Audio data stored in one of the cards) can be selectively used. In other words, the second voice use program 908 provides more sophisticated processing than the first voice use program 906 in terms of the selectable range of storage media from which voice data can be read and used.

  Note that the CPU 31 executes one of the voice utilization programs, thereby realizing the processing as shown in FIG. Then, due to the difference in function between the same voice utilization programs, the selectable range of the read destination of the voice data to be reproduced becomes different.

  The shooting function program 921 stored in the memory card 29-1 provides the same function as the second shooting function program 903 stored in the storage data memory 34. That is, in the shooting function program 921, the acquired image data is added to the own memory card 29 in addition to the storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card) built in the game apparatus 10 main body. -1 (data area 923) can be selectively stored. That is, the shooting function program 921 has a higher function in terms of the selectable range of the storage destination of the imaging data than the first shooting function program 901 stored in the storage data memory 34 built in the game apparatus 10 main body. Provide the right processing.

  On the other hand, in the shooting function program 931 stored in the memory card 29-2, functions that can be provided are more limited than the shooting function program 921. That is, in the shooting function program 931, the acquired imaging data can be stored only in the own memory card 29-2 (data area 933).

  The photo use program 922 stored in the memory card 29-1 provides the same function as the second photo use program 907 stored in the storage data memory 34. That is, in the photo use program 922, in addition to the storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card) built in the main body of the game apparatus 10, the own memory card 29-1 (data area 923) is stored. ) Can be selectively used. In other words, the photo use program 922 is a selectable range of storage media that can read out and use the captured image data as compared to the first photo use program 905 stored in the storage data memory 34 built in the main body of the game apparatus 10. Provides more sophisticated processing.

  In contrast, the photo use program 932 stored in the memory card 29-2 is more limited in the functions that can be provided compared to the photo use program 922. That is, in the photo use program 932, only the image data stored in the own memory card 29-2 (data area 933) can be used.

Similarly, the recording function program 941 stored in the memory card 29-3 provides the same function as the second recording function program 904 stored in the storage data memory 34. That is, in the recording function program 941, the acquired voice data is stored in the storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 2 built in the game apparatus 10 main body.
In addition to 8 (SD card), it can be selectively stored in any of its own memory card 29-3 (data area 943). That is, the recording function program 941 has a higher function in terms of the selectable range of the audio data storage destination, compared to the first recording function program 902 stored in the storage data memory 34 built in the game apparatus 10 main body. Provide the right processing.

  On the other hand, the recording function program 951 stored in the memory card 29-4 is more limited in the functions that can be provided compared to the recording function program 941. That is, in the recording function program 951, the acquired audio data can be stored only in the own memory card 29-4 (data area 953).

  The voice use program 942 stored in the memory card 29-3 provides the same function as the second voice use program 908 stored in the storage data memory 34. That is, in the voice use program 942, in addition to the storage data memory 34 (data area 909, built-in NAND) and the memory card 28 (SD card) built in the game apparatus 10 main body, the own memory card 29-3 (data area 943) ) Can be selectively used. That is, the voice use program 942 is a selectable range of storage media that can read and use the voice data as compared to the first voice use program 906 stored in the storage data memory 34 built in the game apparatus 10 main body. Provides more sophisticated processing.

  On the other hand, the voice use program 952 stored in the memory card 29-4 is more limited in the functions that can be provided compared to the voice use program 942. That is, in the voice use program 942, only the voice data stored in the own memory card 29-4 (data area 953) can be used.

  Note that in the game device 100 according to the present embodiment, it is permitted to read and execute applications stored in the memory cards 29-1 to 29-4, which are dedicated standard memory cards, but a general-purpose standard memory card. It is prohibited to read and execute the application stored in the memory card 28.

  As described above, the game apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can execute various applications stored in various storage media. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in how to sell and distribute application programs. For example, in the storage data memory 34 built in the game apparatus 10, an application program that can execute only basic functions is preinstalled, and an application program that can execute more advanced functions is downloaded or by a dedicated standard card. A sales form of the application program as provided is also possible.

[11. Effects and other configurations of the present embodiment]
Although the present invention is embodied as the above-described embodiment, the present invention essentially includes the following aspects. In the following description, in order to help understanding of the present invention, a correspondence relationship with the above-described embodiment is shown, but the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations do not limit the present invention at all.

<First aspect>
According to the first aspect of the present invention, the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), the first imaging unit (outer camera 25), and the first display Portable imaging device comprising: a unit (lower LCD 12), contact coordinate detection means (touch panel 13), first display control means (CPU 31 that executes step SB6), and change means (CPU 31 that executes step SB5) (10) is provided. The second housing is foldably connected to the first housing. The first imaging unit is provided on the outer surface when the second housing is folded. The first display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the first housing is folded. The contact coordinate detection means detects contact coordinates on the display screen of the first display unit. The first display control means displays the live image currently captured by the first imaging unit on the first display unit. The changing means changes the live image based on the input to the contact coordinate detecting means.

Note that “adding a change to a live image based on an input to the contact coordinate detecting means” in the above typically includes the following, but is not limited to the following example, and the touch input is performed on the live image. Thus, a predetermined image is synthesized with the live image (typically synthesized at a position based on touch input), or a predetermined image conversion process is performed on the live image (typically based on touch input) Image conversion processing on the position or area).
・ Draw a handwritten image by touch input on the live image.
・ Combine the stamp image at the touched position on the live image.
-Perform image processing that distorts the touched position or area on the live image.
-Perform processing to change the color of the touched position or area on the live image.

According to this aspect, the following first problem can be solved.
(First issue)
The mobile phone described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) is attached to the camera while an image being captured by the camera (live image; an image in which the captured image output from the camera is displayed as a moving image in real time). It is displayed on the display screen provided in the housing. This is because the shooting direction of the camera and the direction in which the live image is displayed are opposite to each other, so the live image is displayed in the direction as seen in the real world, and the user knows where the real world is being shot. This is because it is easy to recognize. However, the mobile phone described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) cannot perform editing operations on live images.

  Here, the editing operation for the live image is an operation for making some changes to the live image, such as superimposing a pre-prepared image called a stamp image or a sticker image or a user's handwritten image on the live image. JP-A 04-156791 (Patent Document 5), JP-A 06-276478 (Patent Document 6), JP-A 01-297986 (Patent Document 7), There are Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2002-125176 (patent document 8) and Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2004-320091 (patent document 9).

  For example, in the imaging apparatus described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5), it is possible to input a still image or a live image using a touch panel. However, in this imaging apparatus, since the screen for displaying the live image is on the back surface of the camera lens (see FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 04-156791), it is difficult to place the touch panel surface up. The user cannot stably perform editing operations (contact input operations on the touch panel).

  In the audio image recording / display apparatus described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent Document 6), a mouse is used as an input device for adding a handwritten image to a live image displayed on the display unit. Yes. For this reason, it is not possible to perform an intuitive editing operation that directly contacts a live image. Further, when the audio image recording / displaying device is placed, the shooting direction of the camera cannot be changed in the vertical direction.

  Further, according to the apparatus described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 01-297986 (Patent Document 7), an image created by a user using a digitizer can be superimposed on a captured image. However, in the above apparatus, the user simply creates an image using a digitizer in advance and superimposes the created image on the captured image, and cannot perform an editing operation on the live image. Whether the digitizer is configured separately from the camera (see FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 01-297986) or is integrated with the camera (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 01-297986 No. 5 and No. 5). FIG. 6). Therefore, when configured separately, it is suitable for placement and use, but to grip and use, both devices (camera and digitizer) must be gripped. It is difficult to operate. Further, in the case of being configured integrally, the display screen is placed on the mounting surface as in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5) and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent Document 6). Since it is arranged vertically, it is difficult to operate the digitizer.

  The devices described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-125176 (Patent Document 8) and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-320091 (Patent Document 9) are stationary devices. Not considered.

(Operational effects according to the first aspect)
According to the first aspect, with respect to the first problem, it is possible to provide a portable imaging device that can easily perform an editing operation on a live image.

  That is, according to the first aspect, the camera is provided in the upper housing (second housing) of the foldable portable imaging device, and the live image being captured by the camera is displayed on the lower housing (first housing). Displayed on the screen provided in the housing. The user can directly perform an editing operation on the live image using the touch panel provided on the screen. According to the above configuration, since the shooting direction of the camera can be changed independently of the surface (touch panel surface) on which the editing operation is performed on the live image, the user can hold and use the camera. Even if it is the aspect which mounts and uses, a touch panel can be arrange | positioned at the angle which a user operates easily. That is, it becomes easy to perform an editing operation on the live image. In other words, even if the touch panel is arranged at an angle that is easy for the user to operate, the shooting direction of the camera can be freely adjusted, so that the shooting itself can be performed easily.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the portable imaging device includes a second display unit (upper LCD 22), a storage unit (storage data memory 34), and a storage unit (CPU 31 executing step SB9). And second display control means (CPU 31 that executes step SB10). The second display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the second housing is folded. The saving means saves the live image changed by the changing means in the storage means as a saved image in accordance with a predetermined operation. The second display control means displays the stored image on the second display unit.

  According to this aspect, by displaying the captured image on the display screen facing in the direction opposite to the shooting direction of the camera, it is possible to present a saved image that has already been captured together with the live image to the user.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, in the third invention, the second display control means displays the stored image stored by the predetermined operation on the second display in response to the predetermined operation being performed. You may make it display on a part.

According to this aspect, when the user performs a shooting operation, an image obtained by the shooting operation is displayed on the second display unit immediately after the shooting operation. Therefore, the captured image is presented to the user so that the shooting direction can be easily understood by associating the shooting direction of the camera with the display direction of the captured image (although the shooting direction of the camera does not correspond to the display direction of the live image). be able to.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the first imaging unit corresponds to a non-screen area provided on both the left and right sides of the second display unit on the inner surface of the second housing. In the region of the outer side surface, it may be arranged on the side farther from the lower side of the second housing than the center in the vertical direction.

  According to this aspect, by disposing the first imaging unit on the upper side of the upper housing (second housing), in a mode in which the portable imaging device is gripped and used, the lower housing is gripped. It is possible to prevent the user's hand from being imaged. Moreover, in the aspect which mounts and uses a portable imaging device, since the distance from a mounting surface to a 1st imaging part becomes long, it can prevent that a mounting surface will be imaged. Further, by arranging the camera in the non-screen area of the upper housing, the space of the non-screen area can be effectively used and the apparatus can be downsized.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, a predetermined image for performing a photographing operation may be displayed on the first display unit. At this time, the portable imaging apparatus further includes a storage unit (storage data memory 34) and a storage unit (CPU 31 that executes Step SB9). The saving means saves the live image changed by the changing means in the storage means as a saved image in accordance with an operation of designating a predetermined image by the coordinate input means.

  According to this aspect, a shooting operation can be performed by an operation on the touch panel. That is, since both the editing operation and the shooting operation can be performed by the touch panel, an operation of performing the shooting operation after performing the editing operation is very easy for the user.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the portable imaging device includes an operation button (button 14I and / or 14J), a storage unit (storage data memory 34), and a storage unit (CPU 31 that executes step SB9). And may be further provided. The operation buttons are provided on at least one of the left and right ends of the upper side of the first housing. The saving means saves the live image changed by the changing means in the storage means as a saved image in response to an operation on the operation button.

  According to this aspect, the user can perform a shooting operation by pressing an operation button with a hand holding the portable imaging device. That is, since the photographing operation can be performed as it is while holding the portable imaging device, the photographing operation can be easily performed.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the operation button may be provided at the left end when viewed from the inner surface of the first housing on the upper side of the first housing.

  According to this aspect, the user can perform the photographing operation by holding the portable imaging device with the left hand and pressing the operation button with the left hand while performing the editing operation on the live image with the right hand. Therefore, in the state where the portable imaging apparatus is held, the user can easily perform the editing operation and the photographing operation because the photographing operation can be quickly performed with the left hand while performing the editing operation with the right hand.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the operation buttons may be provided at both left and right ends of the upper side of the first housing.

  According to this aspect, both the right-handed user and the left-handed user can easily perform the editing operation and the shooting operation.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the portable imaging device may further include a second imaging unit (inner camera 23) provided on the inner surface of the second housing. At this time, a 1st display control means displays the live image currently imaged by the 1st imaging part or the 2nd imaging part on a 1st display part.

  According to this aspect, by providing the imaging means also on the inner surface of the second housing, it is possible to perform imaging in the direction opposite to the imaging direction by the first imaging unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the first aspect, the portable imaging device includes an operation button (button 14I and / or 14J), a storage unit (storage data memory 34), and a storage unit (CPU 31 that executes step SB9). And may be further provided. The operation buttons are provided on at least one of the left and right ends of the upper side of the first housing. The saving means saves the live image changed by the changing means in the storage means as a saved image in response to an operation on the operation button. The first housing has a first shaft portion (11A) provided so as to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the inner surface thereof. The second housing has a second shaft portion (21A) that is rotatably connected to the first shaft portion. The second imaging unit is disposed on the second shaft portion.

  According to this aspect, by providing the second image pickup unit on the shaft (second shaft), it is possible to save the space of the apparatus. In addition, since the second shaft portion is located on the inner side surface of the first housing, when the two housings are folded, the second image pickup portion faces the first housing. . Therefore, when the portable imaging device is in the closed state, the second imaging unit is not exposed by being hidden by the inner surface of the first housing, and the second imaging unit can be protected.

  According to an alternative aspect of the first aspect, it may be provided as a program executed in a computer of a portable imaging device in order to realize the function in the above-described invention. This program is executed by a computer of a portable imaging device that includes the first housing, the second housing, the first imaging unit, the first display unit, and the contact coordinate detection means. A program is provided to cause the computer to execute the first display control step (SB6) and the change step (SB5). In the first display control step, the computer displays a live image currently captured by the first imaging unit on the first display unit. In the changing step, the computer changes the live image based on the input to the contact coordinate detecting means.

<Second aspect>
According to the second aspect of the present invention, the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), the first display unit (lower LCD 12), and the first imaging. Provided is an imaging device including a unit (outer camera 25), a plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14E), and a touch panel (13). The first housing has a horizontally long shape. The second housing has a horizontally long shape, and its long side is foldably connected to the upper long side of the first housing. The first display unit is provided with a display screen on an inner surface of the first housing, which is an inner surface when the first and second housings are folded. The first imaging unit is provided on an outer surface of the second housing, which is an outer surface when the first and second housings are folded, and is an end portion on the opposite side of the connection portion with the first housing. Placed in. The plurality of operation buttons are provided on both sides of the display screen on the inner surface of the first housing and in the longitudinal direction of the first housing. The touch panel is provided on the display screen.

According to this aspect, the following second problem can be solved.
(Second problem)
The imaging apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) has a configuration in which vertically long casings are vertically arranged and connected, so that the width is too narrow to hold with both hands, and the user must use both hands. The imaging device cannot be gripped firmly. In addition, since the display screen is provided on the entire surface of the housing, when the user grips the imaging device, the finger rests on the screen regardless of whether the imaging device is held vertically or horizontally. As a result, the visibility of the screen and the operability of the touch panel deteriorate. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to grip the screen so that no finger is placed on the screen, the image must be gripped only by the back and side surfaces of the housing, and the imaging device cannot be gripped firmly. In addition, since the information device disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4) is a notebook personal computer, it is assumed that the information device is used in a mounted state during imaging. Cannot be used.

  As described above, in the imaging devices disclosed in JP-A-2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) and JP-A-2001-142564 (Patent Document 4), the visibility of the screen and the operability of the touch panel are maintained. The user was unable to hold the camera firmly during imaging. Therefore, there is a problem that there is a high possibility that camera shake will occur during imaging. In addition, since it cannot be gripped firmly during imaging, it is difficult to perform operations during imaging.

(Operational effects according to the second aspect)
According to the second aspect, with respect to the second problem, it is possible to provide an imaging apparatus that can be firmly held by the user while maintaining the visibility of the display screen and the operability of the touch panel during imaging.

  That is, according to the second aspect, when the image pickup apparatus is held sideways, the user can firmly hold the both sides of the display screen of the first housing (portions provided with operation buttons). And the imaging device can be gripped. At this time, since the user's hand is applied to the operation button and does not cover the display screen, the display screen can be maintained without being hidden by the hand and the visibility of the display screen can be maintained. That is, it is possible to realize an imaging apparatus that can be firmly held by the user while maintaining the visibility of the display screen during imaging.

  Further, according to the second aspect, the display unit and the touch panel are provided in the first housing held by the user. Therefore, even when the image pickup apparatus is held and used, or when placed on a desk or the like, the operation on the touch panel can be performed (compared to the case where the touch panel is provided on the second housing). Easy to do.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the imaging device includes a second display unit (a display screen provided on the inner side surface of the second housing which is the inner side when the first and second housings are folded). An upper LCD 22) may further be provided. At this time, on both sides of the second display portion on the inner side surface of the second housing, a non-display screen region having the same width as a region (A1 and A2) provided with a plurality of operation buttons on the inner side surface of the first housing ( B1 and B2) are provided.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the width of the second housing may be the same as the width of the first housing. At this time, the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit have the same width and are provided at the same position in the longitudinal direction.

According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the imaging device may further include a speaker provided inside the non-display screen area of the second housing.

  According to each aspect described above, since the imaging device includes two display screens, more information can be displayed. Further, according to the configuration in which the non-display screen areas are provided on both sides of the display screen in the second housing (above (1-2)), when the imaging device is rotated 90 degrees from the horizontal holding state and held vertically However, the user can hold the imaging apparatus firmly. That is, when the image pickup apparatus is held vertically, the user supports the area where the operation button of the first housing is provided and the non-display screen area with the thumb, and the rear surface of the surface where the display screen is provided in each housing. Can be supported from the index finger to the little finger. Accordingly, the user can firmly hold the imaging apparatus, the thumb does not cover the display screen, and the visibility of the display screen is not impaired. Furthermore, according to the configuration of (4) above, by arranging the speaker inside the non-display screen area of the second housing, the internal space of the second housing can be used effectively, and the imaging device can be used. It can be downsized.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the second display unit may display an image captured by the first imaging unit in real time. At this time, the first display unit displays an operation screen for performing an operation on the imaging apparatus (see FIG. 42).

  According to this aspect, both the display screen on which the real-time captured image is displayed and the first imaging unit that captures the captured image are provided in the second housing. According to this, if the imaging direction of the first imaging unit is changed, the direction of the display screen changes with the change, so that the user can intuitively understand the imaging direction. Can do.

  Further, according to this aspect, since the operation screen is displayed on the display screen provided in the first housing held by the user, the operation screen is displayed on the display screen near the input means (touch panel and operation buttons). It will be. Therefore, the user can easily perform an operation while viewing the operation screen.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, when the real-time image captured by the first imaging unit is displayed on the second display unit, the first display unit is for input to the touch panel. An image may be displayed as an operation screen. According to this, operation with respect to an imaging device can be easily performed using a touch panel.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the first display unit may display an image for editing the captured image. According to this, the user can easily perform the editing process using the touch panel.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the imaging device is provided on the inner side surface of the second housing which is the inner side when the first and second housings are folded, and the second display unit. You may further provide the 2nd imaging part (inner camera 23) provided in the side near the connection part of the 1st and 2nd housing rather than a screen. According to this, the user can image two different directions without changing the imaging device. Also, in the case of shooting using the second imaging unit, the imaging direction can be easily changed by adjusting the angle of the second housing, as in the case of the first imaging unit. The imaging direction of the imaging unit can be changed without providing a special mechanism. Furthermore, since the second imaging unit is not exposed to the outside when each housing is folded, the second imaging unit can be protected by being folded.

According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the imaging device is arranged at the right end of the upper long side of the first housing, and an imaging instruction button (button 14J) for giving an instruction to save the captured image. May be further provided. According to this, the user can easily press the shooting instruction button with the index finger while holding the first housing.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the imaging device is arranged at both ends of the upper long side of the first housing, and two imaging instruction buttons (for instructing to save the captured image) ( Buttons 14J and 14I) may further be provided. According to this, even if the user is a right-handed user or a left-handed user, the shooting instruction button can be easily pressed with the index finger while holding the first housing.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the weight of the first housing and the components provided therein may be heavier than the weight of the second housing and the components provided therein.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, at least a battery, a circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, and a connector for detachably connecting a storage medium are provided inside the first housing. Also good.

  According to the above two aspects, the imaging device can be made difficult to fall down when the imaging device is placed on a desk or the like. Also, by making the first housing held by the user heavier than the second housing, a sense of stability when the image pickup apparatus is held is increased, and camera shake during shooting can be prevented.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the second aspect, the second housing may be capable of being opened and fixed at an angle smaller than 180 ° with respect to the first housing. According to this, by setting the opening / closing angle of the housing to be slightly smaller than 180 °, the outer surface of each housing fits the shape of the hand, so that it becomes easier to hold the imaging device.

<Third aspect>
According to the third aspect of the present invention, the first imaging unit (camera 23 or 25), the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), and the connecting portion ( There is provided a foldable imaging device including shaft portions 11A and 21A). A connection part connects a 1st housing and a 2nd housing so that folding is possible. The imaging device also includes one or more shooting buttons (buttons 14J and 14I) for instructing recording of an image captured by the first imaging unit. The one or more shooting buttons are side surfaces when the inner surface of the first housing when folded is a front surface, and the second housing exists when the first housing and the second housing are opened. It is provided on the side surface.

According to this aspect, the following third problem can be solved.
(Third issue)
In the mobile phone disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-333149 (Patent Document 10), when the user performs shooting, the user presses the first shutter button with the thumb while holding the lower second housing with one hand. An operation mode is assumed. That is, the user contacts the inner surface of the second housing with the thumb and the other finger with the outer surface of the second housing (the second housing is sandwiched between the thumb and the other fingers). ) While grasping the second housing, the first shutter button is pressed with its thumb. In such an operation mode, when the first shutter button is pressed, the thumb must be separated from the second housing, and thus the second housing cannot be firmly held. Therefore, it is difficult to press the first shutter button, and there is a possibility that camera shake occurs when the first shutter button is pressed. As described above, the conventional folding imaging device has a problem that it is difficult to perform a shooting operation by pressing the shutter button.

(Operational effects according to the third aspect)
According to the third aspect, the operability of the photographing operation can be improved with respect to the third problem.

  That is, according to the third aspect, by providing the photographing button on the side surface of the first housing that is connected to the second housing, the user makes the thumb contact the inner side surface of the first housing. With the middle finger or the like in contact with the outer surface of the first housing and holding the first housing, the photographing button can be pressed with the index finger (see FIGS. 9 and 10). According to this, since the photographing button can be pressed while firmly holding the first housing, it is easy to push the button at the time of photographing operation, and camera shake is unlikely to occur. Therefore, according to the configuration of (2-1) above, it is possible to improve the operability of the shooting operation with respect to the folding imaging device.

  Furthermore, according to the third aspect, since the photographing button is provided on the side surface of the first housing, the photographing operation can be performed even when the imaging device is placed with the outer surface of the first housing facing down. Is possible. Since the imaging unit is provided in the second housing, the user can freely change the imaging direction even when the imaging device is placed.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the first imaging unit may be provided on an outer surface when the second housing is folded.

  According to this aspect, since the first imaging unit is provided in the second housing, the imaging direction can be easily changed by changing the angle of the second housing with respect to the first housing. Further, since the first imaging unit is provided on the outer surface of the second housing, it is possible to capture the same direction as the user's line of sight.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the first imaging unit may be arranged on the outer surface of the second housing on a side farther from the coupling part than the center in the vertical direction. Here, it is assumed that the first housing and the second housing are connected vertically, and the connection direction between the first housing and the second housing is the vertical direction. In addition, the direction of the axis where the first housing and the second housing are connected is the left-right direction. For example, when the first housing has a horizontally long shape, the longitudinal direction of the first housing may be the left-right direction.

  As described above, since the user presses the shooting button provided on the side surface of the first housing with the index finger, the index finger enters the imaging range of the first imaging unit depending on the position of the first imaging unit. There is a risk that. On the other hand, according to the configuration of (2-3) above, the first imaging unit is arranged on the side far from the connection portion with the first housing, so that the index finger is placed in the imaging range of the first imaging unit. Can be prevented from entering.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the imaging device may be provided with first and second buttons as one or more photographing buttons at the left and right ends of the side surface, respectively.

  According to this aspect, since the photographing buttons are provided on both the left and right sides of the side surface of the first housing, the user can easily press the photographing button even when holding the imaging device with either the right hand or the left hand. Can do. Therefore, according to the configuration (2-4), the user can easily perform the shooting operation regardless of the dominant hand.

According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the imaging device may further include a second imaging unit (inner camera 23). When the imaging device is opened, the second imaging unit is substantially centered in the left-right direction on the device main surface (operation surface) formed by the inner surface of the first housing and the inner surface of the second housing. Provided.

  According to this aspect, since the second imaging unit is provided on the apparatus main surface, the user's direction can be imaged by the second imaging unit. In addition, since the second imaging unit is provided at substantially the center with respect to the left and right sides of the main surface of the apparatus, the user can easily align the left and right positions of the imaging apparatus, for example, when photographing himself.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the imaging device may further include a plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14F). The plurality of operation buttons are provided on the right side and the left side of the second imaging unit on the inner surface of the first housing.

  According to this aspect, by providing the operation button on the inner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the imaging device so that the thumb is brought into contact with the operation button. Since the operation button is provided outside the second imaging unit (with respect to the left-right direction), the user's thumb comes into contact with a position outside the second imaging unit. Therefore, according to the configuration of (2-6) above, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the thumb enters the imaging range of the second imaging unit (naturally without causing the user to be particularly conscious).

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the imaging apparatus may further include a display unit (lower LCD 12) and a plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14F). The display unit is provided with a display screen substantially in the center in the left-right direction on the inner surface of the first housing. The plurality of operation buttons are provided on the left and right sides of the display screen on the inner surface of the first housing.

  According to this aspect, by providing the operation button on the inner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the imaging device so that the thumb is brought into contact with the operation button. Here, since the operation buttons are provided on both the left and right sides of the display unit, the user's thumb comes into contact with a position outside the display unit. Therefore, according to the configuration of (2-7) above, it is possible to prevent the thumb from interfering with the display due to the thumb entering the display screen of the display unit (naturally without causing the user to be particularly conscious). Can do.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the imaging apparatus may further include a display unit (lower LCD 12), a coordinate input unit (touch panel 13), and a control unit (CPU 31). The display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface of the first housing. The coordinate input unit is an input device that can input coordinates on the display screen. The control unit displays a predetermined image on the display screen, and records an image picked up by the first image pickup unit when an input by the coordinate input means is performed within the region of the predetermined image.

  According to this aspect, the user can perform a shooting operation using the coordinate input unit provided on the inner surface of the first housing. According to this, even when performing a photographing operation in a state where the imaging device is placed with the outer surface of the first housing facing down, the user can easily perform the photographing operation. As described above, by enabling the shooting operation using the coordinate input unit, it is not necessary to operate the shooting button with the index finger, and various ways of holding (for example, holding the second housing down). It becomes easy to perform a photographing operation.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the control unit may display the predetermined image so as to be substantially in the center with respect to the left-right direction of the first housing.

According to this aspect, since the predetermined image to be touched when the user performs the shooting operation is displayed in the approximate center of the first housing, the user can operate the touch panel with either the left or right hand. Even when it is performed, the operation can be easily performed. Therefore, according to this aspect, the user can easily perform the shooting operation regardless of the dominant hand even when the shooting operation is performed with the imaging device placed with the outer surface of the first housing facing down.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the third aspect, the first housing may have a length in the left-right direction of 100 mm or more and 150 mm or less and a length of the vertical direction of 60 mm or more and 90 mm or less.

  According to this aspect, when the length of the first housing in the left-right direction is set to 100 mm to 150 mm and the length in the vertical direction is set to appropriate lengths of 60 mm to 90 mm, the image pickup apparatus is held with one hand. Even if it is held by both hands, the shape can be easily held. In other words, according to this aspect, the imaging device may be difficult to hold with one hand by making it too long in the left-right direction, or the imaging device may be difficult to hold with both hands by making the shape too short in the left-right direction. Absent. Further, since the length in the vertical direction is such that the first housing fits in the palm, the user can hold the imaging device regardless of whether the user holds it with one hand or both hands. Cheap.

<Fourth aspect>
According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), the first display unit (lower LCD 12), and the second display An imaging device is provided that includes a unit (upper LCD 22), an imaging unit (inner camera 23), and an audio input unit (microphone 42). The lower side of the second housing is foldably connected to the upper side of the first housing. The first display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the first housing is folded. The second display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the second housing is folded. The imaging unit is provided between the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit on the inner side surface of the second housing. The voice input unit is provided between the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit on the inner surface of the second housing.

According to this aspect, the following fourth problem can be solved.
(Fourth issue)
Like the portable devices described in JP 2004-274304 A (Patent Document 2), JP 2005-184060 A (Patent Document 11), and JP 2007-201727 A (Patent Document 12), In the configuration in which one screen is provided on each of the inner surface and the outer surface of the housing, the number of information that can be presented to the user at a time is reduced because the user can see only one screen at a time. For this reason, the user may not be able to obtain (view) sufficient information at the time of imaging / audio input.

  On the other hand, in the above-mentioned telephones of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13), the user can view two screens simultaneously. The amount of information that can be presented at one time increases. However, these telephones have a problem that it is difficult to perform imaging and voice input for the following reasons because the positions of the camera and microphone are not appropriate.

In the telephones disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13), the camera and the microphone are provided in different housings. It is arranged in the part. Specifically, a camera is disposed at the end of one housing, and a microphone is disposed at the end of the other housing. For this reason, when the folding angle is not 180 degrees, the imaging direction of the camera and the sound collection direction of the microphone are directed in different directions. Also, at this time, the sound collection direction of the microphone and “
The direction of the “screen of the housing in which the camera is provided” also faces in different directions. For the folding device, it is meaningful to set the folding angle to a desired angle by, for example, placing it on a desk. However, at this time, the screen of the upper housing faces the user. However, in these situations, the sound collection direction of the microphone is different from the direction of the user's mouth in these situations.

  Furthermore, in the telephones disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13), a camera is provided at the end of each housing, and two screens are displayed. Since both are located below the camera, it is necessary to move the line of sight downward to see the information displayed on each screen from the state where the line of sight is directed at the camera, especially the information on the lower screen. The amount of line-of-sight movement is large when viewing In order to see the display information on the two screens evenly, the user may move the line of sight with reference to the vicinity of the center of the two screens. In the telephone set of Document 1) or Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13), the direction of the line of sight differs from the shooting direction of the camera.

(Operational effects according to the fourth aspect)
According to the fourth aspect, it is possible to provide an imaging device that allows the user to easily perform imaging and voice input with respect to the fourth problem.

  That is, according to the fourth aspect, since the imaging unit and the voice input unit are provided between the two screens, if the user faces the two screens when performing imaging and voice input, the camera and the microphone are Both are located in front of the user. Therefore, the user can successfully perform imaging and voice input while keeping the orientation facing the two screens (without changing the orientation of the face). For example, when the user himself / herself is imaged by the camera, the user looks at the camera while performing the imaging operation while looking at the screen. According to the configuration of (3-1), the camera Thus, the user can minimize the distance that the line of sight moves between the screen and the camera during the imaging operation, and the imaging operation while viewing the two screens is facilitated. According to the configuration of (3-1), since the camera and the microphone are arranged at substantially the same position in the same second housing, when the user points the camera at the time of imaging, the face naturally faces the microphone. Therefore, the voice input unit can easily pick up the user's voice, and the voice can be detected with high accuracy.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the imaging apparatus may further include operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14F) provided on the first housing.

  According to this aspect, since the operation button and the microphone are provided in different housings, the operation sound (noise) when the operation button is operated is hardly picked up by the microphone, and the desired sound is accurately detected by the microphone. Can do. According to the configuration of (3-2), since the operation button is provided on the first housing, it is considered that the user holds the first housing when performing imaging. Therefore, the user can easily change the imaging direction to the desired direction by directing the second housing in the desired direction without changing the posture of gripping the imaging device (without moving the first housing). Can do.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the second housing may have a shaft portion (21A) rotatably connected to the upper side of the first housing. At this time, the imaging unit and the voice input unit are arranged on the shaft portion.

According to this aspect, the imaging unit and the voice input unit are arranged between the screen of the second display unit and the shaft unit by arranging the imaging unit and the voice input unit on the shaft unit for realizing the folding structure. Compared to the case, the distance between the two screens can be shortened. As a result, the two screens can be arranged closer to each other, making it easier for the user to see the two screens.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the fourth housing may be provided at substantially the center of the second housing in the left-right and right-left directions.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, since the imaging unit and the voice input unit are arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction, it is easier for the user to perform imaging and voice input.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the fourth aspect may be disposed substantially at the center in the left-right and right-left directions. At this time, the voice input unit is arranged at a position shifted in the left-right direction from the position of the imaging unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the imaging unit is arranged in the center in the left-right direction, and for example, when the user images itself, the image is captured so that the user is positioned in the center of the imaging region. It becomes easy. Even if the voice input unit is arranged at a position slightly deviated from the center, the detection accuracy is not greatly affected. Furthermore, according to this aspect, since the imaging unit and the audio input unit can be arranged side by side in the left-right direction, the distance between the two screens compared to the case where the imaging unit and the audio input unit are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. Can be shortened. As described above, according to this aspect, it is possible to arrange the imaging unit and the voice input unit so that the two screens are easier to see while maintaining ease of imaging and voice input.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the inner surface of the second housing may further include audio output units (speakers) provided on both sides of the display screen of the second display unit in the left-right direction. .

  According to this aspect, if the user holds the imaging device in a direction facing the two screens, the audio output unit is arranged at a position corresponding to the left and right ears (positions on both the left and right sides of the face). The stereo effect can be effectively obtained.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), the first display unit (lower LCD 12), the second housing A display unit (upper LCD 22), an imaging unit (inner camera 23), and an audio output unit (speaker) are provided. The lower side of the second housing is foldably connected to the upper side of the first housing. The first display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the first housing is folded. The second display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the second housing is folded. The imaging unit is provided between the screen of the first display unit and the screen of the second display unit on the inner surface of the second housing. The audio output units are provided on both sides of the display screen of the second display unit in the left-right direction on the inner surface of the second housing.

  According to this aspect, as in the previous aspect, the stereo effect can be effectively obtained when the user holds the imaging device in a direction facing the two screens. Similarly to the first invention, when the user is facing the two screens, the camera is positioned in front of the user, so the user remains facing the two screens. In this way (without changing the orientation of the face), the imaging can be performed well.

According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the first housing (lower housing 11), the second housing (upper housing 21), the first display unit (lower LCD 12), the second housing A display unit (upper LCD 22) and an imaging unit (inner camera 23) are provided. The lower side of the second housing is foldably connected to the upper side of the first housing. The first display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the first housing is folded. The second display unit is provided with a display screen on the inner surface when the second housing is folded. The imaging unit is provided between the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit when the first housing and the second housing are opened, and is provided at the center in the left-right direction. .
According to this aspect, by providing a camera in the center between the two screens, the information displayed on the upper screen as well as the information displayed on the lower screen from the state where the line of sight is directed toward the camera, This information can be obtained with minimal movement of the line of sight. In addition, even when viewing information on the upper screen or the lower screen, there is little difference between the shooting direction of the camera and the line of sight, and a user facing the camera can be shot.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, between the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit when the first housing and the second housing are opened. Further, an audio input unit (microphone 42) provided at the center in the left-right direction may be further provided.

  According to this aspect, since the camera and the microphone are arranged at substantially the same position in the same second housing, if the user points toward the camera at the time of imaging, the face naturally faces toward the microphone. The user can easily pick up the voice of the user and can accurately detect the voice.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, between the display screen of the first display unit and the display screen of the second display unit when the first housing and the second housing are opened, You may provide in the center of the left-right direction. At this time, the voice input unit is provided close to the imaging unit.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to arrange the imaging unit and the voice input unit so that the two screens are easier to see while maintaining ease of imaging and voice input.

  According to an aspect similar to the fourth aspect of the present invention, an imaging apparatus includes a first form in which a first housing and a second housing are arranged to overlap each other, and a first housing and a second housing. It is configured to be deformable so as to be able to take the second form to be opened and arranged. The imaging device is a side surface when the inner surface in the first form of the first housing is a front surface, and is provided on the side surface on the side where the second housing exists in the second form, and is imaged by the imaging unit. And one or more shooting buttons for instructing recording of the recorded image.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the second imaging unit may be provided at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the apparatus main surface in the second mode. At this time, the imaging device further includes a plurality of operation buttons provided on the right side and the left side of the second imaging unit on the inner surface of the first housing in the first mode.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fourth aspect, the display screen may be provided at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the inner surface of the first housing in the first form. At this time, the imaging apparatus further includes operation buttons provided on the left and right sides of the display screen on the inner surface of the first housing.

<5th aspect>
According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the image pickup means (cameras 23 and 25) are provided, a plurality of application programs (53 to 56) can be stored, and the image pickup by the image pickup means is taken as the application program. A startup program (61) is provided that is executed by the computer (CPU 31) of the information processing apparatus (10) in which a predetermined photographing application program (53) to be executed is stored in advance. This starting program is a program for selectively starting an application program desired by the user from among the plurality of application programs. The activation program includes first activation operation accepting means (CPU 31 that executes steps SA6 and SA11; hereinafter, only the step number is shown), first activation means (SA12), imaging processing means (SA10), and imaging. The computer is caused to function as possible operation acceptance means (SA6, SA9), photographing operation acceptance means (SA24, SA25), second activation operation acceptance means (SA24, SA28), and second activation means (SA30). The first activation operation accepting unit accepts a first activation operation that selectively activates a plurality of application programs. When the first activation operation is performed, the first activation unit activates the application program selected by the first activation operation among the plurality of application programs. The photographing processing unit executes a photographing process for storing a captured image by the imaging unit in a storage unit of the information processing device in accordance with a predetermined photographing operation. The image-capable operation accepting unit accepts an image-capable operation for setting the image-capable state in which the image-capturing process can be performed by the image-capturing processing unit according to the image-capturing operation in the activation-accepting state where the first activation operation is accepted. The photographing operation accepting unit accepts a photographing operation when an operation capable of photographing is performed. The second activation operation accepting unit accepts a second activation operation for activating the imaging application program in the imaging enabled state. The second activation unit activates the photographing application program when the second activation operation is performed.

According to this aspect, the following fifth problem can be solved.
(Fifth issue)
The first and second application programs that can be executed in the information processing apparatus described in the above "" Slightly shot instruction manual ", Sony Computer Entertainment Inc., November 2, 2006" (Non-Patent Document 1) are as follows: Therefore, in a situation where the user is shooting by executing one of the application programs, only the other application program has a function. In this case, in order to use a desired function, the user first ends the execution of the one application program, and then selects the menu. Select the other application program on the screen etc. Furthermore, a troublesome operation of starting the other application program has to be performed.

(Effects of the fifth aspect)
According to the fifth aspect, with respect to the fifth problem, it is possible to provide an information processing apparatus that can execute a plurality of types of photographing functions with a simple operation and is easy for the user to use.

  According to the fifth aspect, in the activation acceptance state, the user can activate the selected application program by the first activation operation, and can execute the imaging process by the imaging processing unit by the imaging enable operation. Therefore, the user can easily and quickly activate the function of the imaging processing means even in the activation acceptance state for activating the application program. Further, in the photographing enabled state, the photographing application program can be activated by the second activation operation. Therefore, the user can easily and quickly start the shooting application program by the second startup operation even during the shooting process by the shooting processing means. That is, according to the present embodiment, even when the user wants to use a function (of the shooting application program) that the shooting processing unit does not have while using the shooting function of the shooting processing unit, the user can 2. The function can be used easily and quickly by the activation operation. As described above, according to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing apparatus that can execute both the imaging function of the imaging processing unit and the function of the imaging application program with a simple operation and is easy for the user to use. be able to.

  Further, according to the fifth aspect, the photographing application program can be directly started during execution of the photographing function by the photographing processing means. That is, since the other shooting function (shooting function by the shooting application program) can be easily activated from one shooting function (shooting function by the shooting processing means), the other function can be obtained through the use of the one function. The user can be guided to use.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the photographing enabled operation may be different in operation method from the first activation operation.

  According to this aspect, the photographing function by the photographing processing means can be easily executed by an operation different from the first activation operation for activating the selected application program.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the photographing processing means may have a function of only a part of the photographing function that is made possible by executing the photographing application program.

  According to this aspect, the photographing function of the photographing processing means, which is a relatively simple function, can be quickly activated from the start acceptance state, and a photographing application program having more functions can be photographed by the photographing processing means. It can be activated immediately while the function is running. In this case, the information processing apparatus is operated to the user in the order that the information processing apparatus is first operated by the shooting function of the shooting processing means having a simple function and then the various shooting functions are used by a more versatile shooting application program. Can be used. By using the information processing apparatus in such an order, it is possible to use the information processing apparatus so that the user gradually gets used to the operation of the information processing apparatus.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the activation program causes the display means of the information processing apparatus to display the captured image (saved image) saved in the storage means in the activation acceptance state (FIG. 23). The computer may further function as image display means (SA5).

  According to this aspect, images captured in the past are displayed in the activation acceptance state. Therefore, the user can customize the screen (menu screen) in the activation reception state for each user (for each information processing device) by taking a desired image to be displayed. Further, it is possible to make the user who first touched the information processing apparatus (the first use of the information processing apparatus) aware that the information processing apparatus has a photographing function.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the image display means may automatically change the captured image to be displayed on the display means from the captured images stored in the storage means at a predetermined timing. Good.

  According to this aspect, by changing the content of the displayed image at a predetermined timing, it is possible to change the menu screen and prevent the user from getting bored.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the image display means may change a captured image to be displayed on the display means at a timing when the information processing apparatus is activated.

  According to this aspect, the image displayed in the activation acceptance state is changed every time the information processing apparatus is activated. According to this, the user can enjoy at the time of activation ("what image is displayed"). Further, for the provider of the information processing apparatus, it is possible to encourage the user to start the information processing apparatus (that is, to use the information processing apparatus) by giving such enjoyment to the user.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the image display means may cause the display means of the information processing apparatus to display the captured image last saved in the immediately preceding photographing ready state in the activation acceptance state.

  According to this aspect, the image shot in the shooting enabled state is displayed in the activation reception state immediately after the shooting enabled state ends. Therefore, the user can confirm the image captured last in the image capturing enabled state in the activation acceptance state.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the activation program causes the computer to further function as first transition means (SA21) and second transition means (SA4). The first transition means terminates the activation acceptance state and makes a transition to the photographable state in response to the photographable operation being performed. The second transition means ends the photographing enabled state and makes a transition to the activation accepting state in response to a predetermined operation being performed in the photographing ready state.

  According to this aspect, since the photographing operation is not accepted in the activation acceptance state, the user does not erroneously perform the photographing operation in the activation acceptance state. Further, since the start acceptance state is terminated in the photographing enabled state, a display for causing the user to perform the first start operation (for example, displaying an image representing an application program) is unnecessary. The display area can be used effectively, such as displaying a captured image on the screen. In addition, by preventing the first activation operation from being accepted in the shootable state, the operation in the shootable state can be simplified, and the operation is easy for the user.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, in the second transition means, the predetermined operation may be a photographing operation.

  According to this aspect, when a shooting operation is performed in the shooting enabled state (the shooting process is performed), the shooting enabled state ends. In other words, if the user performs a shooting operation once in the shooting enabled state, the state of the information processing apparatus returns to the start acceptance state, so even a novice user who has not read the manual or the like can perform the shooting operation. It is possible to return to the start acceptance state naturally. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which “the user does not know how to return from the photographing enabled state to the activation acceptance state”, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-use information processing apparatus.

  Note that, according to this aspect, since the photographing operation causes a transition from the photographable state to the activation accepting state, an image of the photographing result cannot be displayed in the photographable state. Here, when the invention according to the previous aspect and the invention according to this aspect are combined, the image of the photographing result that could not be displayed in the photographing enabled state can be shown to the user immediately after the start acceptance state. It is valid.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the photographing enabled operation may be performed by the same operation as the photographing operation.

According to this aspect, since the shootable operation and the shoot operation are the same, a series of operations for performing shooting after transitioning to the shootable state can be performed with one type of operation, and the series of operations is easy. Can be done. Further, when the invention according to the previous aspect and the invention according to this aspect are combined, the transition from the activation accepting state to the photographing ready state and the transition from the photographing acceptable state to the activation accepting state are performed by the same operation. be able to. Therefore, even if the user mistakenly performs a shooting operation or performs a shooting operation without fully understanding the operation method, the user can perform the same operation even if the user has transitioned to the shooting enabled state. Can be returned to the original state (starting acceptance state). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which “how to return from the imaging enabled state to the activation accepting state is not known” and to provide an easy-to-use information processing apparatus.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the photographing enable operation and the photographing operation may be operations of pressing a predetermined button once.

  According to this aspect, the user can perform the photographing operation and the photographing operation with a simple operation. Therefore, the photographing function by the photographing processing means can be activated with a simple operation, and the captured image can be saved with a simple operation.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the information processing apparatus may include coordinate input means (touch panel 13) capable of inputting a coordinate position on the screen of the display device (lower LCD 12). . At this time, the first activation operation accepting unit displays at least a plurality of images (icon images 71a to 71c) among the images corresponding to the plurality of application programs, and displays the displayed images on the screen. The input is changed according to the scrolling operation, and an input performed using the coordinate input unit with respect to the position of the image being displayed is received as the first activation operation. The first activation means activates an application program corresponding to the icon image associated with the input received by the first activation operation acceptance means. The second activation operation accepting unit displays an image (72) representing the photographing application program at a predetermined position on the screen, and an input performed on the predetermined position using the coordinate input unit is used as the second activation operation. Accept. The second activation means activates the photographing application program in response to the input accepted by the second activation operation acceptance means.

  According to this aspect, in the activation acceptance state, the application program can be activated by an operation of selecting the position of one image from a plurality of images representing each application program using the coordinate input unit, In the photographing enabled state, the photographing application program can be started by an operation of designating a predetermined position displayed at a predetermined position and displaying an image representing the photographing application using the coordinate input means. Further, in the activation acceptance state, the type of image (type of application program) displayed by the scroll operation is changed so that images representing a plurality of application programs can be easily selected. Therefore, the user may have to perform an operation of scrolling the screen and an operation of designating an image in order to activate a desired application program in the activation acceptance state. On the other hand, since the image representing the photographing application program is always displayed at a predetermined position in the photographing enabled state, the user can easily start the photographing application program only by an operation that always designates the image. .

  According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, when the second activation operation is performed, the second activation means uses at least a part of information set in the photographing process by the photographing processing means to the photographing application program. The photographing application program may be executed by a computer using it as an argument to be passed.

  According to this aspect, the setting in the photographing process by the photographing processing unit is reflected in the process by the photographing application program. As a result, even when the process shifts from the shooting process by the shooting processing unit to the process by the shooting application program, the user can perform the same operation and there is no need to change the setting. Thus, according to the thirteenth aspect, an information processing apparatus that is easier for the user to use can be provided.

According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the program includes an initial activation determination unit (SA
The computer may further function as 1) and the photographing guide means (SA2). The first-time activation determination unit determines whether or not the information processing apparatus is activated for the first time after the information processing apparatus is activated and before the first activation operation is accepted. When it is determined that the information processing apparatus is activated for the first time, the photographing guiding unit sets the state of the information processing apparatus to the photographing ready state, or a display for allowing the user to select whether to set the photographing ready state. I do.

  According to this aspect, when the information processing apparatus is activated for the first time, first, the user can be made to actually experience the shooting operation, and a novice user can be accustomed to the shooting operation. Further, when the invention according to the previous aspect and the invention according to this aspect are combined, when the information processing apparatus is started for the first time, what is executed is a shooting process of a shooting process means having a relatively simple function. It becomes. Therefore, when the information processing apparatus is activated for the first time, the user performs a shooting operation with only a simple function, and thus the shooting operation can be performed relatively easily even for the first operation.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the imaging application program has a function of executing processing for saving a captured image in a storage unit, and imaging stored by imaging processing by the imaging processing unit or processing by the imaging application program And a function of browsing images.

  According to this aspect, the user can view an image shot by either the shooting function of the shooting processing unit or the shooting application program using the shooting application program.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the photographing processing unit and the photographing application program perform the same operation by the user with respect to a function common to the function of the photographing processing unit and the function enabled by execution of the photographing application program. It may be possible to execute the function accordingly.

  According to this aspect, since the user can perform the same operation regarding the same function even if the program executed for photographing changes, an operation system that is easy to use for the user can be provided.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the activation program may include an activation function program (51) that activates the application program and an imaging function program (52) that causes the computer to function as imaging processing means. Good. At this time, the data size of the shooting function program is smaller than the data size of the shooting application program.

  According to this aspect, by setting the program that can be activated in the activation acceptance state to the imaging function program that is the program having the smaller data size, it is possible to quickly activate the imaging program in the activation acceptance state. .

  According to a more preferable aspect of the fifth aspect, the activation program may include an activation function program (51) that activates the application program and an imaging function program (52) that causes the computer to function as imaging processing means. Good. At this time, the activation program is a photographing function program together with the activation function program at a timing when the activation control program is executed in a predetermined storage means for storing a program executed by the computer after the information processing apparatus is activated. The computer may be further functioned as reading means (SA4) for reading.

  According to this aspect, by reading the start function program and the shooting function program together, the shooting function program can be quickly started in the start acceptance state.

  According to an alternative aspect of the fifth aspect of the present invention, it may be provided as an information processing apparatus including each means in each of the above aspects.

<Sixth aspect>
According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the image communication device (1) including a plurality of image storage means (28, 32, 34) for storing a predetermined image is included, and the predetermined image is provided between the image communication devices. An image communication system for transmitting and receiving the image is provided. Among the plurality of image communication apparatuses, the image communication apparatus (10t) on the image transmission side further includes transmission source information transmission control means (CPU 31 executing step SC63; hereinafter, only the step number is described). . The transmission source information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission source information (transmission source data) indicating the transmission source to other unspecified image communication apparatuses. Among the plurality of image communication apparatuses, the image communication apparatus (10r) on the image receiving side includes transmission source information receiving means (SC84), selection means (SC85), and transmission destination information transmission control means (SC86, SC92). And further. The transmission source information receiving means receives the transmission source information. Based on the received transmission source information, the selection unit displays the transmission source on the display unit (12) (Nt1 to Nt3), and determines whether or not to receive an image from the image communication apparatus that transmitted the transmission source information. Let the user select The transmission destination information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission destination information (reception destination data) indicating the transmission destination to the image communication apparatus selected to be received by the selection means. The image communication apparatus on the transmission side further includes transmission destination information reception control means (SC64), transmission destination determination means (SC64, SC65), and image transmission means (SC69). The transmission destination information reception control means receives the transmission destination information. The transmission destination determination unit determines an image communication apparatus as a transmission destination based on the received transmission destination information. The image transmission unit transmits at least one of the images stored in the image storage unit to the transmission destination determined by the transmission destination determination unit. The image communication apparatus on the receiving side further includes image receiving means (SC90) and image storage control means (SC90). The image receiving unit receives the image transmitted by the image transmitting unit. The image storage control means stores the image received by the image receiving means in the image storage means. The unspecified other image communication apparatus from which the transmission source information transmission control means transmits the transmission source information is a transmission for transmitting the transmission source information without specifying the destination or a request from the unspecified image communication apparatus. In response to the transmission of the transmission source information to the image communication apparatus.

According to this aspect, the following sixth problem can be solved.
(Sixth issue)
Since the electronic camera disclosed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-341388 (Patent Document 14) communicates with infrared rays, it is necessary to dispose the electronic camera on the transmission side and the electronic camera on the reception side so as to face each other. In addition, when there are a plurality of transmission-side electronic cameras in a range where the reception-side electronic camera can communicate, the reception-side electronic camera cannot select the transmission-side electronic camera.

(Operational effects according to the sixth aspect)
According to the sixth aspect, in response to the sixth problem, an image communication system, an image communication apparatus, and an image communication apparatus capable of receiving an image from a transmission side apparatus desired by a user when transmitting and receiving an image between the apparatuses, and An image communication program is provided.

  According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the image communication device on the image receiving side can select whether or not to receive the image by looking at the transmission source, thereby preventing an image from being transmitted from an unintended partner. can do. In addition, the image communication apparatus on the image transmission side can recruit and distribute an image distribution partner without specifying an image reception partner in advance.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the transmission source information receiving means is capable of receiving a plurality of transmission source information transmitted to an unspecified number of image communication apparatuses. Based on each of the received transmission source information, the selection unit displays each of the transmission source information on the display unit, and causes the user to select any of the transmission source information.

  According to this aspect, the image communication apparatus on the image receiving side can select a transmission source that receives image data from a plurality of transmission sources. For example, when there are a plurality of image communication devices on the transmission side, the image communication device on the image reception side selects the image communication device desired by the user from the plurality of image communication devices and receives the image. Can do.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus on the transmission side further includes transmission source display control means (SC65, FIG. 51). The transmission source display control means requests the image transmission to the display means (12) of the image communication apparatus on the transmission side based on the transmission destination information received from the image communication apparatus on the image reception side. Is displayed (Nr1 to Nr3).

  According to this aspect, the user of the image communication apparatus on the image transmission side can know the partner image communication apparatus that is the transmission destination of the image transmission.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the transmission source information includes transmission source user information (Dc) that can be set by a user of the image communication apparatus on the transmission side. The selection unit displays the notification indicating the image communication device that is transmitting the transmission source information on the display unit of the image communication device that receives the transmission source user information included in the transmission source information.

  According to this aspect, the individuality of the user of the image communication apparatus that transmits the image can be obtained, and the image communication apparatus that transmits the image can be easily identified even on the image communication apparatus that receives the image.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the transmission destination information includes transmission destination user information (Dc) that can be set by a user of the image communication apparatus on the receiving side, and the transmission source display control means performs image transmission. As a notification indicating the requested image communication apparatus, the transmission source user information included in the transmission destination information is displayed on the display unit of the image communication apparatus on the transmission side.

  According to this aspect, the individuality of the user of the image communication apparatus that receives the image can be obtained, and the image communication apparatus that receives the image can be easily identified on the image communication apparatus that transmits the image.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus on the transmission side receives the transmission destination information, and then transmits an image to be transmitted to the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the transmission destination information according to a user operation. The image selection means (SC66) to select is further provided. The image transmission unit transmits the image selected by the image selection unit to the image communication apparatus that transmitted the destination information.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to select and transmit an image desired by the user of the image communication apparatus on the image transmission side. In addition, after determining an image communication apparatus that receives an image and an image communication apparatus that transmits an image, the image communication apparatus that transmits the image selects an image to be transmitted to the image communication apparatus. Thus, the image communication apparatus on the image transmission side can change the type and number of images sent to the image communication apparatus on the reception side.

According to a further preferred aspect, the image selection means includes a transmission target image display control means (FIG. 52). The transmission target image display control means displays the image group stored as a transmission target to the image communication apparatus on the receiving side on the image storage means on the display means of the image communication apparatus on the transmitting side, thereby displaying the image group. The user is prompted to select an image to be transmitted to the receiving image communication apparatus.

  According to this aspect, by displaying the image group stored as the transmission target on the display unit, the user of the image communication apparatus that transmits the image can easily select the image.

  According to a further preferred aspect, the image storage means of the image communication apparatus on the transmission side includes a main body built-in storage means (34) and a main body removable storage means (28). The main body built-in storage means is built in the main body of the image communication apparatus. The main body attachment / detachment storage means is configured to be detachable from the image communication apparatus main body. The image selection means includes storage destination selection means (SC50). The storage destination selection means selects either the main body built-in storage means or the main body attachment / detachment storage means. The image selection unit selects an image to be transmitted to the image communication apparatus on the receiving side from the image group stored in the storage unit selected by the storage destination selection unit according to a user operation.

  According to this aspect, an image to be transmitted can be limited to an image stored in a predetermined storage unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus on the receiving side further includes a determination unit and an image transmission continuation request transmission unit. The determination unit determines whether or not to further receive an image from the image communication device on the transmission side after receiving the image transmitted from the image communication device on the transmission side. The image transmission continuation request transmission unit transmits an image transmission continuation request to the image communication apparatus on the transmission side selected by the selection unit when the determination unit determines to further receive an image. When receiving the image transmission continuation request, the image transmission means transmits the image to the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the image transmission continuation request.

  According to this aspect, the image can be transmitted step by step from the image communication device on the transmission side to the image communication device on the reception side.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus on the transmission side further includes image selection means. After receiving the image transmission continuation request, the image selection unit selects an image to be transmitted to the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the image transmission continuation request according to a user operation. When the image transmission means receives the image transmission continuation request, the image transmission means transmits the image selected by the image selection means to the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the image transmission continuation request.

  According to this aspect, the image to be transmitted can be selected and transmitted every time there is a request from the receiving side.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus on the transmission side further includes a limiting unit. The restricting means restricts the number of images transmitted at a time by the image transmitting means.

  According to this aspect, since the image communication apparatus on the transmission side transmits images of a certain number or less, the reception side can receive the images while confirming the number of received images. It can be determined whether or not to continue receiving.

According to a further preferred aspect, the determination means determines whether or not to further receive an image from the image communication apparatus on the transmission side in accordance with a user operation. The image communication apparatus on the receiving side further includes reception end notification means. When the determination unit determines that the image is not received, the reception end notification unit transmits a reception end notification to the image communication apparatus selected by the selection unit. Each time the image transmission unit receives an image transmission request, the image transmission unit transmits an image only to the image communication apparatus that transmitted the image transmission request, except for the image communication apparatus that transmitted the reception end notification.

  According to this aspect, for each image communication device that receives an image, the image communication device that transmits the image can leave the target device that transmits the image at a timing that the user prefers.

  According to a further preferred aspect, the image communication device on the receiving side further includes remaining amount monitoring means. The remaining amount monitoring means monitors the remaining capacity of the storage capacity of the image storage means for further storing images. The reception end notification unit transmits a reception end notification to the image communication apparatus selected by the selection unit when the remaining amount is equal to or less than the predetermined amount.

  According to this aspect, the image communication apparatus on the image receiving side may automatically leave the image communication apparatus on the image transmitting apparatus side that transmits the image from the target apparatus that transmits the image according to the capacity capable of storing the image data. it can.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the image storage means of the image communication apparatus on the receiving side includes a main body built-in storage means and a main body removable storage means. The main body built-in storage means is built in the main body of the image communication apparatus. The main body attachment / detachment storage means is configured to be detachable from the image communication apparatus main body. The image communication apparatus on the receiving side further includes storage target determining means (SC50). The storage target determining means determines in advance either the main body built-in storage means or the main body removable storage means as a target for storing the received image. The image storage control unit stores the image transmitted from the image communication apparatus on the transmission side in the target determined by the storage target determination unit.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to store the received image data limited to a predetermined storage unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus further includes an imaging unit and an imaging unit. The imaging unit stores the image captured by the imaging unit in the image storage unit in accordance with a user's predetermined operation. The image transmission means transmits the image stored in the image storage means by the photographing means.

According to this aspect, an image captured by the image communication apparatus can be a transmission / reception target.
According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus (10r) receives an image from another image communication apparatus. The image communication apparatus includes storage means, transmission source information reception means, selection means, transmission destination information transmission control means, image reception means, and image storage control means. The transmission source information receiving means receives the identification information of the other image communication device as transmission source information indicating the transmission source from the other image communication device. The selection unit displays the transmission source on the display unit based on the received transmission source information, and causes the user to select whether or not to receive an image from the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the transmission source information. The transmission destination information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination to the image communication apparatus selected to be received by the selection means. The image receiving means receives an image transmitted from the image communication apparatus that transmitted the destination information. The image storage control means stores the image received by the image receiving means in the storage means.

According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus (10t) transmits an image to another image communication apparatus. The image communication apparatus includes image storage means, transmission source information transmission control means, transmission destination information reception control means, transmission destination determination means, and image transmission means. The image storage means stores a predetermined image. The transmission source information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission source information indicating the transmission source to other unspecified image communication apparatuses. The transmission destination information reception control unit receives the identification information of the other image communication apparatus as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination from the other image communication apparatus. The transmission destination determination unit determines an image communication apparatus as a transmission destination based on the received transmission destination information. The image transmission unit transmits at least one of the images stored in the image storage unit to the transmission destination determined by the transmission destination determination unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication apparatus (1) receives an image from another image communication apparatus or transmits an image to the other image communication apparatus. The image communication apparatus includes image storage means and transmission / reception selection means (SC51). The image storage means stores a predetermined image. The transmission / reception selection means selects whether to receive an image from another image communication apparatus or to transmit an image to another image communication apparatus. When the transmission / reception selection unit selects to receive an image from another image communication device, the image communication device includes a transmission source information reception unit, a selection unit, a transmission destination information transmission control unit, an image reception unit, and an image storage control unit. And further. The transmission source information receiving means receives the identification information of the other image communication device as transmission source information indicating the transmission source from the other image communication device. The selection unit displays the transmission source on the display unit based on the received transmission source information, and causes the user to select whether or not to receive an image from the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the transmission source information. The transmission destination information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination to the image communication apparatus selected to be received by the selection means. The image receiving means receives an image transmitted from the image communication apparatus that transmitted the destination information. The image storage control means stores the image received by the image receiving means in the image storage means. The image communication apparatus further includes a transmission source information transmission control means, a transmission destination information reception control means, a transmission destination determination means, and an image transmission means when the transmission / reception selection means selects transmission of an image to another image communication apparatus, Prepare. The transmission source information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission source information indicating the transmission source to other unspecified image communication apparatuses. The transmission destination information reception control unit receives the identification information of the other image communication apparatus as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination from the other image communication apparatus. The transmission destination determination unit determines an image communication apparatus as a transmission destination based on the received transmission destination information. The image transmission unit transmits at least one of the images stored in the image storage unit to the transmission destination determined by the transmission destination determination unit.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, the image communication program is executed by the computer (31) of the apparatus that receives an image from another image communication apparatus. The image communication program causes the computer to function as transmission source information reception means, selection means, transmission destination information transmission control means, image reception means, and image storage control means. The transmission source information receiving means receives the identification information of the other image communication device as transmission source information indicating the transmission source from the other image communication device. The selection unit displays the transmission source on the display unit based on the received transmission source information, and causes the user to select whether or not to receive an image from the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the transmission source information. The transmission destination information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination to the image communication apparatus selected to be received by the selection means. The image receiving means receives an image transmitted from the image communication apparatus that transmitted the destination information. The image storage control means stores the image received by the image receiving means in the storage device.

According to a more preferable aspect of the sixth aspect, there is provided an image communication program that is executed by a computer of an apparatus that receives an image from another image communication apparatus or transmits an image to another image communication apparatus. A predetermined image is stored in the storage device of the apparatus. The image communication program causes the computer to function as transmission / reception selection means. The transmission / reception selection means selects whether to receive an image from another image communication apparatus or to transmit an image to another image communication apparatus. When the transmission / reception selection unit selects to receive an image from another image communication device, the image communication program is a transmission source information reception unit, selection unit, transmission destination information transmission control unit, image reception unit, and image storage control unit. Make the computer work more. The transmission source information receiving means receives the identification information of the other image communication device as transmission source information indicating the transmission source from the other image communication device. The selection unit displays the transmission source on the display unit based on the received transmission source information, and causes the user to select whether or not to receive an image from the image communication apparatus that has transmitted the transmission source information. The transmission destination information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination to the image communication apparatus selected to be received by the selection means. The image receiving means receives an image transmitted from the image communication apparatus that transmitted the destination information. The image storage control means stores the image received by the image receiving means in the image storage means. When the transmission / reception selection unit selects to transmit an image to another image communication device, the image communication program is a computer as a transmission source information transmission control unit, a transmission destination information reception control unit, a transmission destination determination unit, and an image transmission unit Make it work more. The transmission source information transmission control means transmits its own identification information as transmission source information indicating the transmission source to other unspecified image communication apparatuses. The transmission destination information reception control unit receives the identification information of the other image communication apparatus as transmission destination information indicating the transmission destination from the other image communication apparatus. The transmission destination determination unit determines an image communication apparatus as a transmission destination based on the received transmission destination information. The image transmission unit transmits at least one of the images stored in the image storage unit to the transmission destination determined by the transmission destination determination unit.

  According to the image communication apparatus and the image communication program according to the aspect similar to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the same effect as that of the image communication system described above can be obtained.

<Seventh aspect>
According to a seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing program executed in a computer (1) that sets a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an input device (13). The information processing program receives a change operation from the position corresponding to the current value of the parameter in the predetermined display area (250) on the predetermined screen (500, 501, 502, 503). Change operation accepting means (SD110), first update means (SD114, SD115) for gradually updating the parameter from the current value based on the change operation accepted by the first change operation accepting means, Based on the second change operation accepting means (SD111) for accepting the change operation to the position corresponding to the desired value of the parameter in the display area, and the change operation accepted by the second change operation accepting means Is made to function as second update means (SD112, SD115) for updating the current value to the desired value. The second updating means updates the parameter from the current value to the desired value (SD115) when the desired value is smaller than the current value of the parameter (SD111, SD112), and the desired value is the parameter value. When the value is larger than the current value (SD111, SD113), the parameter is not updated from the current value to a desired value (SD113).

According to this aspect, the following seventh problem can be solved.
(Seventh issue)
In a general media player, the user cannot understand the maximum volume in the volume adjustment unit and the correspondence between the volume adjustment unit and the volume only by appearance, and even the same volume can be heard by changes in the surrounding environment. Therefore, it is difficult to immediately change to the volume desired by the user.

  In this regard, when it is not possible to immediately change to the user's desired volume, particularly when the volume is higher than the user's desired volume, it is unpleasant for the user and those who are in the vicinity of the user, There was a lot of potential for stress.

(Operational effects according to the seventh aspect)
According to a seventh aspect, there is provided an information processing program and an information processing apparatus for realizing a user interface suitable for a user operation in a parameter setting changing operation with respect to the seventh problem.

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the user receives a slider operation, which is a change operation from a position corresponding to the current value, by the input device (13), the parameters are gradually updated according to the slider position. On the other hand, when a change operation to a position corresponding to a desired value is received by the input device (13), the parameter is updated from the current value to the desired value when the desired value is smaller than the current value of the parameter. When the desired value is larger than the current value of the parameter, the parameter is not updated from the current value to the desired value.

  Therefore, the user can change the parameter by a series of operations on the input device (13). Specifically, the parameter can be gradually changed from the current value to a larger value or a smaller value. On the other hand, an operation input for changing the parameter from the current value to a value that suddenly increases is prohibited. As described above, in the parameter setting changing operation, the user can suppress the stress to the user or the like due to the sudden change of the parameter due to the erroneous operation by prohibiting the changing operation to the value where the parameter value suddenly increases. A user interface suitable for operation can be realized.

  According to an aspect similar to the seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing program executed in a computer for setting a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an input device (13). The information processing program causes the computer (10) to display a slider (252) indicating the current value of the parameter in a predetermined display area (550) on a predetermined screen (500, 501, 502, 503). (SD32, SD70, SD91), first moving operation receiving means (SD110, SD114) for receiving continuous moving operation from the position of the slider (552) corresponding to the current value of the parameter, and within a predetermined display area After the movement of the second movement operation accepting means (SD110, SD111) for accepting the movement operation to the position of the slider (552) according to the desired value of the parameter, and the slider (552) according to the movement operation accepting the parameter It is made to function as an update means (SD115) for updating to a value according to the position. Then, when the slider (552) moves in a direction smaller than the current value of the parameter, the second movement operation accepting means accepts a movement operation to the desired position of the slider (SD112), and the parameter If the slider moves in a direction larger than the current value, the movement operation to the desired position of the slider is not accepted (SD113).

  According to this similar situation, when the user accepts a continuous movement operation from the position of the slider (552) corresponding to the current value or a movement operation to the slider position corresponding to the desired value by the input device (13). The parameter is updated to a value corresponding to the position after the movement of the slider (552). On the other hand, when the slider moves in a direction in which the moving operation of the slider (552) becomes smaller than the current value by the input device (13), the moving operation to a desired position is accepted and is larger than the current value. When the slider moves in a certain direction, a moving operation to a desired position is not accepted.

  Therefore, the user can change the parameter by a series of operations on the input device (13). Specifically, the parameter can be gradually changed from a current value to a larger value or a smaller value by continuously moving the slider. On the other hand, when moving the slider to a position corresponding to a desired value, a moving operation in a direction increasing from the current value of the parameter is prohibited. As described above, in the parameter setting changing operation, the user is prevented from moving to a value where the parameter value suddenly increases, thereby suppressing the stress on the user or the like due to the sudden change of the parameter due to an erroneous operation. A user interface suitable for operation can be realized.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, the input device is a pointing device (27). According to this aspect, since the user performs an input to an arbitrary position on the touch panel with the touch pen (27), the operability of the user at the time of selection is improved.

According to a more preferable aspect of the seventh aspect, the means for updating the parameter from the current value to the desired value based on the change operation to the position of the information processing desired value gradually updates the parameter from the current value. . According to this aspect, even when the parameter is updated from the current value to a desired value, by gradually updating the parameter, the change in the parameter becomes smooth, so that it is possible to obtain a natural change in the parameter. is there.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the seventh aspect, the computer sets values of a plurality of types of parameters based on an input from the input device (13). A plurality of types of parameter values are associated with arbitrary positions within a predetermined display area.

  According to this aspect, since it is associated with a plurality of types of parameters, it is possible to easily execute the parameter setting from the input device.

  In particular, the predetermined display area is a multidimensional area corresponding to the number of parameter types set by the computer. According to this, since the dimensions are displayed according to the number of parameter types, the position of each parameter can be easily recognized.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the seventh aspect, the parameter corresponds to a volume level of a sound output from the output device of the computer. According to this aspect, it is possible to suppress an unpleasant feeling, that is, stress, from being felt to the user and a person existing in the vicinity of the user by suddenly increasing the volume from the current volume.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the seventh aspect, the parameter corresponds to a reproduction time of a file reproduced on the computer. According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the reproduction from being started from the position where the reproduction is not performed, and to suppress the user from feeling uncomfortable.

  According to another aspect similar to the seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing apparatus (10) that sets a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an input apparatus (13). The information processing apparatus (10) receives the change operation from the position corresponding to the current value of the parameter in the predetermined display area (550) on the predetermined screen (500, 501, 502, 503). A first updating means (SD114, SD115) for gradually updating the parameter from the current value based on the accepting means (552, SD110, SD114), the changing operation accepted by the first changing operation accepting means; In the display area, the second change operation accepting means (554, 555) for accepting the change operation to the position corresponding to the desired value of the parameter and the change operation accepted by the second change operation accepting means. And a second update means (SD111, SD112, SD115) for updating the parameter from the current value to a desired value. The second updating means updates the parameter from the current value to the desired value when the desired value is smaller than the current value of the parameter (554), and when the desired value is larger than the current value of the parameter. (555), the parameter is not updated from the current value to the desired value (SD113).

According to still another aspect similar to the seventh aspect of the present invention, an information processing apparatus for setting a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an input apparatus (13) is provided. The information processing apparatus (10) includes slider display means (SD32, SD32, SD) for displaying a slider (552) indicating a current value of a parameter in a predetermined display area (550) on a predetermined screen (500, 501, 502, 503). SD70, SD91), first movement operation accepting means (SD110, SD114) for accepting continuous movement operation from the position of the slider (552) corresponding to the current value of the parameter, and within the predetermined display area, The second movement operation accepting means (SD110, SD111) for accepting the movement operation to the position of the slider (552) according to the desired value, and the position after the movement of the slider (552) according to the movement operation for which the parameter is accepted. Update means (SD115) for updating to a corresponding value. When the slider moves in a direction smaller than the current value of the parameter, the second movement operation accepting unit accepts a movement operation of the slider (552) to a desired position (554, SD112), and the parameter If the slider moves in a direction larger than the current value, the movement operation of the slider to a desired position is not accepted (555, SD113).

<Eighth aspect>
According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, it is executed in the computer of the information processing apparatus (10) capable of reproducing music data, in which the upper member (21) and the lower member (11) are connected in an openable / closable manner. An information processing program is provided. The information processing program causes the computer to reproduce music data by playing music data (SD90), open / close detection means (SD150) for detecting the open / closed state of the upper member and the lower member, When playback is detected and the open / close detection means detects that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from an open state to a closed state, and a connection with a predetermined external output device is detected In the case of continuing the reproduction of the music data by the music reproduction means, and when the connection with the predetermined external output device is detected, the reproduction of the music data by the music reproduction means is continued, When the connection is not detected, it is made to function as sleep means (SD153, SD154) for stopping the reproduction of the music data by the music reproducing means.

According to this aspect, the following eighth problem can be solved.
(Eighth problem)
In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-216289 (Patent Document 1), when the computer device is a notebook PC that is a portable terminal device, the sleep processing is performed when the notebook PC is closed (closed state). The point of setting to a sleep state that is executed and stops operations such as display is shown. On the other hand, when the notebook PC is opened again (open state), the sleep state is set to the active state.

  Even when the sleep process is executed, when connected to a playback device that plays back music data via a USB cable, the notebook PC is connected to the playback device via the USB cable. A technique for partially setting an active state in order to transmit necessary data is disclosed.

  Therefore, even when the sleep process is executed, it is possible not to execute the sleep process for some functions related to the music data reproduction process.

  However, in the information terminal device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-216289 (Patent Document 1), it is not considered to perform music data reproduction processing in the information processing apparatus. Could not do.

(Effects of the eighth aspect)
According to an eighth aspect, there is provided an information processing program and an information processing apparatus for executing processing that is highly convenient for the user in reproducing music data, in response to the eighth problem.

  According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, when the user closes the upper member and the lower member, which are connected to the information processing apparatus so as to be opened and closed, the upper member and the lower member are opened. When it is detected that a transition to the closed state is detected and a connection with a predetermined external output device is detected, music data playback is continued, and a connection with the predetermined external output device is not detected The playback is stopped.

As shown in the exemplary embodiment, when the user changes the upper member and the lower member from the open state to the closed state, the connection of a predetermined external output device (typically headphones) is detected. In such a case, since the reproduction function is continued, an audio signal is output from the headphones. Therefore, since no audio signal is output from the speaker or the like of the apparatus, the user and surrounding people existing in the vicinity of the user do not feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the playback function is continued when the connection of headphones is detected, and the playback function is stopped when the connection of other headphones is not detected. Therefore, it is convenient for a user who is expected to shift to a sleep state in which reproduction stops.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the eighth aspect, the information program further causes the computer to function as continuous reproduction accepting means (517, SD161) for accepting a setting instruction for continuously reproducing music data. The music reproduction means reproduces the music data when the open / close detection means detects that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from the open state to the closed state and receives a setting instruction. If the setting instruction is not accepted, the reproduction of the music data is stopped when the reproduction of the currently executed music data is finished (SD163).

  According to this aspect, when the user inputs a setting instruction for continuously playing music data, it is detected that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from the open state to the closed state. In this case, the music data is continuously played back, and if no setting instruction is input, the playback of the music data is stopped when the currently executed music data playback is finished.

  As shown in the exemplary embodiment, when the user selects the “playback mode” switching icon 517 and repeats playback, that is, selects a playback mode in which music data is continuously played back, When playback of data is continued and other playback modes are selected, when playback of the music data currently being executed is finished, playback is stopped and the user is continuously played back. Since it is determined whether or not the reproduction is continued according to the instruction, it is possible to execute the reproduction according to the user's intention. In addition, when the reproduction of the music data currently being executed is finished, the reproduction is stopped, so that the reproduction can be finished without giving the user a sense of incongruity.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, the information processing program causes the computer to receive reproduction setting accepting means (561, SD212) for accepting a setting instruction for switching between stereo reproduction or monaural reproduction in the reproduction of music data by the music reproducing means. , SD213). When the music reproduction means receives the setting instruction and the connection with the predetermined external output device is detected, the music reproduction means performs reproduction according to the setting instruction and the connection with the predetermined external output device is not detected. In the case of a failure, stereo playback is performed (SD214, SD215).

  According to this aspect, in the reproduction of the music data, the reproduction setting means that receives a setting instruction for switching between stereo reproduction or monaural reproduction functions, and when connection with a predetermined external output device is detected, stereo reproduction is performed according to the setting instruction. Playback or monaural playback is executed.

  As shown in the exemplary embodiment, when playing back to an external output device (typically, headphones), the user selects the “headphone” function selection icon 561 to switch to the headphone format. Accordingly, it is possible to select an appropriate reproduction process.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, the information processing program is configured to reproduce music that is played back by the music playback means when a connection between the computer and a predetermined external output device is detected (SD140). It further functions as adjusting means (SD141) for adjusting a predetermined frequency band of data.

  According to this aspect, when connection with an external output device (typically, headphones) is detected, the adjusting means for adjusting a predetermined frequency band of music data to be played back functions.

  As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user wears an external output device (typically headphones), the acoustic characteristics change greatly due to the wearing of the headphones by performing equalization processing. However, by adjusting the predetermined frequency band, it is possible to perform reproduction without giving the user a sense of incongruity.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the eighth aspect, the information processing program stores predetermined data of music data to be played back by the music playback means when a connection between the computer and a predetermined external output device is detected. It further functions as an adjusting means for adjusting the timbre.

  According to this aspect, when connection with an external output device (typically, headphones) is detected, the adjusting means for adjusting a predetermined tone color of music data to be played back functions.

  As shown in a typical embodiment, when a user wears an external output device (typically headphones), for example, when playing from a speaker, the sound of a high pitch without a sense of discomfort By replacing the sound that is overpriced when listening with headphones with another sound with low pitch, or by replacing the sound that makes noise when listening with headphones with other sounds, playback without making the user feel uncomfortable. It becomes possible to execute.

  According to a more preferable aspect of the eighth aspect, the information processing program is configured to reproduce the volume of music data to be reproduced in the music reproducing means when a connection between the computer and a predetermined external output device is detected. It further functions as an adjusting means for adjusting.

  According to this aspect, when connection with an external output device (typically, headphones) is detected, the adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the music data to be played back functions.

  As shown in a typical embodiment, when a user wears an external output device (typically, headphones), for example, when reproducing from a speaker, reproduction with a good balance without a sense of incongruity is performed. Concerning the volume of the audio signal, the user feels uncomfortable by adjusting the volume of the sound of the sound signal that is reproduced when listening through headphones to be in good balance by increasing or decreasing the volume of the sound. It is possible to execute the reproduction without any problem.

  According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, the sleep means displays the display function when the open / close detection means detects that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from the open state to the closed state. To stop at least part of.

  According to this aspect, when it is detected that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from the open state to the closed state, at least a part of the display function is stopped.

  As shown in the exemplary embodiment, when the user changes the upper member and the lower member from the open state to the closed state, it is not necessary to operate at least a part of the display function by stopping. It is possible to save power consumed by stopping the function and entering the sleep state.

According to another aspect of the eighth aspect, there is provided an information processing program executed in a computer of an information processing apparatus capable of reproducing music data, wherein the computer reproduces music data, music reproducing means, In the reproduction of the music data by the reproducing means, it functions as a reproduction setting accepting means for accepting a setting instruction for switching between stereo reproduction or monaural reproduction. When the music reproduction means receives the setting instruction and the connection with the predetermined external output device is detected, the music reproduction means performs reproduction according to the setting instruction and the connection with the predetermined external output device is not detected. If it does, stereo playback is performed.

  According to this aspect, in the reproduction of the music data, the reproduction setting means that receives a setting instruction for switching between stereo reproduction or monaural reproduction functions, and when connection with a predetermined external output device is detected, stereo reproduction is performed according to the setting instruction. Playback or monaural playback is executed.

  As shown in the exemplary embodiment, when playing back to an external output device (typically, headphones), the user selects the “headphone” function selection icon 561 to switch to the headphone format. Accordingly, it is possible to select an appropriate reproduction process.

  According to still another aspect of the eighth aspect, there is provided an information processing apparatus (10) capable of reproducing music data in which an upper member (21) and a lower member (11) are connected to be openable and closable. A music playback means (SD90) for playing back music data, an open / close detection means (SD150) for detecting the open / closed state of the upper member and the lower member, and music data being played back by the music playback means. When it is detected by the means that the upper member and the lower member have transitioned from the open state to the closed state, if a connection with a predetermined external output device is detected, the music reproducing means When music data playback is continued and connection with a predetermined external output device is detected, music data playback by music playback means is continued, and connection with a predetermined external output device is not detected The sound Stop playing the music data by the reproducing means and a sleep unit (SD153, SD154).

  According to this further aspect, there is provided an information processing apparatus capable of reproducing music data, a music reproducing means for reproducing music data, and stereo reproduction or monaural reproduction in music data reproduction by the music reproducing means. Reproduction setting accepting means (SD261, SD212, SD213) for accepting a setting instruction for switching, and when the setting instruction is accepted, the music reproducing means is set when connection with a predetermined external output device is detected. Playback is performed in accordance with the instruction, and when connection with a predetermined external output device is not detected, stereo playback is performed (SD214, SD215).

<9th aspect>
According to a ninth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing device (10) that can be opened and closed by a plurality of housings (11, 21). The information processing apparatus (10) uses the imaging means (23) and the voice input means (21C, 42), the storage means (34), and the imaging means provided in the connecting portions of the plurality of housings to capture the imaging data. Obtaining imaging data acquisition means (31, SA50), imaging data storage control means (31, SA54) for storing imaging data acquired by the data acquisition means in the storage means, and obtaining voice data using the voice input means Voice data acquisition means (31, SD171) to perform, and voice data storage control means (33, SD173) to store the voice data acquired by the voice data acquisition means in the storage means.

Note that the imaging data includes a still image and a moving image. Moreover, as a structure which can be opened and closed, in addition to the folding type | mold mentioned later, a slide type | mold, a rotation type | mold, and these composite types are included. Note that the information processing apparatus of the present application can be configured to change between a state in which a predetermined surface of at least one housing is hidden by the other housing and an exposed state by folding, sliding, and rotating. In particular, when a display portion is provided on the predetermined surface, the display portion may be changed between a hidden state and an exposed state by folding, sliding, and rotating.

According to this aspect, the following ninth problem can be solved.
(Ninth issue)
In the portable devices disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-31224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2), a camera as an image pickup unit and a microphone as an audio input unit are each provided with a shooting function And it was not placed at a position suitable for the voice acquisition function.

  In addition, the information processing apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-195830 (Patent Document 3) does not consider the photographing function at all, but is disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4). The information equipment that was used did not consider the voice acquisition function at all.

  As another problem, various storage media for storing programs in a configuration in which various programs are executed by a computer have been proposed. In such a case, the idea of causing a program stored in a storage medium incorporated in the computer main body (information processing apparatus) and a program stored in a storage medium mounted on the computer to be executed in cooperation with each other is No prior art disclosed or suggested.

  As yet another problem, in a configuration that provides a user with a menu screen (so-called launcher function) that allows a user to select a program to be started from a plurality of application programs, the idea of simultaneously providing functions other than the launcher function is as follows: It is not disclosed or suggested in any prior art.

(Effects of the ninth aspect)
According to a ninth aspect, the present invention has been made to solve at least one of the ninth problems. A first object of the present invention is to provide an information processing apparatus having a structure suitable for a photographing function and / or a sound acquisition function. A second object of the present invention is to provide an information processing system capable of executing a program stored in a storage medium built in the main body and a storage medium attached from the outside in cooperation with each other. is there. Furthermore, a third object of the present invention is to provide a startup program suitable for an information processing apparatus equipped with a photographing function and a storage medium storing the program.

  That is, according to this aspect, the image pickup means (23) and the sound input means (21C, 42) are provided at the connecting portion of the plurality of housings (11, 21), so that the open / close angle between the housings is affected. And substantially the same positional relationship can be maintained. Accordingly, the relative positional relationship between the imaging unit (23) and the voice input unit (21C, 42) with respect to the user is maintained substantially constant regardless of the usage form of the information processing apparatus. // Voice acquisition operation becomes possible.

  Further, according to this aspect, since the image pickup means (23) and the voice input means (21C, 42) are arranged at the connecting portion, the user can hold only one of the plurality of housings (11, 21) with one hand. It is also possible to perform a shooting operation and / or a voice acquisition operation by gripping with both, and hold both housings (11, 21) with both hands to perform a shooting operation and / or a voice acquisition operation more stably. It is also possible. Thereby, it can use in the form according to the condition which image | photographs and / or audio | voice acquisition.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes imaging data reproduction means (31, SA41) for reproducing imaging data stored in the storage means. Thereby, the imaging data obtained by imaging can be confirmed immediately.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes imaging data editing means (31, SA58) for editing imaging data stored in the storage means. Thereby, the user can enjoy by performing desired editing operation with respect to the imaging data obtained by imaging.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes audio data reproduction means (31, SD76 #) for reproducing audio data stored in the storage means. Thereby, the acquired voice data can be confirmed immediately.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes voice data editing means (31, SD262) for editing voice data stored in the storage means. As a result, the user can enjoy the obtained audio data by performing a desired editing operation.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) transmits the imaging data stored in the short-range wireless communication means (38) and the storage means to another information processing apparatus using the short-range wireless communication means. The transmission control means (31, SC52) and the imaging data reception control means (31, SC53) for receiving imaging data from other information processing apparatuses using the short-range wireless communication means and storing them in the storage means Including.

  According to this preferable aspect, the imaging data obtained by imaging can be exchanged between users having the same type of information processing apparatus. Thereby, the same imaging data can be shared and enjoyed within the group, or imaging data obtained by imaging can be distributed to other users and enjoyed.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes an opening / closing detection means (50) for detecting opening / closing, and the imaging data reproducing means captures an image stored in the storage means each time the opening / closing detection means detects the opening / closing. A captured image is displayed based on different captured data among the data (SA73). The captured image is displayed on a display unit that changes between a hidden state and an exposed state by folding, sliding, and rotating.

  According to this preferable aspect, whenever the information processing apparatus is opened and closed, the displayed imaging data changes as needed, so that the user can enjoy when opening the information processing apparatus.

  Preferably, the storage means causes the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as the imaging data acquisition means and the imaging data storage control means, and the imaging data acquisition program (53) and the computer of the information processing apparatus as audio data acquisition means and audio data. An audio data acquisition program (57) that functions as storage control means is further stored. Then, when the information processing apparatus (10) starts up the information processing apparatus, at least one of the imaging data acquisition program or the audio data acquisition program is selected, and an activation control unit that activates the selected program (31, SA5 to SA13), and the activation control means has a function (31, SA10) for acquiring imaging data using the imaging means and storing it in the storage means.

  According to this preferable aspect, in an environment where at least the imaging data acquisition program (53) and the audio data acquisition program (57) can be executed, the user can execute a desired program by the activation control means (31, SA5 to SA13). It can be easily selected and executed.

Furthermore, according to this preferable aspect, the imaging data acquisition program (53) can be directly started during execution of the imaging function by the imaging processing means. That is, since the shooting function provided by the shooting data acquisition program (53) can be easily activated from the shooting function provided by the shooting processing means, the user who is in contact with the shooting function provided by the shooting processing means can be used. The user can be guided to use the imaging function provided by the imaging data acquisition program (53).

  Preferably, the information processing device (10) is provided on the upper surface of the other one of the plurality of housings on the side where one of the plurality of housings exists when the information processing device is opened. The imaging data recording means further includes first operation means (14I, 14J), and when the first operation means is operated, the imaging data is acquired using the imaging means and stored in the storage means.

  According to this preferable aspect, the user can perform the acquisition operation of the imaging data by operating the first operation means (14I, 14J) with the hand holding the information processing apparatus. That is, since the imaging data acquisition operation can be performed while the information processing apparatus is held, the imaging operation can be easily performed. For this reason, the structure suitable for a more portable information processing apparatus can be provided.

  Preferably, the imaging unit and the voice input unit are provided in the vicinity of the center of the connecting portion. Thereby, the relative positional relationship between the information processing device and the user is substantially the same between when the user grips the information processing device with only the right hand and when the user grips the information processing device with only the left hand. it can.

  More preferably, the imaging means is provided at the center of the connecting portion, and the sound input means is provided at a position offset from the center of the connecting portion. The imaging range of the imaging means is determined centering on the position passing therethrough, whereas the voice acquisition range of the voice input means is relatively wide, so the imaging means should be preferentially provided at the center of the connecting portion. This makes it possible to shoot in a more appropriate situation.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes display means (12, 22) provided in each housing. Thereby, the image etc. which were imaged by the imaging means can also be displayed.

  Preferably, the housing is a horizontally long housing. By adopting a horizontally long housing, the configuration is suitable for the movement of the user's eyes.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) includes a first and second operating means (14A to 14E) disposed on the left and right of the display means in one of the plurality of housings, and the plurality of housings. Another housing includes first and second audio output means (21D, 45, 47) arranged on the left and right sides of the display means, respectively.

  According to this preferred aspect, the voice acquired by the voice acquisition means can be output.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) further includes connection means (36, 37) for detachably mounting the memory card (28, 29). As a result, it is possible to freely attach a memory card storing various programs, imaging data, or audio data to display or play back on the information processing apparatus, or to arbitrarily store acquired imaging data or audio data. it can. As a result, the degree of freedom and expansion of the information processing apparatus can be dramatically increased.

  More preferably, the imaging data storage control means can selectively store imaging data in the storage means and the memory card.

  Alternatively, more preferably, the audio data storage control means can selectively store the audio data in the storage means and the memory card.

  With these configurations, imaging data and / or audio data can be stored in an arbitrary storage medium according to the number, type, size, and the like, so that the degree of freedom of the user can be increased. Further, by storing the imaging data and / or audio data in the memory card, the imaging data and / or audio data can be output to a device different from the information processing device.

  Preferably, it is possible to store a program that causes the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as the imaging data acquisition unit and the imaging data storage control unit in a built-in storage unit, and cause the computer of the information processing apparatus to execute the program. Thereby, the information processing apparatus can provide the user with a photographing function alone without attaching a memory or the like from the outside.

  More preferably, the application program stored in the memory card can be read out and executed by the computer of the information processing apparatus. Thereby, the information processing apparatus can selectively execute various application programs regardless of the capacity limitation of the built-in storage means.

  An information processing system according to another aspect of the present invention stores the above information processing device and a program that causes the computer of the information processing device to function as an imaging data acquisition unit and an imaging data storage control unit as an application program, and stores data The imaging data storage control unit can selectively store the imaging data in either the storage unit or the memory card.

  In the information processing system according to this aspect, the user can selectively store imaging data in a built-in storage unit and a memory card attached from the outside, so that a storage medium can be used depending on the situation.

  An information processing system according to yet another aspect of the present invention causes the information processing apparatus and the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as an imaging data utilization processing unit that uses imaging data stored in a storage unit as an application program. And a memory card for storing the program.

  An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention provides an imaging data utilization processing unit that uses the information processing apparatus and the computer of the information processing apparatus as an application program and uses the imaging data stored in the storage unit and the memory card. And a memory card that stores a program that functions as a memory card.

  An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention stores the above information processing apparatus and a program that causes the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as voice data acquisition means and voice data storage control means as an application program. The audio data storage control means can selectively store the audio data in either the storage means or the memory card.

In the information processing system according to this aspect, the user can selectively store the voice data in the built-in storage means and the memory card attached from the outside, and therefore a storage medium can be used according to the situation.

  An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention causes the information processing apparatus and the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as sound data use processing means that uses sound data stored in a storage means, as an application program. And a memory card for storing the program.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided an information processing system that uses the information processing apparatus and a computer of the information processing apparatus as an application program, and a voice data utilization processing unit that uses voice data stored in a memory unit and a memory card. And a memory card that stores a program that functions as a memory card.

  The information processing apparatus (10) preferably includes a plurality of connection means for detachably mounting the memory card. As a result, a plurality of various memory cards can be simultaneously loaded, and the user can select and execute a desired program from a larger number of application programs.

  More preferably, the connection means includes a first connection means for detachably mounting a general-purpose standard memory card (28) and a second connection for detachably mounting a dedicated standard memory card (29). Connecting means.

  According to this preferable aspect, the user can easily exchange imaging data and / or audio data with another user or easily move it to another device via a general-purpose standard memory card. On the other hand, by storing various application programs in a dedicated standard memory card, unauthorized operations can be prevented. In addition, by storing imaging data and / or audio data in a dedicated standard memory card, it is also possible to store information unique to the information device according to the present invention and display various effects and information. It becomes.

  More preferably, the imaging data storage control means can selectively store the imaging data in a storage means, a general-purpose standard memory card, and a dedicated standard memory card.

  More preferably, the audio data storage control means can selectively store the audio data in the storage means, the general-purpose standard memory card, and the dedicated standard memory card.

  According to these preferable aspects, the user can store the acquired imaging data and / or audio data in a more appropriate memory card according to the contents thereof. In addition, it is possible to improve the efficiency of organizing imaging data and / or audio data.

  Still more preferably, it is allowed to read out an application program stored in a memory card of a dedicated standard and execute it on the computer of the information processing apparatus, and to read out an application program stored in a memory card of a general-purpose standard, The information processing apparatus is prohibited from being executed by a computer. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to the execution of unauthorized application programs or the like stored in a general-purpose standard memory card.

An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention causes the information processing apparatus and the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as a second imaging data acquisition unit and a second imaging data storage control unit as an application program. And a dedicated standard memory card for storing programs. The second imaging data storage control unit can selectively store the imaging data in at least one of a storage unit, a general-purpose standard memory card, and a dedicated standard memory card.

  An information processing system according to yet another aspect of the present invention causes the information processing apparatus and the computer of the information processing apparatus to function as a second sound data acquisition unit and a second sound data storage control unit as the application program. And a second audio data storage control unit that selectively selects the audio data as at least one of a storage unit, a general-purpose standard memory card, and a dedicated standard memory card. Can be memorized.

  According to these aspects, the user can selectively store imaging data and / or audio data in a built-in storage means and a general-purpose memory card and a dedicated-standard memory card that are mounted from the outside. Thus, a storage medium can be used.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, an information processing system includes the above-described information processing apparatus and, as an application program, a computer of the information processing apparatus that is stored in a storage unit, a general-purpose standard memory card, and a dedicated standard memory card. And a dedicated standard memory card that stores a program that functions as imaging data utilization processing means that utilizes data.

  An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention includes a memory card (28, 29) and an information processing apparatus (10) capable of reading an application program stored in the memory card and executing processing. . The information processing apparatus (10) includes an imaging unit (23), a built-in storage unit (34), a connection unit (36, 37) for detachably mounting a memory card, and a built-in program storage unit (901). 908), and the built-in program storage means includes first imaging data acquisition means for acquiring imaging data using the imaging means, and imaging data acquired by the imaging data acquisition means. Is stored in a built-in storage means, and a memory card stores an image processing data as an application program by using a computer of an information processing apparatus as an application program. Second imaging data acquisition means and imaging data acquired by imaging data acquisition means are stored in a built-in storage means 2 imaging data storage control means stores a program to function as a.

  An information processing system according to still another aspect of the present invention includes a memory card (28, 29) and an information processing apparatus capable of reading an application program stored in the memory card and executing processing. The information processing apparatus (10) includes an imaging unit (23), a built-in storage unit (34), a connection unit (36, 37) for detachably mounting a memory card, and a built-in program storage unit (901). 908), and the built-in program storage means includes first imaging data acquisition means for acquiring imaging data using the imaging means, and imaging data acquired by the imaging data acquisition means. Is stored in a built-in storage unit, and a memory card stores an image data stored in the built-in storage unit as an application program. Stores a program that functions as an imaging data utilization processing unit that uses.

According to still another aspect of the present invention, the image processing unit (23) has an imaging unit (23) and is executed in a computer of the information processing apparatus (10) capable of storing a plurality of application programs. An activation program (51) for selectively activating a desired application program is provided. The activation program (51) includes a first activation operation accepting means (SA6, SA11) for accepting a first activation operation for selectively activating a plurality of application programs, and a plurality of applications when the first activation operation is performed. A first activation unit (SA12) that reads an application program selected by the first activation operation among the programs into a predetermined storage unit for storing a program executed by the computer, and activates the application program; In response to a predetermined photographing operation, the computer is caused to function as photographing processing means (SA10) that performs photographing processing for storing an image captured by the photographing means in the storage means.

  According to this aspect, the user can select an application program to be executed from among a plurality of application programs by the first activation operation, and can also acquire a captured image by the imaging unit by a predetermined imaging operation. Therefore, the user can easily and quickly use the photographing function even in a state before the application program is started. Further, the photographing processing means can be activated during the execution of the photographing function provided by the activation program.

  Preferably, the photographing processing unit has a photographing function for storing the image captured by the imaging unit in the storage unit, and does not have a function for editing an image photographed by the photographing function.

  Preferably, the photographing processing unit has a photographing function for storing the image captured by the imaging unit in the storage unit, and does not have a function for arbitrarily browsing the image photographed by the photographing function.

  According to these aspects, the imaging processing means provided by the activation program does not provide image editing and / or image browsing functions, so that the user wants to use the imaging application program having these functions. become. As a result, the user can be guided to use the photographing application program from the photographing processing means.

  Preferably, the information processing apparatus (10) stores, as an application program, a shooting application program (53) having a shooting function for saving a captured image obtained by the imaging unit in a storage unit. As a result, the user desires to use a shooting application program with higher functionality, and can guide the user to use the shooting application program.

  More preferably, the photographing application program further has a function of editing a photographed image.

  Preferably, the photographing application program further has a function of browsing arbitrarily from the photographed images.

  Preferably, the photographing application program stores the photographed image in a storage unit.

  Preferably, the activation program can exchange a captured image stored in the storage unit with another information processing apparatus.

  Preferably, the photographing application program stores the photographed image in the storage unit in accordance with the photographing operation.

  Preferably, the captured image stored in the storage unit is displayed together with an image for selectively starting a plurality of application programs (SA5).

Preferably, when the activated application program is terminated, when displaying together with images for selectively activating a plurality of application programs by executing the activation program, among the captured images stored in the storage unit, A captured image different from the previous one is displayed (SA28).

  According to these aspects, since the shooting application program can provide the user with more advanced functions than the shooting processing means provided by the activation program, the attractiveness of the shooting application program can be enhanced.

  According to still another aspect of the present invention, a storage medium storing any one of the above-described startup programs is provided.

  As described above, according to the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an information processing apparatus having a structure suitable for the photographing function and / or the sound acquisition function. Further, it is possible to provide an information processing system capable of executing programs stored in a storage medium built in the main body and a storage medium attached from the outside in cooperation with each other. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a startup program suitable for an information processing apparatus equipped with a photographing function and a storage medium storing the program.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  10 game devices, 11 lower housing, 12 lower LCD, 13 touch panel, 21 upper housing, 22 upper LCD, 23 inner camera, 25 outer camera.

Claims (9)

A display unit;
A touch panel that accepts user operations;
A first imaging unit provided on a surface opposite to the display surface of the display unit;
A second imaging unit different from the first imaging unit;
A storage unit for storing an image captured by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit;
The first image captured by the first imaging unit is displayed in the first display area, and one or more second images stored in the storage unit are displayed in the second display area. Display control means for
Zoom means for performing a zoom operation on the first imaging unit in response to a first user operation on the display unit, the first display area of the display unit corresponding to the zoom operation A magnification image is displayed,
In response to a second user operation on the display unit, an imaging unit that stores an image captured by the first imaging unit in the storage unit;
In response to a third user operation on the display unit, a switching unit that activates one of the first imaging unit and the second imaging unit is provided.
An information processing apparatus in which areas for receiving the first user operation, the second user operation, and the third user operation are provided at different positions on the same display surface. An information processing apparatus,
A display unit;
A touch panel that accepts user operations;
A first imaging unit provided on a surface opposite to the display surface of the display unit;
A second imaging unit different from the first imaging unit;
A storage unit for storing an image captured by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit;
A first imaging application program that controls imaging by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit and a second imaging application program that has a function limited to that of the first imaging application program are selectively used. A processing unit that can be executed
Simple startup means for starting the second imaging application program in a state where the first imaging application program is not executed;
Normal starting means for starting the first photographing application program in response to an operation different from the operation used when starting the second photographing application program;
The first imaging application program displays the first image captured by the first imaging unit on the information processing apparatus in a first display area and is stored in the storage unit 1 or Display control means for displaying a plurality of second images in the second display area;
In response to a first user operation on the display unit, the zoom unit functions as a zoom unit that performs a zoom operation on the first imaging unit, and the first display area of the display unit has a magnification corresponding to the zoom operation. An image capturing unit that stores the image captured by the first image capturing unit in the storage unit in response to a second user operation on the display unit.
In response to a third user operation on the display unit, function as a switching unit that activates one of the first imaging unit and the second imaging unit,
An information processing apparatus in which areas for receiving the first user operation, the second user operation, and the third user operation are provided at different positions on the same display surface. The information processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the area for receiving the second user operation is arranged at a central portion of a display surface.   The information processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein an area for receiving the first user operation is larger than an area for receiving the third user operation.   The information processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the first image is displayed in a size larger than the second image. The information processing apparatus according to claim 1 , wherein the first user operation includes a movement of a touch position on a display surface.   The editing apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising an editing unit that activates an editing function for the second image stored in the storage unit in response to a touch operation on the second image. Information processing device. An information processing program executed by an information processing apparatus,
The information processing apparatus includes:
A display unit;
A touch panel that accepts user operations;
A first imaging unit provided on a surface opposite to the display surface of the display unit;
A second imaging unit different from the first imaging unit;
A storage unit that stores an image captured by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit,
The information processing program causes the information processing apparatus to
The first image captured by the first imaging unit is displayed in the first display area, and one or more second images stored in the storage unit are displayed in the second display area. Display control means for
In response to a first user operation on the display unit, the zoom unit functions as a zoom unit that performs a zoom operation on the first imaging unit, and the first display area of the display unit corresponds to the zoom operation. An imaging unit that displays an image of magnification, and further stores an image captured by the first imaging unit in the storage unit in response to a second user operation on the display unit;
In response to a third user operation on the display unit, function as a switching unit that activates one of the first imaging unit and the second imaging unit,
An information processing program in which areas for receiving the first user operation, the second user operation, and the third user operation are provided at different positions on the same display surface. An information processing program executed by an information processing apparatus,
The information processing apparatus includes:
A display unit;
A touch panel that accepts user operations;
A first imaging unit provided on a surface opposite to the display surface of the display unit;
A second imaging unit different from the first imaging unit;
A storage unit for storing an image captured by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit;
A first imaging application program that controls imaging by the first imaging unit or the second imaging unit and a second imaging application program that has a function limited to that of the first imaging application program are selectively used. And an executable processing unit,
The information processing program causes the information processing apparatus to
Simple startup means for starting the second imaging application program in a state where the first imaging application program is not executed;
Normal starting means for starting the first photographing application program in response to an operation different from the operation used when starting the second photographing application program;
When the first imaging application program is executed, the first image captured by the first imaging unit is displayed in the first display area, and one or more first images stored in the storage unit are displayed. Display control means for displaying two images in the second display area;
During execution of the first imaging application program, in response to a first user operation on the display unit, the first imaging application program functions as zoom means for performing a zoom operation on the first imaging unit, and the first display on the display unit In the area, an image with a magnification corresponding to the zoom operation is displayed, and further, an image captured by the first imaging unit is stored in the storage unit in response to a second user operation on the display unit. Imaging means;
In response to a third user operation on the display unit, function as a switching unit that activates one of the first imaging unit and the second imaging unit,
An information processing program in which areas for receiving the first user operation, the second user operation, and the third user operation are provided at different positions on the same display surface.

Images